THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 Scientific and Practical Treatise 
 
 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Scboote ant> Colleges 
 
 BY 
 
 A. ALONZO STAGG 
 
 AND 
 
 HENRY L. WILLIAMS 
 
 HARTFORD, CONN. 
 
 Press of The Case, Lockwood & Brainard Company 
 1893
 
 Copyright, 1893, 
 
 by 
 A. A. STAGG and H. L. WILLIAMS, 
 
 All rights reserved.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Preface, 3 
 
 Introductory chapter for Beginners and Spectators, 7 
 
 Training, 12 
 
 The Center-rusher, . . . . . . . 18 
 
 The Guard 26 
 
 The Tackle, 34 
 
 The End-rusher, ....... 43 
 
 The Quarter-back, 50 
 
 The Half-backs and Full-back, . . . . 58 
 
 Plays, with diagrams, 75 
 
 Index of Plays, 216 
 
 Team Play, 221 
 
 Field Tactics, . . 233 
 
 Signals, ......... 257 
 
 Axioms, 262 
 
 Rules, 265 
 
 711196
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 THE game of football is fast becoming the national 
 fall sport of the American youth. Among the 
 larger eastern colleges, where it has been fostered and 
 developed, football has now been raised to a definite 
 science, but in the west the game is, as yet, compara- 
 tively in its infancy 
 
 The demand has been rapidly increasing among the 
 smaller colleges and large preparatory schools from year 
 to year for competent coachers, and it is evident that 
 there is felt a wide-spread want for some source of 
 definite information which shall describe the manner of 
 executing the various evolutions, the methods of inter- 
 ference, and the more difficult and complicated points of 
 the game. 
 
 It is with the desire of meeting this want so far as 
 is possible, and with the hope of stimulating a love for 
 the game and of raising the standard of play among the 
 school-boys of this country, to whom the colleges and 
 universities must look for the material out of which to 
 construct their future elevens, that the authors have pre- 
 pared this volume. 
 
 The endeavor has been made to begin with simple 
 steps in the early development of the game and advance 
 by gradual stages to the most difficult evolutions and 
 scientific tactics which have been mastered up to the 
 
 (3)
 
 present day. In working out this principle the aim 
 throughout has been clearness and precision. 
 
 While it is the primary desire to furnish in this work 
 a practical aid in the attainment of a higher standard 
 of play among the preparatory schools and colleges, still 
 it is hoped that the general public will find it an assist- 
 ance to the better understanding of American football, 
 which has come to hold such a prominent place in popu- 
 lar favor. THE AUTHORS. 
 
 September 15, 1893.
 
 r , 
 o z 
 
 I"S 
 
 IN GOAL 
 GOAL LINE ,GOAL, GOAL LINE 
 
 I s ! 
 
 iO 
 
 o 
 
 z. 
 o 
 o 
 m 
 
 o: 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 h- 
 
 H 
 ul 
 : uJ 
 > u. 
 
 1 8 
 
 O 
 
 </i 
 
 O 
 
 z 
 3 
 o 
 
 03 
 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 'IS'-sFtJ 
 160 FEET 
 
 TOUCH OR .BOUNDS 330 FEET TOUCH OR BOUNDS 
 IN TOUCH 
 
 
 
 
 25 YARD LINE 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3NPI QHVA S? 
 
 ID 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 133J 091 
 1 1J*(9i 1 
 
 z< 
 o~ 
 
 3NH 1V09 nV09 3NH 1V09 
 1V09 Nl 
 
 H
 
 INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER 
 
 FOR 
 
 BEGINNERS AND SPECTATORS. 
 
 American football is played on a rectangular field, 
 three hundred and thirty feet long and one hundred and 
 sixty feet wide, enclosed by heavy white lines marked in 
 lime upon the ground. For the convenience of the 
 referee in fulfilling his duties, the field is marked by ad- 
 ditional lines five yards apart crossing from side to side, 
 the fifth from either end being indicated by an especially 
 heavy one known as the ' ' twenty-five yard line. " The 
 " center of the field " is located at the middle point of the 
 eleventh line. 
 
 At the center of the goal lines at each end of the field 
 two goal posts, from fifteen to twenty feet high, are 
 erected eighteen and one-half feet apart, and connected 
 by a cross-bar ten feet from the ground. Two ' ' teams " 
 of eleven men each contest in the game. Seven of 
 them, called the rushers, or forwards, stand opposing a 
 corresponding seven of the opposite eleven, whenever 
 the ball is down for a " scrimmage." The one in the 
 middle is known as the center rusher, or center, and on 
 either side of him are the right and left guards, the right 
 and left tackles, and the right and left ends, respectively. 
 The four remaining players are the quarter-back, right 
 and left half-backs, and the full-back, who stand behind 
 
 (7)
 
 8 
 
 the line of rushers and occupy positions which vary ac- 
 cording to whether they or their opponents have the ball. 
 The positions which the players will occupy when about 
 to execute the different movements of the game are shown 
 by the diagrams in the chapter describing the various 
 evolutions. At the beginning of the game the ball is 
 placed at the center of the field. The side in possession 
 of the ball constitutes the side of attack, and endeavors 
 to carry it down the field by kicking or running with it, 
 in order to place it on the ground behind the opponents' 
 goal line. The other side, forced to act upon the defen- 
 sive, are drawn up in opposition, and strive to check their 
 advance and to get possession of the ball themselves, so 
 that they may no longer act upon the defensive, but 
 become, "in turn, the attacking party. 
 
 The rules of the game (see final chapter), place certain 
 restrictions upon the attacking side and upon the defense, 
 and it is the attempt made in accordance with these rules 
 by each side to retain the ball in their possession and 
 carry it down the field through all opposition, in order to 
 place it behind their opponents' goal, which furnishes in 
 rough outline the essential features of the American 
 game of football. 
 
 Before the game is to begin the captains of the re- 
 spective teams decide by a toss of the coin which side 
 shall first be given possession of the ball. The side having 
 the ball then places it down upon the center of the field 
 and arrange themselves in any formation which they de- 
 sire, behind the line on which the ball is placed, in prepa- 
 ration to force it into the enemy's territory. The side 
 acting on the defensive are obliged to withdraw ten yards 
 toward their own goal, and are there drawn up in oppo- 
 sition to await the attack of their opponents until after 
 the ball is put in play.
 
 As the " center rusher" of the attacking side puts the 
 ball in play by touching it with his foot and passing it 
 back to some other player for a run, or a kick down the 
 field, the rushers upon the defensive side are at liberty to 
 charge forward to meet the attack. The clash following 
 this charge constitutes the first actual encounter of the 
 game. 
 
 When the runner with the ball is caught, or " tackled," 
 thrown upon the ground, and there held so that he can 
 advance no further, he calls " down," whereupon the ball 
 is " dead" for the moment, and cannot be carried for- 
 ward or kicked until the center rusher again puts it in 
 play according to rule. 
 
 As soon as " down " is called, an imaginary line, cross- 
 ing the field from side to side and passing through the 
 center of the ball, immediately comes into existence. 
 Each player must remain on the side of this line toward 
 his own goal until after the ball is " put in play," and it is 
 one of the duties of the umpire rigidly to enforce this 
 regulation. Should any player cross this line and fail to 
 return before the ball is " snapped back " it constitutes an 
 " off side play," for which the rules provide a penalty. 
 
 To again put the ball in play the center rusher places 
 his hand upon it at the spot where " down " was called. 
 The rushers then "line up" opposing one another, the 
 line of attack being drawn closely together for a greater 
 concentration of energy, while the defensive rushers are 
 slightly spread apart to facilitate breaking through the 
 line and stopping the advance, when the ball shall be 
 put in play. The captain upon the attacking side then 
 shouts some signal, understood only by his own men 
 which indicates the evolution that he wishes his eleven to 
 execute ; whereupon the center rusher puts the ball in
 
 play by " snapping it back," that is, by rolling it back 
 between his legs. 
 
 Immediately behind the center rusher the quarter-back 
 has taken his stand. He receives the ball as it is " snap- 
 ped back " and instantly passes it to one of the half-backs 
 or a man in the line, for a run, or to the full-back for a 
 kick down the field. Thereupon the first ' ' scrimmage " of 
 the game takes place as the opposing team attempts to 
 break through the line and stop the play. 
 
 One side is not allowed to retain indefinite possession 
 of the ball without making gain or loss. The rules pro- 
 vide that if the side having possession of the ball shall 
 fail to make an aggregate gain of five yards, or a loss of 
 twenty yards, in three consecutive "scrimmages", the 
 ball shall be forfeited to the other side at the spot where 
 it was last down. 
 
 Advances by running are made by the player directing 
 his course through one of the six openings in the rush line, 
 or around the ends, according as the signal may direct. 
 The signal also indicates the player who is to receive the 
 ball. The runner is assisted in his course by the players 
 who border on the opening through which he is to go. 
 These seek to enlarge the space by pushing their oppo- 
 nents to one side. He is further assisted by others of his 
 ow r n players, some of whom precede, to "block off" the 
 opponents from " tackling " him in front, while still others 
 follow to push him further if he is checked. The players 
 who are to precede and the players who are to follow 
 change with the play according as each man is enabled 
 by his position to adjust himself to it. 
 
 Four points are scored when one side carries the ball 
 across the goal line and makes a "touch down." The 
 side making the " touch down " is then allowed to carry 
 the ball out into the field as far as they may desire in a
 
 line perpendicular to the goal line and passing through 
 the point where it was "touched down," in order that 
 one of their number may attempt to kick it between the 
 goal posts above the cross-bar. The other side mean- 
 while are obliged to take their positions behind the goal 
 line. Should the attempt be successful, it will constitute 
 a "goal," and two additional points be added to the score. 
 But whether the attempt be successful or not, the ball 
 must be delivered to the other side, who will take it to the 
 center of the field and put it in play in the same manner 
 as at the beginning of the game. 
 
 If the ball can be kicked between the posts and above 
 the cross-bar by a " drop-kick " or " place-kick " by any 
 one of the players, without having been previously carried 
 across the goal line, it will constitute a "goal from the 
 field," and will count five points. 
 
 In case the ball is kicked or carried across the boundary 
 line on either side it will be " out of bounds " and must 
 be brought into the field at right angles to the line at the 
 point where it crossed. This is done by the side which 
 first secures it after it passes out of bounds. 
 
 It is usual to bring the ball into the field from ten to 
 fifteen yards and then to place it upon the ground for a 
 " scrimmage " as from a regular down ; though the ball 
 may be passed to any one of the players, in at the point 
 where it went out, provided that it is thrown in at right 
 angles to the side line ; or it may be " touched in " at the 
 same point. 
 
 The game is divided into two halves of three-quarters 
 of an hour each, and the team succeeding in scoring the 
 greatest number of points during that time are declared 
 the winners. 
 
 The reader should thoroughly acquaint himself with the 
 rules in detail, before passing on to a study of the book.
 
 TRAINING. 
 
 In the early days of college athletics and amateur 
 sports the popular belief was universally accepted that a 
 most rigorous diet must be entered upon if the young 
 aspirant for college honors would fit himself properly 
 to represent his alma mater in the boat, on the running 
 track, or in individual contests. Many an alumnus who 
 pulled an oar on the crew in the fifties and sixties, will 
 recall visions of raw beef, a limited bill of fare, and a 
 prescribed daily amount of water that made the train- 
 ing of thirty years ago a hardship for which dim dreams 
 of possible glory seemed a doubtful compensation. 
 
 These old ideas have now changed almost entirely, 
 and the young collegian of to-day, who secures a position 
 on any one of the college teams, and obtains a seat at 
 the " training table," is an object of envy rather than of 
 compassion to his classmates. The training table diet of 
 to-day is almost sumptuous, and few men in college en- 
 joy better living than the members of the university ath- 
 letic organizations. Roast beef, lamb chops, beef steak, 
 roast lamb, and broiled chicken, oatmeal, rice, mush, 
 and the cereals, potatoes served in all styles but fried, 
 stale bread, onions, garden vegetables in season, eggs, 
 dry toast, apple sauce, baked apples, prunes, grapes, 
 oranges, figs, dates, and fruits in season (with the ex- 
 ception of raw apples), rice and bread puddings, furnish 
 an abundant variety from which to choose. 
 
 A few things only are put upon the proscribed list : 
 Pies, cakes, salads, all forms of pork, veal, rich dress- 
 
 (12)
 
 rngs, fried food, ice-cream, confectionery, soda water, 
 so-called soft drinks, (and it is needless to say drinks of 
 a stronger nature,) tea, coffee, and chocolate, should be 
 cheerfully and absolutely given up. From the first day 
 of training it should be rigidly enforced that all pipes, 
 cigars, and cigarettes be laid aside, absolutely, until 
 the contests are over. 
 
 Regularity in all the daily habits of life is of the great- 
 est importance. The hours for rising, for meals, and for 
 retiring should not vary from day to day; and in so far 
 as it is practicable to do so, it would be advantageous to 
 have the regular practice come at that portion of the day 
 in which the important games of the season will take 
 place. 
 
 That the football player should have long hours of 
 restful sleep is a point too frequently overlooked. While 
 it is impossible to state a definite time that shall apply 
 to all cases, a sleep from ten o'clock in the evening 
 until seven the next morning, and a short walk before 
 an early breakfast, will be found to be of the greatest 
 benefit in all instances. Probably a large proportion of 
 the cases of over- training, that occur during the foot- 
 ball season, are caused by late iours, irregularity of 
 habits, and insufficient rest. Had these points been care- 
 fully attended to, the hard work upon the field would 
 have produced no hurtful result. When the recreation 
 period of the players makes it necessary that the daily 
 practice shall come immediately after the noon meal, 
 it will be found more healthful to have the practice hour 
 preceded by a light lunch, and postpone the hearty 
 dinner until night. But should the daily play come in 
 the morning, or in the middle of the afternoon, it will 
 be better to have the dinner hour at noon. 
 
 Over-training is something which is much easier to
 
 prevent than to remedy when once it is an accomplished 
 fact. In preparatory schools, where a less violent and 
 less tiring system of training is followed, no thought need 
 be given to this point, but in the larger colleges one or 
 more cases of over-training among the valuable men is 
 apt to occur toward the end of a season of hard work. 
 
 Should any one of the players get into this condition, 
 he should be given an absolute rest for several days, and 
 then be allowed to play only part of the time during each 
 remaining day of practice. An immediate change of diet 
 with a removal of all training-table restrictions, will also 
 be found of value. 
 
 When a faithful worker finds himself coming upon the 
 field day after day with a worn and tired feeling, no 
 longer able to play with his former dash and energy, 
 and his speed gradually decreasing, he should at once 
 suspect that his muscles are becoming over-tired, and 
 so fatigued that they cannot recuperate between one 
 day's work and the next. 
 
 The practice of drinking water during the game is ex- 
 ceedingly bad, and never should be permitted, though 
 rinsing the mouth is admissible. The best results will 
 be obtained if no water whatever is swallowed until more 
 than an hour after the practice is over. The habit which 
 some players have of chewing gum during the game is 
 pernicious. After the first week or two has passed, the 
 mouth will be found to be far less dry where no gum is 
 used, than where a constant flow of saliva is kept up 
 by he act of mastication. 
 
 During the season there undoubtedly will be a number 
 of rainy days. These by no means should be lost. As a 
 rule, it is best to practice upon the field as usual, since the 
 most important game of the season may come in bad 
 weather, and the experience of having frequently played
 
 in the mud with a wet and slippery ball will prove inval- 
 uable. 
 
 On special occasions light work in the gymnasium, 
 tackling the bag, and practicing the sjgnals indoors, may 
 be substituted with advantage. Every team should be 
 provided with a tackling-bag. This may be made of 
 leather or canvas, and should be from four to five feet 
 long, a foot in diameter and stuffed with hay, hair, or ex- 
 celsior, to represent the body of a man. No better prac- 
 tice can be had for low hard tackling than to have such a 
 bag suspended by a long rope from a rafter in the gym- 
 nasium over a number of floor mats, letting the men run 
 half the length of the floor and spring for it from some 
 ten feet away as it swings slowly backward and forward. 
 But except on such special occasions when no out-door 
 practice is taken for the day, indoor gymnasium work 
 should be given up, as the exercise upon the field de- 
 mands every energy. 
 
 During the last few weeks of the season, when the final 
 eleven has practically been decided upon, and team play 
 is being developed, an opportunity should be found each 
 day to send the eleven up and down the field in their reg- 
 ular positions, upon short runs of from five to fifteen 
 yards, with no opposing rush line drawn up against them, 
 in order that the signals may be thoroughly drilled into 
 each player and substitute, and all learn to work together 
 as one man. It is of the highest importance to have a 
 number of substitutes, each of whom is thoroughly ac- 
 quainted with the signals, as the replacing of a player in 
 case of accident by one in the slightest degree unfamiliar 
 with the signals will destroy team play and cause the 
 side a loss much greater than the value of the man who 
 has left the field. 
 
 The number of regular games a week a team can play
 
 i6 
 
 to advantage cannot be definitely stated. The condition 
 of the men and their especial needs must determine this. 
 As a rule, more than two match games a week cannot be 
 played if the best results are to be obtained. A hard 
 game should not be played within less than a week be- 
 fore one which is considered to be of great importance, 
 if it can be avoided, on account of the danger of having 
 a valuable man disabled, and in order that there may be 
 an abundance of stored-up energy upon the day of the 
 important contest. 
 
 During the last few days before the final game, the 
 practice should, be short, but sharp while it lasts, with a 
 considerable amount of time devoted to practicing the 
 signals, falling upon the ball, and perfecting team play. 
 On the day immediately preceding the game an absolute 
 rest should be taken. 
 
 It is a mistake to attempt to play the full hour and 
 a half on each day of practice throughout the season. 
 About two half hours of sharp work, with a rest of 
 five minutes between, will produce the best results, 
 and in the earlier regular games each half should be 
 limited to thirty minutes. 
 
 The daily practice of the team upon the field will not 
 afford sufficient opportunity to the backs to become pro- 
 ficient in kicking and catching the ball. When it is pos- 
 sible; a half hour should be devoted by them at some other 
 portion of each day throughout the entire season to punt- 
 ing, catching, and goal kicking. Numerous minor sprains 
 and bruises will necessarily be received during the season, 
 for which hot water and flannel bandages will be the best 
 remedy. 
 
 In case of a sprained ankle or a serious bruise to 
 one of the muscles of the leg, a long period of disability 
 may result from continued playing, and the captain
 
 '7 
 
 should insist that a player so hurt should leave the field 
 at once. A thin leather anklet had better be worn in- 
 side the shoe by each player in the team as a safeguard 
 and protection. 
 
 When a man has a bruised and sensitive knee, a moist- 
 tened sponge, the size of a fist, placed just under the 
 knee cap will afford relief and protection. Sprains and 
 bruises of a serious nature are more liable to occur 
 during the first few weeks of practice than at any other 
 time in the season. This is due to the fact that many 
 of the men have just returned from long vacations of 
 ease and idleness, and their muscles are not ready to 
 endure the sudden strains and wrenches to which they 
 immediately find themselves subjected. The careful 
 captain will see to it that the promising new candidates 
 for his team and the old men are all gathered together 
 from one to two weeks before the season of actual play- 
 ing is to begin, and put through a series of light exer- 
 cises, given short runs, made to pass, kick, and fall on 
 the ball, and are given such general light work for wind 
 and muscle as shall enable them to engage in the regular 
 practice without danger. Thick sweaters and overcoats 
 should always be in readiness to put on after playing, 
 and proper care taken to guard against catching cold. 
 
 Cleanliness is a hygienic necessity during the football 
 season, and every team should, if possible, have hot and 
 cold water shower baths connected with their dressing 
 rooms. 
 
 Long hot baths are weakening, and should be avoided; 
 though upon special occasions, when a cold has settled 
 in the muscles, a Turkish bath may prove of great 
 value. 
 
 The captain's word upon the field is absolute law, and 
 should be followed with unquestioning obedience.
 
 THE CENTER-RUSHER. 
 
 The prevailing idea in time past has been that the 
 largest and heaviest man who could be procured should 
 be used for the center-rusher, or snapback of the eleven. 
 So universal has this idea become that it has long been a 
 common joke to say of an especially large and stout per- 
 son: " He would make a good center- rusher." Every 
 new team formed, as a rule, selects the center according 
 to this axiomatic fallacy. It is easy to see how this prin- 
 ciple of selection became established under the old push- 
 ing style of game, and it still should hold sway, provided 
 it brings with the selection certain qualities of mind, and 
 certain physical capacities, which will enable the center 
 to be one of the most active and effective agents on the 
 field. 
 
 The center occupies a unique position on the eleven in 
 that he starts the play after each down, and is the only 
 member of the team who cannot run with the ball from a 
 scrimmage, because it is impossible to make him a third 
 man advantageously. His work, therefore, is limited in 
 that particular. By reason, also, of his having to pro- 
 tect the quarter-back after he snaps the ball, and because 
 he is invariably entangled with the opponents, it is im- 
 possible for him to become a valuable running interferer. 
 What work in interference he is able to do is limited to 
 blocking the opponents from breaking through the line, 
 or running behind their own line to head off the runner 
 with the ball at one side. Possibly, when very clever and 
 swift, he may be able to cut across the field to interfere 
 with a half-back or the full-back. The center should 
 
 (18)
 
 make a practice of doing this latter work on every play 
 around the end, and on every play between the tackle 
 and end. Perhaps he may not be able to get ahead of 
 the runner, but he will be of valuable assistance by check- 
 ing some of the opponents from running behind their line 
 and tackling him. Now and then, also, he will be able to 
 get ahead of the runner and go down the field with him. 
 
 From these statements it might appear that it did not 
 matter especially whether the center rusher was a slow 
 runner or not, and that emphasis should be laid on his 
 possessing size and weight, which are understood as 
 necessary to the proper filling of that position. The truth 
 is, that while a slow runner, if he has cleverness for that 
 position and is strong and weighty, will be able to do 
 fairly well as a center, he cannot begin to be as service- 
 able to his team as if he were also a fast runner. Grant- 
 ing that a fast runner will not be able to do much inter- 
 fering, or running with the ball, he will still be able to 
 use his speed most helpfully in breaking through the line 
 to tackle ; in crossing over to one side to head off a run- 
 ner ; or in going down the field on a kick. Furthermore, 
 his speed will be most helpful in playing a quick game, 
 because he is thus able to follow the ball so closely that 
 there will be no delay in putting it in play. This is a 
 most important point in the center's play. He must be 
 on hand to receive the ball the instant it is down. 
 
 It is impossible to play a quick game where the center 
 lags, or to prevent one on the part of the opponents. 
 "When there are not many large men who are fast run- 
 ners it is better, perhaps, to place the speedy man in the 
 position of guard and take a slower man for center. 
 
 The ideal center will be one who is swift of foot in ad- 
 dition to his other powers. He should be a large man, 
 not a ponderous man, unless he is quick and strong. He
 
 20 
 
 should be especially strong in his legs and back, for he 
 must stand steadily on his feet against the continuous 
 pushing and wrestling which he receives, directly from 
 the opponents, and incidentally from the guards on either 
 side of him. If he is easily moved, or toppled over, he 
 will be likely now and then to snap the ball poorly, thus 
 making the quarter-back uneasy and flurried in handling 
 it. Steadiness is a most necessary part of the center's 
 work and it cannot well be overlooked in the selection of 
 a man to fill that position. Further, as in every position 
 on the eleven endurance is a prime requisite, so is it in 
 this. More of it is needed, however, than in most 
 others, because the work is much harder. No short- 
 winded, fat man can long stand the hard work of that 
 position, if he does his duty. Not only is great physical 
 labor required of the center, but he must also be con- 
 stantly subjected to knocks and bruises from the plung- 
 ing and tearing of the rushers and half-backs as they try 
 to break through the line. 
 
 No man, therefore, can play in this position who is not 
 physically courageous, and who is not able to rise to his 
 work after each assault with new grit and determination. 
 He should be a man who is cool and collected at all times; 
 combative, but never losing control of his temper; one 
 who endures worrying without being rattled by it; one 
 who never gives up and is bound to conquer. Nowhere 
 in the line is there need for such steadiness as in the cen- 
 ter. From him every play starts, in a scrimmage, and a 
 little unsteadiness on his part will be likely to make havoc 
 with the quarter-back's work, and hence with the offensive 
 play of the whole team. Nothing can be more fatal to 
 quick and steady play, for it is sure to produce hesitancy 
 in action in some of the players, with hurried action in 
 others.
 
 In assuming his position for a scrimmage, the center 
 may follow either of two methods of standing, when snap- 
 ping the ball : one, where one foot is placed back for a 
 brace, the ball being snapped between the legs and a little 
 to one side ; the other, where both feet are widely spread 
 to interfere with opponents, as they attempt to break 
 through, and to avoid getting into the way of the ball 
 which can be snapped straight back. Where the first 
 position is followed, the center should be able to work 
 equally well with either foot forward, in order to secure 
 certain advantages in handling his opponent. The center- 
 rusher should make a study of the best way of snapping 
 the ball back, and then hold it the same way every time. 
 He should confer with the quarter-back on this point, as 
 the latter is to handle the ball, and it may be easier to 
 take it when snapped in a particular way. 
 
 There are two methods followed in snapping the ball : 
 one, in which the ball is held on the small end and sent 
 back swiftly/with little effort, in such a way that the 
 quarter-back catches it in the air all ready to pass ; the 
 other, where the ball is laid on its side and rolled along 
 the ground to the point where it is stopped by the quarter- 
 back and then picked up in very good position for pass- 
 ing. This latter method is more generally used because it 
 does not require as delicate work on the part of the center 
 in giving the snap ; but speed is sacrificed by it and there 
 is greater liability that the ball shall be deflected from its 
 course by touching the legs. It would be well for the 
 center to learn to use either hand in snapping, for it will 
 often prove an advantage. The center-rusher will do well 
 to make a study of snapping the ball by both methods of 
 standing, and by both ways of holding it until he settles 
 on the one best suited to him. He should then practice 
 this against an opponent until he is able to stand firmly
 
 22 
 
 on his feet and send the ball back accurately, at a uniform 
 rate of speed each time. In case the ball is placed on 
 end, it is better to have it lean toward the opposing center 
 at an angle of about sixty degrees. It can be held more 
 firmly in this position and can also be sent back more 
 swiftly, with a bound into the air. Care must be taken 
 not to send the ball too swiftly. While the center is 
 practising to secure steadiness, accuracy, and uniformity 
 in snapping the ball, he should likewise practise getting 
 his opponent out of the way. 
 
 In putting the ball in play, the center has the advan- 
 tage of being able to select the time to snap and he can 
 choose it to meet his own purpose. Besides, he knows 
 the exact instant when he intends to send the ball back 
 and can get the start of his opponent. The center, there- 
 fore, is master of the situation when he has the ball. It 
 is for these reasons that he can frequently be down the 
 field on a kick as soon as the ends, and yet not expose the 
 full-back to great danger in having the ball stopped. 
 
 There are various ways for the center to handle his 
 man and get him out of his way. He may plunge forward 
 at the instant he snaps the ball, carrying his opponent 
 before him ; he may lift him to one side or the other, ac- 
 cording to the play called for and the position of the op- 
 ponent ; he may fall on him if he is down too low ; or he 
 may get under him and lift him in the air, if his opponent 
 reaches over him. 
 
 In any one of these methods, the opportune moment 
 must be seized like a flash and the action be quick and 
 powerful. A slow, strong movement will never succeed. 
 Long and faithful practice is necessary before the center 
 can acquire this quickness and power. In his eagerness 
 to take advantage of his opponent, he must never fail to 
 wait for the quarter-back's signal before snapping the
 
 2 3 
 
 ball. A little forgetfulness on this point might prove 
 disastrous. 
 
 The center can be a most valuable man in defensive 
 play if he understands his position. By giving his op- 
 ponents a quick pull forward or to one side at the instant 
 the latter snaps the ball ; by lifting him suddenly back- 
 ward ; or by grasping his arm, the center can frequently 
 break through more quickly than either guard or tackle. 
 Whenever he succeeds in getting through, he will be a 
 strong obstacle to all dashes between himself and the 
 guards, and he will sometimes be able to interfere with 
 the quarter-back's pass. Another way in which the cen- 
 ter may play on the defense is to spend all his energy for 
 a moment in getting his opponent out of his way and then 
 spring at the runner. In this case the center must throw 
 off his opponent quickly, and not allow himself to be 
 carried backward. At the same time he must not attempt 
 to break through the line. 
 
 When the play is around the end, or even at the tackle, 
 the center should move quickly from his position and 
 pass around behind his own line to meet and tackle the 
 runner. When the opposite side is about to kick, the 
 center should do his utmost to break through the line and 
 stop it ; but sometimes it may be better instead to make 
 an opening for the quarter-back. He is helped in doing 
 this, by the opposite center himself, as he plunges for- 
 ward to block him. In such a case a good opening can 
 be made for the quarter-back, if the center will place him- 
 self in front of his opponent a little to one side, and then 
 pull the latter forward to the right or left. The guard at 
 the side on which the opening is made should know of 
 this plan so that he may not spoil it, either by pushing 
 his opponent in the path or by getting in the way himself. 
 If there is danger of his doing this, it will be better for 
 him to help enlarge the opening for the quarter-back.
 
 2 4 
 
 On the defensive the center may play a little to one side 
 or the other of his opponent, or directly in front, to suit 
 the situation. It is most unwise for the center to assume 
 the same position every time, for by so doing he gives the 
 opposite center only one problem to work out and that 
 one probably the same each time. Where the center takes 
 an extreme side position, unless he does it just before the 
 ball is snapped, he gives the captain of the other eleven 
 a fine chance to call for a play which will take advantage 
 of the situation. 
 
 There is abundant opportunity for the display of head- 
 work in outwitting the opposing center in breaking 
 through the line. The line is so compact at this point 
 that it is not an easy task to slip by, especially as the 
 opposing center is watching to take his man at a disad- 
 vantage Various methods are resorted to in breaking 
 through the line. Sometimes the center, acting on the 
 defense, is thrown head foremost to the ground by a 
 quick, hard pull, the attacking center stepping aside or 
 over him as he falls. He may also be turned sidewise 
 just enough to slip past him, or he may be lifted back 
 perhaps into the face of the runner. The most common 
 method employed by the center in getting through is to 
 catch the arm of the opponent on the side on which it is 
 desired to go through, give it a jerk, and dash into the 
 opening. 
 
 The center in defense must insist on the ball being 
 down where it belongs. Some center-rushers have a way 
 of moving the ball forward several inches further than 
 it should be. There is no occasion for generosity under 
 such circumstances, and the center must feel that it is his 
 duty to stand up for the rights of his team by constantly 
 guarding against any infringement of this kind. On the 
 other hand, a constant bickering over an inch or two of
 
 25 
 
 ground may be made of such importance that the game 
 is interfered with and delayed to such an extent that a 
 much greater gain would have resulted were the ball 
 put in play the instant the signal called for it. 
 
 A good referee will see to it that the ball is snapped 
 each time from the proper spot. 
 
 It is always the duty of the center-rusher to keep close 
 to the opponent who brings the ball in from the side line, 
 in order to protect the rights of his team. Likewise, it is 
 well to " pace in " the opponent who brings the ball to the 
 twenty-five yard line, in order to prevent a quick play 
 being made when his own side are not in position. The 
 guards assist him in this.
 
 THE GUARD. 
 
 The main work of the guards may be summed up as 
 blocking, that is, guarding; making openings for the pas- 
 sage of the runner whenever certain signals are given; 
 running behind the line to interfere for the man with the 
 ball; running with the ball occasionally; breaking through 
 the opposing line to interfere with the quarter-back in 
 passing the ball; and tackling the runner or stopping a 
 kick. The guards and the center have the most labo- 
 rious work on the eleven, if they do their duty, for they 
 practically have no respite from hard work. They must 
 bear the brunt of the heavy plunging of their opponents 
 through the center, and at the same time struggle to 
 break through the opposing line, which is doing its ut- 
 most to prevent them. They must do this without a let- 
 up just as long as the other side has the ball, and, more- 
 over, in that part of the line which is most compact. 
 Then, when their own side has the ball, they are expected 
 to use their strength and wits from the moment the ball 
 is put in play until it is again down, in blocking, making 
 openings, and in interfering for the player who is at- 
 tempting to run. Further, they have little time to catch 
 their wind, for almost the first point which should be 
 drummed into them by the captain or coach is to be al- 
 ways on hand the moment the ball is down, to make 
 or prevent a quick play. It can be truly said that no 
 team is well trained until the center part of the eleven, as 
 indeed the whole team, is prompt on this point. While 
 the guards have all this hard work, they seldom have a 
 
 (26)
 
 2 7 
 
 chance to distinguish themselves, either by a run, a clean 
 tackle, or a fine interference which is apparent to the un- 
 trained eye of the spectator. On the other hand, it does 
 not take much yielding at the center to bring forth the 
 criticism that that part of the line is weak. 
 
 On account of the nature of their work, the guards 
 should be large and powerful, like the center. It is even 
 more necessary that they should be quick, agile, and 
 swift, than the center, because the guards should always 
 go through the line when the opponents have the ball. 
 On their success in doing this largely depends the strength 
 or weakness of the team's defense. 
 
 The chief point in defensive play is to tackle the runner 
 before he reaches the line, and the guards are large fac- 
 tors in doing this. Unless this is done, the ball can be 
 steadily carried down the field when not lost by a fumble, 
 for any team is able to gain five yards in three consecu- 
 tive trials when the runner is allowed to re'ach the line 
 each time before being tackled. Any means, therefore, 
 which the guards can employ to interfere with the 
 quarter-back before he has passed the ball, or the runner 
 before he has reached the line, should certainly be used. 
 All the strategy and tricks known in wrestling which can 
 be applied to the situation should be eagerly sought and 
 practiced. The great point to remember is to apply the 
 power quickly and hard, to summon all the strength for 
 the initial effort, and to work desperately until free from 
 interference. Only by doing this can the guards hope to 
 break through and secure the quarter-back or runner be- 
 hind the line. Slow pushing, however powerful, will ac- 
 complish little. If held in check until the runner and the 
 pushers strike the line it is only a question of how many 
 yards the runner will gain before the mass breaks and 
 falls forward.
 
 28 
 
 In applying his power the guard, as well as his com- 
 panion rushers, has an immense advantage in being per- 
 mitted to use his hands and arms freely in getting his op- 
 ponent out of the way. This enables him to put into practice 
 all the skill he possesses in handling an opponent who is 
 allowed to block only with the body. The guard also 
 has another advantage in being free to move whenever he 
 pleases, but he must remember that the opening for the 
 runner may be made on either side of him and be careful 
 not to give his opponent help in making it. It assists the 
 guard greatly in breaking through if the tackle draws 
 out the opposing line as much as is wise in a good de- 
 fense. This separation should be wide enough to allow 
 the players in defense to break through easily without in- 
 terfering with each other. It is also usually helpful in 
 breaking through to be restless, but cautious at the same 
 time, in order not to give the opponent an advantage. 
 
 The guards and the tackles especially should watch for 
 signs which shall indicate what the play will be, and then 
 go through the line as low as possible for a tackle. They 
 should break through to the right or left of their op- 
 ponents as seems best at the moment. In order to 
 break through quickly they must have their eyes on the 
 ball when it is snapped and spring forward the instant it 
 is put in play. Quick glances may be cast at the oppo- 
 nents while still constantly watching the ball. 
 
 The guards, with the center, are usually called upon to 
 meet the heavy charges in the opening plays from the 
 center of the field. These, as a rule, come in the form of 
 wedges. Two points should be carefully regarded by 
 these center men in attacking a wedge: first, to approach 
 the wedge with the body bent in a position for greatest 
 power and for meeting the wedge low down; second, to
 
 29 
 
 focus on the mass in such a way that it cannot break 
 through between them without being separated, and so 
 giving the guards a chance to tackle the runner. In do- 
 ing this it should be the aim to focus as nearly as possible 
 upon the point of the wedge, in order to check its ad- 
 vance and throw the forwards back on the runner. The 
 runner will then be forced to come out, if he has not al- 
 ready become entangled in the mass. In making the 
 attack the guards and center should run with dash and de- 
 termination, at the same time watching close!)' for the 
 runner and trying hard to tackle him. 
 
 Two successful ways of attacking a wedge have been 
 originated. One member of the center trio will some- 
 times jump over the heads of the forwards and try to 
 fall on the runner and thus secure him, or he will hurl 
 himself headlong at the feet of the oncoming wedge and 
 cause it to trip over him. To make either one of these 
 attacks well the player must be perfectly fearless, and 
 should also use good judgment. In the former case the 
 player must time his jump and not land short of the run- 
 ner, or he will be pushed quickly to the ground or carried 
 along on the heads of the forwards; neither must he 
 jump so far over that he will miss his man. If he throws 
 himself in front of the wedge he should not do it too 
 soon, lest the wedge will be able to avoid or step over 
 him. 
 
 When a wedge is formed in the line on a scrimmage the 
 guards and center must be sure to get low, or they will 
 be carried along before it. The point of the wedge must 
 be held in check. In resisting the attack of a revolving 
 wedge the guards should separate slightly from the 
 center and join with the tackle in trying to penetrate the 
 mass to secure the runner. This should be done in st i ch
 
 30 
 
 a way that the defense shall not be weakened. Care 
 should also be taken by the side of the line away from 
 which the wedge revolves not to add impetus to it by push- 
 ing too far. 
 
 The position of the guard varies slightly in defense and 
 offense. In offense the first thought must be to protect 
 the quarter-back until he has passed the ball; his next 
 to block his man long enough to prevent him from reach- 
 ing the runner. His third thought, which may also influ- 
 ence the way he stands while he attends to the former 
 work, is to make the opening if the play is in his quarter. 
 His fourth thought, which will be influenced by his first 
 and second, is to get in his interference ahead of the 
 runner when practicable, or follow him as closely as pos- 
 sible and do what he can to assist. In fulfilling all these 
 duties he will be limited in his freedom of movement. 
 He cannot stand too far from the center rusher, and he 
 may be compelled to stand shoulder to shoulder with him. 
 
 Further, he will have to assume a position which best 
 enables him to carry out his duties.' It may be well for 
 him to stand with both feet on a line, or it may be better 
 to have one or the other foot behind, according to his pur- 
 pose. It is nearly always better for him to bend forward, 
 or even to get down very low if his opponent tries to get 
 under him. The bent-over position is better for meeting 
 attacks, because the weight is well forward and low 
 down and the body is better braced and not 'so much ex- 
 posed to effective handling. In this position, also, one 
 can move forward better for making an opening. 
 
 In blocking the legs should usually be spread widely 
 apart. They should not be spread so much, however, 
 that the guard will not be able to move quickly whenever 
 his opponent shifts his position. In blocking, as in break-
 
 3i 
 
 ing through the line, the guard should try hard to get his 
 power into action before his opponent. This can be best 
 done by a shoulder check. 
 
 The general position of the guard must be determined 
 by the play in hand and the way the opponent stands. 
 He may be forced to move out a little because his oppo- 
 nent does so, but he must be careful that the opening be- 
 tween him and the center is not occupied by the quarter- 
 back or some other free player, in which case the tackle 
 will sometimes be obliged to step in and take the oppos- 
 ing guard. Neither the guard nor any other rusher 
 except the center should ever take a fixed position in 
 standing. 
 
 On the defensive much depends on strong blocking by 
 the guards, for weak blocking is fatal at the center of the 
 line. The quarter-back, being so near to the guards, is 
 in imminent danger in case of weak blocking, and he can 
 little afford the loss of a fraction of a second in handling 
 the ball, much less a fumble. Under these circumstances, 
 if a fumble occurs, the quarter-back must always fall on 
 the ball and not run any risks of losing it. Furthermore, 
 in weak blocking the runner has little chance on a dash 
 into the line, for in place of an opening he finds an oppo- 
 nent. " Block hard " has come to be one of the axioms 
 of the game. Blocking for a kick is treated fully in the 
 chapter on team play. 
 
 The guard has an advantage over the center in making 
 an opening for the runner in only one particular, and that 
 is that he is freer to move in his position. The center 
 rusher is largely dependent on the position which his op- 
 ponent takes in standing to help him out in this matter, 
 since he cannot move his relative position from the oppos- 
 ing center more than the latter allows; but he can often 
 3
 
 32 
 
 influence that position to suit his own purpose. By clever 
 generalship and strategy he may be able to induce his op- 
 ponent to do the very thing he needs to help him out in 
 his play. Some of the ways of handling an opponent are 
 given in the description of the duties of the center 
 rusher. 
 
 When the guard is going to run with the ball he should 
 take a position which will enable him to get away from 
 his opponent quickly, but he should not make his inten- 
 tions evident. For this reason it is better for the guard, 
 as well as for the tackle, not to take a set position until 
 the signal is given; but if one is taken, let it be such that 
 it would not make it necessary to change in order to run 
 with the ball. The one who is to run with the ball should 
 seek in every way to conceal the purpose of the play. 
 
 The guard is in the most difficult position from which 
 to get under headway in order to run with the ball. As 
 commonly played, the guard swings round the quarter- 
 back and dives into an opening between the tackle and 
 guard on the other side of the center. The very begin- 
 ning of his run is the most difficult part. He cannot run 
 fast from his position, for he has only a step or two to 
 make before he must turn sharply around the quarter- 
 back and run in almost an opposite direction. If he runs 
 back too far he will be tackled before he reaches the line, 
 and if he turns in closely, he is likely to run against his 
 own men as they are struggling with their opponents. 
 It needs, therefore, careful judgment and a great deal of 
 practice to be able to run well from this position. 
 
 Long-legged guards, as a rule, find it easier to take a 
 long step backward with the foot next the center, and use 
 that as a purchase from which to circle around the quarter- 
 back. Some guards prefer to take three or four short,
 
 33 
 
 quick steps in making the turn around the quarter-back. 
 Any way which will enable the guard to get under head- 
 way most quickly is the method which should be used. 
 It will be easy for the quarter-back to place the ball in 
 the guard's hands, and it will probably be better for him 
 to carry it under the arm away from the center. 
 
 When the guard runs around to interfere, he should 
 place himself so that he can get away quickly and not 
 " give the play away." If the guard is to run around in 
 order to interfere by getting ahead of the runners, the 
 quickest possible start is necessary. There must be no 
 delay whatever, even when the guard is a fast runner, or 
 else the runner with the ball will have to slow up so much 
 that he cannot make the play. Whenever the guard runs 
 around to interfere or to run with the ball, the tackle 
 should keep the opposing guard from following him. 
 The guard can sometimes do this himself by pushing his 
 opponent back just as he starts, but it must be done in 
 such a way that it will not delay him.
 
 THE TACKLE. 
 
 The tackle occupies the most important position on the 
 rush line. It is possible to get along with a lumbering 
 center and slow guards if they are able to block well and 
 make good openings, but it is not possible to have slow 
 tackles and play good football at the same time. The po- 
 sition which the tackle occupies in the line explains this, 
 and it is best appreciated when it is understood that the 
 tackles should take part in more than half the defensive 
 work of the team. 
 
 The tackle occupies the most responsible position be- 
 cause he assists in checking two distinctly different styles 
 of play. On the side toward the center he is to help the 
 guard in blocking the heavy plunges which are frequently 
 aimed at that point of the line, while on the other side he 
 has to work with the end-rusher against all plays between 
 them and on all plays around the end. To play this po- 
 sition properly on the defensive, therefore, requires a 
 master mind and an equipment of physical capacity and 
 skill unequaled by any position on the eleven. 
 
 Next to the half-back the tackle, from his position in 
 the line, has the best opportunity for running with the 
 ball. In fact, he can be used with telling effect, if a good 
 runner, in supplementing and resting the half-backs. 
 Again, he is the end-rusher's chief assistant in going 
 down the field on all kicks, and he must be under the 
 ball almost as soon as the end himself, in order to prevent 
 the catcher from dodging inside the end men. 
 
 (34
 
 35 
 
 The points mentioned are sufficient to show that the 
 tackle should be a man of considerable weight, because 
 he has to bear a great deal of the heavy plunging into the 
 line. The greater the weight the better, provided, of 
 course, that the other requirements are met. As a rule, 
 it is rare that a man weighing over one hundred and 
 eighty pounds can meet these requirements, and it is 
 more often that men weighing one hundred and sixty-five 
 or seventy pounds are selected for this position on the 
 best teams. The general build of the man also qualifies 
 his usefulness. The one hundred and sixty-five pounds 
 will be much more effective in a man from five feet six to 
 five feet ten inches in height than in one above that 
 height. In truth, the man of stocky build can usually 
 fill this position much better, because his weight is nearer 
 the ground and he is always in a position to make a low 
 tackle. As a great deal of his tackling should be dashing 
 and brilliant, right in the midst of interference where he 
 must throw himself instantly, a tall man would be at a 
 disadvantage. A thick-set, round-bodied man with large 
 arms and legs would also be a much harder man to stop 
 when running with the ball. 
 
 Of equal importance with weight, the points which 
 should determine the selection of the tackle are agility, 
 speed, and the ability to tackle in the face of interference. 
 The name of the position indicates the work of the 
 player. He is to tackle. Even speed can to a small de- 
 gree be dispensed with if the man is quick and agile and 
 is a sure tackier. Quickness in getting through the line, 
 agility in avoiding interference, sure tackling, getting 
 down the field on a kick, and running with the ball are 
 essential qualifications to look for in selecting a man to 
 fill the position of tackle.
 
 36 
 
 The tackle must be endowed with more than the ordi- 
 nary amount of shrewdness and judgment. To a certain 
 extent this can be acquired by long practice, but the 
 tackle must be of quick perception and good judgment 
 naturally in order to play the position in the best manner. 
 
 When acting on the defensive the distance which he 
 should stand from the guard and the manner of going 
 through the line, either to the inside or outside of his op- 
 ponent, should be determined by previous judgment as 
 to where the play is to be made and influenced by an in- 
 stantaneous perception as the play starts. The position, 
 too, must be taken with the utmost caution and selected 
 at just the right distance from the guard to best meet the 
 play and still be able to defend his position on either 
 side. There is need of the closest and quickest observa- 
 tion and cleverest judgment. 
 
 Moreover, as many of the plays cannot be determined 
 beforehand, such a position must be taken as will best 
 enable the tackle to check any play which can be made. 
 He must then be on the alert for the very first indications 
 of the play and act on them, and at the same time he 
 must still keep the closest watch for later developments 
 which change the direction in which the ball will finally 
 be carried. 
 
 Playing up close to the guard is always dangerous un- 
 less it is necessary to do so in order to stop a wedge play, 
 for the tackle could then be blocked in very easily from 
 helping, if an attack were made on the space between him- 
 self and the end man, or in a play around the end. He 
 therefore would cut himself off from defending two-thirds 
 of his territory and the most defenseless part of the line. 
 Playing far away from the guard is also dangerous, for 
 he then leaves the part of his territory which is nearest
 
 37 
 
 the opposing half-backs too much exposed and gives his 
 opponent a chance to block him off from defending it. Of 
 course, if the tackle were free from the checking of an 
 opponent, he could play some distance away from the 
 guard and still defend the space between them ; but the 
 fact that there is a player opposite who is giving all his 
 attention, wit, and energy to securing an advantage over 
 him, gives a turn to the problem which he cannot ignore 
 in making his calculations. The tackle takes a certain 
 position ; the opponent takes one also. It may be a little 
 to the right or a little to the left of him, or it may be 
 directly in front of him. The tackle may change his 
 position a little and then the opponent perhaps change 
 his, but their relative positions may, or may not, be 
 changed ; or possibly his opponent may remain in the 
 same place. Just this action or inaction on the part of 
 the opposing tackle is sufficient to help him determine 
 how he should play in his defense, and is one of the signs 
 to be considered in deciding upon his own position and 
 action. 
 
 The tackle should usually play right up to the line, on 
 the defense. Sometimes with a very quick opponent, it 
 may be better to play a little back from the line. He 
 should be restless, and on the alert for an opportunity to 
 go through on the side of his opponent offering the 
 best advantage. He should watch the ball closely and 
 spring the instant it is snapped. His course of action in 
 reference to his opponent must be to get him out of the 
 way as quickly as possible. It may often be best for the 
 tackle simply to drive his opponent back with hard, quick 
 pushes. This might frequently be best when the play is 
 between him and the guard, because the time for prepara- 
 tion to tackle is exceedingly short before the runner will
 
 38 
 
 be going past, and the whole attention must be given to 
 securing a momentary freedom from interference, for a 
 quick.spring. The tackle has a great deal of this quick 
 tackling to do because the runs are so frequently made in 
 his region. Much of this also must be done right in the 
 midst of interference, when the only chance to get the 
 runner is by hurling himself headlong at him as he 
 passes. 
 
 On end plays the tackle must break away from his op- 
 ponent as quickly as possible. He will have no time then 
 to carry his man before him except, perhaps for an 
 instant, as he pushes him back to get by him. Yet he 
 must make sure to knock his opponent sufficiently off his 
 balance to prevent his following him and giving him a 
 shove at a critical moment. In defense on an end play, 
 everything depends on the tackle reaching the runner 
 before he begins to turn in order to circle the end, and 
 before he has swung in closely behind his interference. 
 The runner then has not yet gotten under full speed 
 and the interferers are somewhat scattered and looking 
 toward the end. The tackle has the best chance for de- 
 feating end runs ; in this he is ably seconded by the end 
 man, the two working together, in fine team play. 
 
 The tackle must go through the line on the defense. 
 The plan of waiting until it is seen where the run will be 
 made and then running behind his line to help, if the play 
 appears to be on the other side, is disastrous to a good de- 
 fensive game. It not only is dangerous, because it leaves 
 the way clear for a splendid run on a double pass, but it 
 is also especially harmful because it gets the tackle into 
 the habit of waiting for every play to become well start- 
 ed, and this is fatal to a strong defense. If the play is 
 around the other end, the tackle should follow the run-
 
 39 
 
 ner around and try to overtake him. It is sometimes 
 possible for a fast runner to do this when he breaks 
 through quickly. In following the man with the ball, the 
 tackle must be on the watch constantly for a double pass. 
 If he suspects one is to be made, he must be sure not to 
 be drawn in or blocked as he runs behind the line. It 
 would be better, in that case, to go straight through. 
 The tackle can do more to defeat a double pass than any 
 other player, for, if he plays his position well, he will 
 meet the runner when there is not more than one inter- 
 ferer to combat. If he then does not tackle the runner, 
 he can force him to run so far back of the line that the 
 rest of the team will be able to come to his assistance be- 
 fore he circles the end. 
 
 When the opponents are going to kick, the tackle has 
 an especial burden resting on him because he is in a very 
 advantageous position for breaking through quickly and 
 stopping the ball. No other rusher should reach the full- 
 back so quickly, unless, perhaps, the guard, because none 
 other is so well placed and at the same time interfered 
 with so little. 
 
 He should, therefore, go through with all his strength 
 and speed, and jump high in the air to stop the ball. 
 His hands should be raised at the same time in order to 
 place as high an obstacle in the way of the ball as is 
 possible. The tackle on the same side as the kicking 
 foot has a better chance to stop the ball than his com- 
 panion on the other side, and he must, therefore, put 
 forth his utmost efforts. Frequently, the tackle, like the 
 guards and center, can work some clever team play in 
 conjunction with an extra man, whereby one or the other 
 can go through the line with little opposition. 
 
 There are a variety of tactics which can be employed
 
 40 
 
 in getting through the line, and every tackle should be 
 able to use them at will. Those are best which enable 
 the tackle to get through quickly and at the same time 
 permit him to watch the runner closely. This is a point 
 which ought to be deeply impressed on the minds of all 
 the rushers. The situation changes so quickly when a 
 run is being made that it is not safe to have the eyes off 
 the runner for a second. The methods usually employed 
 in breaking through the line are : striking the opponent 
 in the chest quickly and hard, and following it up with 
 a shove to one side when he is off his balance ; whirl- 
 ing suddenly around him, using either foot as a pivot; 
 ducking quickly to one side ; making a feint to go one 
 side and going the other ; striking the opponent with 
 the head or shoulder and lifting him aside ; stepping a 
 little to one side as the opponent comes forward and 
 swinging him through behind him. The tackle can 
 sometimes secure an advantage for breaking through by 
 pushing his opponent back from the line just before the 
 ball is snapped. He must be very free to move, and go 
 through with a jump. It is better to keep as low down 
 as possible in doing this. 
 
 The position which the tackle should take on the 
 defense against mass plays from the center of the field is 
 shown in the diagrams further on. He should move off 
 from the guard sufficiently to protect the side of the field 
 and at the same time be able to spring back close to him on 
 any play directly forward. It is his special duty to tackle 
 the runner if he comes out at the side of the formation. 
 In case the runner does not come out before the oppos- 
 ing rushers meet, the tackle should dive in and secure 
 him, if possible, but in doing this he must be careful not 
 to leave too great a space between himself and the guard,
 
 as an opening through which to send the runner may be 
 intended at that very point. 
 
 It is impossible to lay down rules of action for the 
 tackle on wedge plays in the line. He must work accord- 
 ing to his best judgment based on the situation ; but an 
 important factor in successful play will be to put in the 
 work low down. If he is caught by the wedge in an up- 
 right, or nearly upright position, he will be rendered 
 absolutely useless. For this reason, it is often best to 
 dive in at the side of the wedge about knee high and 
 try to tackle the runner, or cause him to fall over him. 
 If the wedge is revolving, it is often best for the tackle 
 to fall down in front of it. The tackle must consider it 
 his first duty to assist the center and guards in checking 
 the wedge, and leave the other players to attend to the 
 runner if he comes out from behind or at the side. 
 
 On the offense, the tackle cannot leave any unpro- 
 tected space between himself and the guard, if it be occu- 
 pied by an opponent. He must therefore always take 
 the inside man. This may require him to play close to 
 the guard. From this position he must do all his run- 
 ning with the ball, all his blocking, all his interference 
 for the runners, and make all his openings ; varying his 
 attitude toward his opponent to meet the special need of 
 the moment. In making his opening the tackle has to 
 outwit and combat a very free opponent, one who, as a 
 rule, is constantly changing his position. This renders it 
 difficult, sometimes, to make an opening because fre- 
 quently it has to be done while the opponent is changing 
 his position, and when, perhaps, the tackle himself is not 
 in a favorable position for making that particular open- 
 ing. Likewise, when trying to block his opponent, the 
 tackle must follow him closely and keep in front of him,.
 
 42 
 
 and must be all on tiptoe to dart forward to get in a body 
 check before the opponent acts. 
 
 When the tackle runs with the ball or moves away 
 from his position to accompany the runner, he is much 
 more at liberty in choosing his place in the line. His 
 great aim should be to take a position which should not 
 be noticeable by its strong contrast to previous ones, and 
 yet, at the same time, be one which he can use to the 
 greatest advantage in the play in hand. Usually that 
 position should be up in the line not more than two or 
 three feet from the guard, but sometimes it is better to 
 stand a little behind the line. 
 
 It is most important to the tackle when he runs with 
 the ball that he get away from his opponent with the ut- 
 most quickness, and then, that he run with tremendous 
 speed and power. The secret of successful running 
 from any position lies in this. The practice given to im- 
 proving in this particular should be faithful and constant. 
 The run of the tackle cannot be successful until there is 
 added to the quick start and strong headway, such train- 
 ing in taking his course that he will neither run too near 
 the line, nor too far back from it ; and the ability to circle 
 around the quarter-back and take the ball from him 
 without a diminution in speed, and then plunge into his 
 opening with a force which cannot be stopped short of 
 several yards. Much depends on the course taken. The 
 tackle's failure in running often results from slowing 
 up to turn into the right opening and thus losing his 
 power. Instructions in running and holding the ball are 
 given in the chapter on the half-back and full-back.
 
 THE END-RUSHER. 
 
 The end-rushers fill two of the most important positions 
 on the eleven. In defense, their especial duty is to pre- 
 vent the long runs of the game. It is an unusual thing 
 for a long run to be made through the center part of the 
 line on account of the support given the rushers by the 
 quarter-back and half-backs. Let a runner once get 
 around the end with one or two interferers ahead of him, 
 as is usually the case when such runs are made, and he is 
 likely to go a long distance down the field and not infre- 
 quently make a touchdown. In defending his territory 
 against these runs the end stands at the most remote part 
 of the field for assistance to be rendered him. He is at 
 the extreme part of the rush line and has no one close to 
 him to help him. His nearest neighbor, the tackle, must 
 be depended on for most of the assistance, and when he 
 cannot render it, the end is put to the test of tackling a 
 runner preceded by a group of interferers. In such an 
 emergency a deep responsibility rests upon the end- 
 rusher, because he is probably the last man left to pre- 
 vent a long run and perhaps a touchdown, producing a 
 sensation akin to that of the full-back when he alone 
 stands between the runner and the goal. 
 
 Moreover, the end-rusher has to meet the runner under 
 most trying circumstances^ The runner and the inter- 
 ferers have gotten well under way ; they have passed the 
 most dangerous spot in the line and are coming on at 
 great speed. The interference is now more focused and 
 
 (43)
 
 44 
 
 effective in arrangement than it has yet been. There are 
 more interferers and they are more closely bunched. At 
 the same time, the end well knows that he is an especial 
 mark on all sides. He realizes that a particular man is 
 appointed to do his utmost to check his play and that if 
 this man fails to do it, the work is to be attended to by 
 the other interferers who come immediately after. Under 
 these difficulties in tackling and maneuvering, it is not 
 strange that every captain is most careful in the selection 
 and training of his end men. 
 
 The kind of man who could play a brilliant game at 
 end, might not, perhaps, be able to fill any other position 
 in the rush line, yet this is not necessarily true. His 
 qualification would be questionable only as regards build 
 and weight. There are most brilliant end players who 
 only weigh about one hundred and fifty pounds, and 
 sometimes a little less, but the tendency now is toward 
 selecting slightly heavier players for that position in order 
 to gain more weight with which to meet the tremendous 
 on-rush of the interferers. - But it is not infrequent that 
 the light, agile, cat-like men are much more likely to 
 tackle the runner, and so are selected in preference to 
 those possessing plenty of weight but less skill. The 
 tackling of these light, quick men is necessarily most 
 brilliant, because they do not bore their way through to 
 the runner but seize a momentary opening to put in their 
 telling work. Such a man, as has been said, could not 
 play in any other position in the rush line, for he would 
 not be heavy enough to stand the hard pushing and 
 plunging to which, for example, the tackle is subjected. 
 With the exception of meeting .the end plays and plays 
 between the end and tackle, the end-rusher does not have 
 the hard, wearing work of the other rushers. Not that
 
 45 
 
 he does not have plenty of work to do, but he is not con- 
 stantly combating an opponent and struggling with 
 might and main to get through the line, thus being sub- 
 jected to the little knocks and bruises which the other 
 rushers have to endure. 
 
 The end-rusher is at liberty to take any position he 
 chooses on the offense. His one thought, however, should 
 be to take that position from which he can best operate 
 in helping out the play. Many end-rushers fail to do 
 this. Some ends play up in the line and follow their op- 
 ponents wherever they move, no matter how far out they 
 go. Others take a stand a little back of the line, about a 
 yard or two from the tackle, shifting this now and then 
 as the play suggests and admits. This latter is generally 
 the best position which can be taken for helping in the 
 interference, and it is also a better position from which to 
 start if the end-rusher is to run with the ball himself. 
 Whenever the end-rusher is going to take the ball he 
 should carelessly assume a position a little nearer the 
 quarter-back perhaps almost behind the tackle. Other- 
 wise, the distance which he would be obliged to run be- 
 fore he reached his opening would be so great that the 
 opponents would have enough time in which to intercept 
 the play. On this play the quarter-back should give the 
 ball to him by a short pass and then run ahead to inter- 
 fere. 
 
 If the end-rusher plays up in the line he should always 
 take the inside man when acting on the offensive. This 
 is a point frequently forgotten, and oftentimes is the rea- 
 son why end runs are stopped before the runner reaches 
 the end. The end-rusher should also remember to help / 
 the tackle whenever the latter takes the ball. In this case 
 it may be necessary for the end-rusher to step in and
 
 46 
 
 block the opposing tackle, but if the tackle can break 
 away from his opponent without assistance it is better 
 that the end should follow the tackle right around. When 
 the tackle is to go into the line the end can do no better 
 than place his hands on his hips and steer him into the 
 opening. If the end-rusher does this well he can be of 
 great assistance to the tackle in running, and at the same 
 time prevent him from being caught from the rear. The 
 best way to play the end position in making the different 
 evolutions, is shown in the chapter containing diagrams. 
 
 On kjcks into touch the end-rusher must cover the ball 
 well and secure it the instant the full-back puts him on 
 side. Whenever an opponent secures it the end-rusher 
 on that side must be on the watch to prevent his quickly 
 putting it in play at the point it crossed the line. He 
 should also be on the watch for all side-line tricks. The 
 other end man should return quickly to his position 
 to guard his field against a throw in from the side or any 
 quick play. The end-rushers must be sure to keep their 
 eyes on any outlying men who might receive the ball on 
 a.pass. 
 
 V/ " Be the first man down the field on a kick " is the 
 motto early instilled in the would-be end-rusher, and to 
 do that and be there in time to tackle the catcher before 
 he starts is no small accomplishment. It means that 
 with a good punter, who has perhaps the wind behind 
 him to propel the ball, the end must be exceedingly 
 quick in starting and very swift of foot. If the end fails 
 to get down the field in time, the ball will be carried or 
 kicked back, whereas a swift runner might be able to pre- 
 vent this. Moreover, the full-back ought not to be com- 
 pelled to limit his kick because of the slowness of the 
 end-rusher.
 
 47 
 
 It requires long practice and much careful study to de- 
 termine just the direction the ball has taken almost at the 
 moment it is kicked without wasting time in turning 
 around or in looking over the head into the air. Likewise 
 it requires practice to decide upon the best way of ap- 
 proaching the man to whom the ball is kicked. It is a 
 common fault for end-rushers to run blindly down the 
 field without knowing the exact direction which the ball 
 has taken, when a little study of the faces and actions of 
 the half-backs will indicate in a second whither the ball is 
 going. 
 
 Another common fault with the end-rusher is the failure 
 to tackle the man who gets the ball. This results largely 
 from over running him. The player with the ball simply 
 jumps to one side at the proper moment and lets the end 
 go by in his headlong run, and then goes down the field. 
 The one remedy is that he should slacken speed a little 
 as he approaches and watch for a chance to tackle. 
 
 Care should be taken by the end-rusher as he runs 
 down the field to approach the player who has received 
 the ball so that he will be_Jorced to run on the inside of 
 him. Then, in case the end misses his tackle, "Tie will fall 
 into the hands of the other rushers, now near at hand. 
 The position of the end-rusher when a kick is about to 
 be made, should be such that he can protect the field. 
 Usually he draws off well from the tackle. This must be 
 done without fail when he has a large field to guard, that 
 is, when the other end of the line is near the side of the 
 field. The general form of the rush line as it advances 
 when a kick is to be made, is described in the chapter on 
 team play. 
 
 It may be said further, that usually the end-rusher 
 should start his line of direction slightly towards the side 
 4
 
 lines until he gets the first inkling of the direction the 
 ball has taken. He should then bear in or out still far- 
 ther, according as seems best. This would not be good 
 advice to the end-rusher who stands close to the side line. 
 The reason for the end taking such a start is that he 
 should protect the whole field against a run, and the least 
 protected part should be attended to first. This sugges- 
 tion has especial weight when there is a great deal of 
 space between the end-rusher and the side line. 
 
 The end-rusher must be especially watchful at the start 
 for signs of a short kick, or for one which goes to the 
 side. Sometimes these are caused by inaccurate kicking, or 
 by the partial stopping of the ball by an opposing rusher. 
 In any event, he must be careful not to over-run the ball, 
 and must secure it whenever an opponent puts him on 
 side by touching the ball. If the end is in doubt where 
 the ball is, he should glance around quickly and find out. 
 The end-rushers must be especially careful when the ball 
 is kicked from near the side of the field, for it often hap- 
 pens that only one end can be near the opponent when 
 he catches. 
 
 The end-rusher should be under the ball when it falls, 
 and if the opponent is a good catcher he should usually 
 force him to make a fair catch. If, however, the end- 
 rusher is where he is absolutely sure of securing the 
 catcher if he should run, it may sometimes be better for 
 him to give the opponent a slight chance to run for the 
 sake of increasing his liability to drop the ball. This lia- 
 bility is further increased by a hard tackle just at the 
 moment the catcher starts. The end should be on the 
 watch to secure the ball at such times. He should also 
 make sure that the catcher does not pass the ball to a 
 companion near at hand.
 
 49 
 
 There are many conditions to be met by the end as he 
 goes down the field on a kick which cannot be described. 
 He must note them as they come and act accordingly. 
 One of the hardest of these is to know how to handle 
 bounding and rolling balls. Observing the angle at 
 which the ball descends, also the way it acts for two or 
 three bounds after it strikes, will give some information 
 on which to base action, but there is a constant uncer- 
 tainty ; and in those cases where the ball is revolving on 
 an axis constantly shifting as it goes through the air, 
 there is no certainty of its action after it strikes the 
 ground. It therefore takes the most careful playing at 
 such times on the part of the end-rusher, for one of the oppo- 
 nents may dart in opportunely and seize the ball and go 
 sprinting up the field. If there is any chance for this, 
 and he is not well supported with helpers, the end-rusher 
 should immediately touch the ball and force a down for 
 the other side. Furthermore, when a kicked ball is likely 
 to go over the line in goal, the end-rusher should do his 
 utmost to touch it just before it reaches the five-yard line 
 so that it shall be down at that spot and shall not be 
 brought out to the twenty-five yard line.
 
 THE QUARTER-BACK. 
 
 As popular opinion has always assigned the snap-back's 
 position to the largest man on the eleven, so likewise has 
 it given the quarter-back's position to the smallest man. 
 There is less reason in having the smallest man quarter- 
 back than the largest player at center. Indeed, there is 
 no question that a swift, agile man of one hundred and 
 sixty or one hundred and seventy pounds would be the 
 most useful quarter-back, if his other qualifications are 
 equal. The trouble is that the man of such a weight, who 
 was qualified to fill the quarter-back's position, would be 
 the man who would be most needed at tackle or end, or 
 as a running-back. There is rarely more than one man 
 with these qualifications on the best teams, while there 
 are usually several men of sufficient speed and agility 
 among the candidates, who perhaps could not be useful 
 in any other position, and yet are too skillful players to 
 loose. The result is that on university elevens the 
 quarter-back is usually a man who weighs from one hun- 
 dred and forty to one hundred and fifty-five pounds, is 
 agile and swift, is a hard worker, with great endurance 
 and unlimited pluck. Well does he need all of these 
 qualities, for he must always be in the thick of the fight. 
 No play can take place from a scrimmage without his 
 being a medium in its execution, not only in the passing 
 of the ball, but also, if he does his duty, in assisting the 
 runner on his way up the field. Not that he runs ahead 
 of the runner every time, for he is unable to go in front 
 on some plays, but he can always get behind to push if 
 
 (50)
 
 5' 
 
 the runner is stopped, or to block off those who try to 
 tackle him from the rear. 
 
 The quarter-back's position demands a peculiarly heady 
 player at the same time that it calls for agility and quick- 
 ness. No other player on the eleven is forced to do as much 
 thinking and planning while in the midst of most skillful 
 and invaluable work. He has no chance to "soldier," 
 either mentally or physically, as the rest of the eleven 
 may do, to a limited extent, occasionally during the pro- 
 gress of the game if so disposed. His brain must be as 
 clear as his muscles are quick and steady. He has to 
 translate with absolute exactness every signal which is 
 given, and as accurately carry it out by forwarding the 
 ball in the most advantageous manner possible to the 
 player who is to receive it. On no account, then, must a 
 man be selected for this position who is inclined to be- 
 come " rattled," for the position itself is enough to render 
 unsteady the coolest man. 
 
 When the quarter-back is appointed to give the signals 
 for the play a new duty emphasizes the importance of his 
 being a heady player, for he then is made the general of 
 the game. By having this duty to perform the chances 
 for his making a mistake in giving the ball to the wrong 
 player are perhaps slightly decreased, but the demand 
 for clever judgment and shrewdness in field tactics more 
 than offsets this. 
 
 The quarter-back must know no physical fear. He 
 must be fearlessly unconscious that there are several op- 
 ponents almost within reach of him who are doing their 
 utmost to fall upon him. No nervousness must enter in- 
 to his work ; else he is not the man for the position. 
 
 In assuming his position on a down, the quarter-back is 
 allowed considerable freedom. Some players prefer to
 
 5 2 
 
 receive the ball close up to the center-rusher and then 
 move away as they pass it on to the runner ; others take 
 a position between the two, just as far away as is possi- 
 ble while still being able to reach the center conveniently 
 for giving the signal. 
 
 The quarter-back who plays close up to the center ren- 
 ders himself liable to be interfered with in his pass by the 
 opposite center and guards, who may reach over to check 
 his play ; at the same time he cannot so well take part in 
 the interference on end plays. On the other hand, the 
 quarter-back who takes his position far behind the center 
 is limited in some of his plays. He can be of more assist- 
 ance, perhaps, in helping on the end plays, but it will be 
 impossible for any of the guards and tackles to run with 
 the ball with any chance of gaining ground, because they 
 will have to run so far behind the line to receive the ball 
 that they will easily be tackled. When the quarter-back 
 takes this position he will have to give the signal in some 
 other way than that usually followed. It has been cus- 
 tomary for the quarter-back to press the calf of the center 
 rusher's leg, or some other part of his body, with his thumb 
 when he is ready for the ball ; but there are reasons why 
 some other signal would be better at times, and the giving 
 of the signal would be of little moment if there is to be 
 a decided advantage gained by playing so far behind the 
 center. It is accepted as the best way for the quarter- 
 back, in playing his position, to stand bent over, at arms 
 length from the center, with his eyes fixed on the ball. 
 
 He has already learned the position of the player who 
 is about to receive the ball as he glanced around at his 
 team when the signal for the play was given. The in- 
 stant that he gives the signal for the ball to come back 
 he turns quarter round, throwing his right or left foot
 
 53 
 
 well behind for a brace, according as he wishes to pass 
 the ball to the right or left. The quarter-back must 
 not take his final position for receiving the ball before 
 the signal for the ball to come back is given ; otherwise 
 the opponents will have time to study out his method of 
 passing for the different plays and can guess in what 
 direction the run will be made. It is all done so quickly 
 in the other case that there will be no time to anticipate 
 the play. 
 
 The quarter-back should never give his private signal 
 for the ball until the captain has given the signal for the 
 play, and then only after he comprehends it himself. In 
 a well drilled eleven the quarter-back understands the 
 signal for a play the instant it is given, and yet it is not 
 a rare occurrence in important games for signals to be 
 mixed or the key numbers to be left out. In that case the 
 quarter-back should not signal for the ball until the signal 
 for the play is made plain or a new one given. It is now 
 a common practice for the quarter-back to give the signals 
 for the play himself, whether he is captain or not. This 
 has grown out of the fact that he is in one of the best 
 positions for observing the whole field, and also because 
 he will no longer need to interpret the signal after it is 
 given, but can call for the ball as soon as he thinks best. 
 This facilitates the play somewhat and lessens the liabil- 
 ity of making mistakes in translating the captain's signal. 
 
 There are three styles of passing a ball used by quarter- 
 backs. Two of these make use of only one arm in for- 
 warding the ball one by an overhand and straight-arm 
 movement especially valuable for passing long distances, 
 but too slow for ordinary use; the other by an underhand 
 pitch with an easy, natural swing of the arm. This lat- 
 ter style is the quickest of the three, for no time is lost in
 
 54 
 
 raising the arm into a position for delivering the ball. 
 This pass supplements the movement of the ball along the 
 ground most quickly and naturally. In the third style of 
 passing both hands and arms are used and it is closely 
 allied to the one-arm underhand pass. This insures ac- 
 curacy, but places limitations on the distance the ball can 
 be thrown. It is commonly used in all short passing. It 
 would be of great advantage if a quarter-back could pass 
 accurately with either hand. 
 
 In receiving the ball from the center the quarter-back 
 should stop it with the hand which corresponds to the leg 
 already placed behind for a brace and immediately adjust 
 the other hand to it for a pass. This is done by placing 
 one end squarely in the hand from which the pass is to be 
 made and spreading out the fingers. The hand should 
 then be bent at the wrist until the ball rests against the 
 forearm. The ball is now in a position for a pass. Care 
 should be taken to have the hand squarely behind the 
 ball, also to have the long axis of the ball parallel with 
 the forearm. The easiest way to make a long pass is to 
 swing the arm at full length just below the level of the 
 shoulder. 
 
 The quarter-back must need give considerable time to 
 practicing all parts of his work in receiving, handling, and 
 passing the ball. It is no easy matter to receive the ball 
 as it comes bounding back from the center-rusher and 
 adapt it to the hands for accurate passing while quickly 
 turning into position to deliver it to the runner; but it is 
 necessary for the quarter-back to do this in order not to 
 be interfered with by the rushers who break through the 
 line, and also not to delay the runner. It requires long 
 practice, also, to be able to handle the ball and be off the 
 instant the ball is in the hands, but it is an achievement
 
 55 
 
 which enables the quarter-back to be of great service in 
 end interference. Unless, however, there is the most 
 skillful handling of the ball it is impossible for the quarter- 
 back to get ahead of the runner without delaying him. It 
 requires much practice to be able to do quick and accurate 
 passing to be able to place the ball at just the right dis- 
 tance ahead of the runner and at just the right height and 
 at just the right speed, so that he shall not be delayed an 
 instant, and can give his whole thought to running and 
 dodging. 
 
 Too great stress cannot be laid upon quick work by the 
 quarter-back. It means success or defeat to some of the 
 plays. At the same time the quarter-back must be ex- 
 ceedingly careful in handling and passing the ball. It 
 is better to be a little slow than to be quick and unsteady. 
 He must never become excited and lose his self-control, 
 for that would be disastrous to all careful work and also 
 would be likely to cause him to make mistakes in signals. 
 
 On all dashes through the center it is better for the 
 quarter-back to make short passes of the ball at the run- 
 ner's waist. The ball must not be passed fast and it 
 must be most accurately placed, for the runner is bent 
 over for a plunge and is not in a position to handle it, 
 unless on a slow and accurate pass. These points are 
 worthy of the most careful consideration, for much of the 
 fumbling by the half-backs is due to poor passing. What 
 would ordinarily be an excellent pass if the half-back 
 were at some distance, would be a poor one when he is 
 coming forward at full speed, with his body somewhat 
 bent at the waist, and his attention partly on the ball and 
 partly on the opening he is to take. In this case, also, 
 a high pass is harder to catch than a low one, because 
 the hands will have to be raised quickly from their posi- 
 tion at the waist.
 
 56 
 
 The quarter-back should also use the greatest care in 
 his pass to the full-back for a kick, for a poor pass will 
 most likely result in the opponents stopping the kick and 
 securing the ball on four downs, if not on a fumble. The 
 full-back can kick most quickly when the ball is passed 
 at his waist. 
 
 Some quarter-backs prefer to hand the ball to the run- 
 ner as he dashes by, whenever that is possible. This 
 method, without doubt, is best when the guard or tackle 
 runs around for a plunge through the line between center 
 and guard, or guard and tackle, on the other side of the 
 center. In this case the quarter-back will turn half 
 around, with his back to the center-rusher, the ball being 
 held by the ends between the extended hands. In most 
 other cases an advantage is gained \>y passing the ball, 
 because the quarter-back will not be in danger of being 
 tackled by the opposing rushers or quarter-back, as they 
 break through the line, and also because he will be free 
 after his pass to give his whole attention to helping the run- 
 ner. He may do this either by going through the opening 
 and pulling the runner after him ; by grasping him and 
 going through with him ; by shoving him hard when he 
 strikes the line; or by jumping into an opponent who has 
 broken through in the path of the runner. Occasionally 
 it may be better to hand the ball to the runner when the 
 quarter-back runs out to the side to interfere for him; but 
 even in that case, a short pass usually facilitates the play 
 because the quarter-back can run faster and do better in- 
 terference when free from the ball. It is of great assist- 
 ance in getting into the interference on end plays for the 
 quarter-back to be able to pass the ball accurately on the 
 run, for every fraction of a second counts in making a 
 helpful connection.
 
 57 
 
 On the defense the quarter-back usually hovers in the 
 rear of the center and guards, watching his opportunity 
 to go through and tackle the opposing quarter or half- 
 backs. 
 
 A powerful style of defensive play has now, however, 
 been largely adopted, in which the quarter-back takes a 
 position behind one of the tackles, while a half-back is 
 brought up to a corresponding position behind the other 
 tackle. They there await the play without attempting to 
 go through on the instant the ball is snapped, and as the 
 line of their opponents separates for the play, the one on 
 whose side of the center the opening is made dives into 
 it to meet the runner before he can strike the line. 
 
 He must know just when to go through the line and 
 when to wait in order to see where to meet the play; also 
 through which opening in the line to go in order to best 
 check the play. Some shrewd guessing can be done , which 
 will help determine this by noting all the signs of the di- 
 rection of the play spoken of in the chapter on team play. 
 The center and guards, and sometimes the tackles, should 
 help the quarter-back find his opening and assist him in 
 getting through. The quarter-back should always be 
 helped through when the opposing team is going to kick, 
 since it will be much easier for htm to go through quickly 
 on account of his size and quickness in starting. If the 
 rushers and the quarter-back work together on the de- 
 fense the latter can be a most valuable adjunct to their 
 play, because he is free to move anywhere. When a run- 
 ner is checked or tackled, the quarter-back, as indeed all 
 the eleven, should endeavor to pull the ball out of his 
 hands before he calls " down." The quarter-back often 
 has a good chance to do this when the runner is entan- 
 gled in a mass.
 
 THE HALF-BACKS AND FULL-BACK. 
 
 The half-backs and the full-back, who is practically a 
 third half-back, stand usually from two to four yards 
 behind the center of the line. They group themselves at 
 short distances from one another and in a way to best 
 assist in carrying out the play which is about to be made. 
 There is a difference in the latitude given the half-backs 
 and full-back on different teams in arranging themselves 
 for each play. Some captains require these men to 
 occupy the same position on every play, claiming that it 
 is of great advantage in obscuring the play to have a 
 fixed arrangement. On other teams the half-backs and 
 full-back are allowed to move about, and shift their 
 places to the position in which they think they can best 
 help out the play. 
 
 There is also a great difference among teams in the 
 placing of the half-backs and full-back in reference to 
 each other and also in reference to the rush line. In 
 general, the full-back is stationed behind the center and 
 usually about a yard or a yard and a half further from 
 the line than the half-backs. On some teams, these three 
 play close together, separated by not more than a yard 
 or a yard and a half ; on others, they are separated from 
 two yards to three yards and a half. There is also a 
 decided difference in the distance behind the line which 
 the backs play. This varies from two to five yards. 
 
 The arrangement of the backs should, in a measure, 
 depend on the style of game to be played ; and the style 
 
 (58)
 
 59 
 
 of game should be determined by the composition of the 
 team. That is to say, that if it is deemed wise to play a 
 center game, it can best be done by bunching the backs ; 
 while, on the other hand, the combinations can be best 
 made for an end game when the backs are more spread 
 apart. 
 
 Captains who are limited in the selection of their play- 
 ers will find it well worth their while to consider the 
 arrangement of the backs, both in regard to their relative 
 distance from each other, and also in regard to the 
 distance which they stand behind the line. Indeed, there 
 is an opportunity for fine generalship in deciding upon 
 the place for these ground gainers. 
 
 When the three men who are to occupy positions 
 behind the line have been decided upon, there is also 
 need of careful consideration in determining which posi- 
 tion each one of the three shall fill. The full-back is 
 usually selected for his ability to kick, and yet, it is some- 
 times better that the man occupying that position should 
 act as a half-back until the signal for a kick is given, and 
 then drop back ; while a half-back sometimes could do 
 more effective work in the middle position during the 
 general play. If one of the backs is slow, his best posi- 
 tion is usually at full-back, for there he receives the 
 greatest protection and help. The light, quick men can 
 succeed better at half-back than the slow, heavy men. 
 
 It frequently happens that one of the backs invariably 
 carries the ball under the right arm and is able to use 
 only the left effectively in blocking off, or vice versa. 
 This fact should be considered in determining which 
 position the men shall occupy. 
 
 It is unfortunate for a half-back to be so limited, but 
 many of them are r and they do not practice with the
 
 6o 
 
 other arm enough to train it. Some naturally run in one 
 direction better than in another ; or some are surer and 
 stronger of foot, perhaps, when running around on a 
 particular side. A player is sometimes put in the right or 
 left position because the interference is stronger on that 
 side ; or possibly the arrangement is made to take ad- 
 vantage of a certain known strength or weakness in the 
 team which they are to meet. 
 
 The half-backs and full-backs are largely the ground 
 gainers for the team and most of the advances into the 
 enemy's territory are made by them. For this reason, 
 only men who possess special qualifications are selected 
 to fill these positions. In quickness and agility they 
 should equal the quarter-back ; in point of speed, ability 
 to dodge, courage, and dash, they should be unequaled 
 by any man on the team. Again and again they must 
 rush headlong into the line, oftentimes only to be hurled 
 back by the opposing rushers who plunge through upon 
 them. Yet, never losing courage, again and again they 
 must come to the rally, now attacking the opponent's 
 center by heavy plunging now trying to make a detour 
 around the wings. 
 
 Too great emphasis can not be placed on quick starting. 
 The inability to get under headway quickly is very often 
 the difference between a first-rate half-back and a second- 
 rate one. The second-rate half-back may be just as fast 
 a runner, and may be just as hard to stop when once 
 under way, but he does not get under headway nearly so 
 often, because he loses so much time on his start that he 
 is tackled before he passes the critical point in the run. 
 On all plunges into the line the utmost speed must be 
 used in conjunction with the quick start. The distance 
 is very short in which to get under headway, and there is
 
 6i 
 
 need of the greatest force to project the runner through 
 the resistance, as well as need to reach that point of re- 
 sistance in the shortest time. It is common with many 
 elevens to have one heavy back to do the plunging into 
 the line, but frequently this man is so slow in his start 
 that he is not so effective for line-breaking, against a 
 strong defense, as the lighter man would be. It very 
 frequently happens that in choosing the half-backs, men 
 have to be selected who have only part of the qualifica- 
 tions for the position ; who perhaps can run fast, or, again, 
 are what are termed ' ' fighters," but lack some of the other 
 requisites When such is the case, the captain should 
 immediately take means to train these men in the other 
 necessary qualifications for good half-back play. It is 
 indispensable that a half-back should be able to run into 
 a line hard time and again, and with no fear or hesita- 
 tion. It is likewise most necessary that a half-back 
 should be a powerful runner and not easily stopped ; one 
 who does not fall easily but keeps his feet well when 
 tackled, and struggles on for the gain of a few feet. But 
 he would be a much more useful man if, at the same time 
 with this pluck, determination, and ability to stand on his 
 feet under difficulties, and keep struggling forward, he 
 also had the ability to dodge an opponent or ward him 
 off with the extended arm, instead of running straight 
 into him. 
 
 Dodging in running can be cultivated through the 
 study and practice of its points of deception. The un- 
 derlying principle is the quick movement of the body, 
 or portion of the body, from a point where it would 
 have been if it had continued in the same direction. 
 In the most simple form of dodging the runner sud- 
 denly changes his direction. As usually practiced, the
 
 62 
 
 runner is obliged to slow up a great deal, in order to 
 change his course. In all dodging, the runner, if at 
 topmost speed, must slacken speed a little, just before he 
 reaches the tackier, in order to reduce the size of his 
 stride so that he may have a proper balance for project- 
 ing the body in another direction, or so that he may make 
 certain preliminary body motions which cannot be made 
 when at full speed. 
 
 There are several ways of dodging, but one man sel- 
 dom possesses more than one or two. The zigzag dodge, 
 which used to be so common when individual running 
 and poor tackling were in vogue, is performed by a com- 
 bination of leg and body feints. Its weakness is that it 
 retards tbe runner too much. In another dodge the run- 
 ner strides suddenly one side with a long step. This 
 is a very effective method for long-legged runners. In 
 another, the runner sways his body from one side to 
 the other, the legs being planted wide apart as each 
 step is taken in a zigzag course. The runner moves in 
 the same general direction until the opponent is reached 
 and then darts to one side. Still another dodge is made 
 by drawing the hips away, and in this dodge a clever vise 
 of the arm is valuable. It is one of the most effective, 
 since the hips are usually the part aimed at in tackling. 
 Another way is to duck under a tackier: by bending the 
 body low at the waist. This is practiced most effectively 
 by small men and is most valuable against high tackling. 
 Another method is to turn the body completely around 
 when about to be tackled, upon one foot as a pivot. 
 This comes into splendid use when the tackier has been 
 unable to grasp the runner with both hands. In another 
 form of avoiding a tackier, the runner, on being ap- 
 proached from the side, slows up a little ; whereupon
 
 63 
 
 the opponent delays just long enough to allow him to 
 go around by putting on a burst of speed. 
 
 Good dodging is not complete unless there is added to 
 it the power to use the arms well in warding off. The 
 latter supplements the former most effectively when well 
 done. When the tackling is high, or when the runner is 
 well bent over, the arm should be extended against the 
 face or chest of the opponent. Often, on a long dive or 
 reach for the hips by the tackier, the runner can break 
 the hold by striking down with his arm. All the above 
 styles of dodging can be acquired by practice. It is bet- 
 ter to practice them with only one-or two men to act as 
 opponents, after the movement has been learned. 
 
 There is another requisite needed by the half-back in 
 addition to dodging, and that is the ability to follow an 
 interferer or interferers well. Half-backs differ greatly 
 in skill on this point. The work of escaping a tackier 
 should not rest wholly in the interferers' hands, as it so 
 often does. The half-back should supplement the latter's 
 work by taking advantage of the protection given him to 
 work every ruse and feint he knows. Where there are 
 several interferers, there is a chance for the runner to 
 move from one to the other as occasion suggests. It 
 needs quick wit and agility to follow interferers well, but 
 much can be learned by practice with or without oppo- 
 nents, and every half-back should devote himself to per- 
 fecting his play in this particular. 
 
 The half-backs must be good catchers, not only of 
 kicked balls, but also, and especially, of balls passed 
 from the quarter-back. Oftentimes, the fault of a muff 
 or a fumble can be laid to a poor pass, but if the quarter- 
 back is unsteady on his part, there is all the more reason 
 that the half-backs and full-back be skillful catchers. If 
 5
 
 t 
 
 64 
 
 weak in catching, much practice should be given by the 
 half-backs to perfecting themselves. They should work 
 at this in conjunction with the quarter-back in order that 
 they may get used to each other. In catching short 
 passes, it is usually better to catch the ball with the 
 hands. This is surer because the hands can adapt them- 
 selves much better than the arms to the position and 
 shape of the ball when a man is running. In running 
 sidewise to the pass, as it is necessary to do in so many 
 plays, the arms could not be used without checking the 
 speed ; while there need be no diminution in speed when 
 the ball is caught in the hands, provided the quarter-back 
 does his work well. 
 
 There are three ways of carrying the ball, and each 
 has its proper occasions for use. When the play is 
 straight through the center the general order to the half- 
 back is to put the head down on a level with the waist, 
 gathering the ball up under the body with both arms, be- 
 cause there could be no use for an arm to ward off an 
 opponent until the line has been penetrated, and there is 
 great danger of losing the ball by the pulling and haul- 
 ing to which the runner is subjected. After the runner 
 is well through the line and has a chance to run freely, he 
 should transfer the ball to the side of the body opposite 
 the arm with which it is necessary to ward off. The 
 runner should look for opponents as he emerges from the 
 opening, and likewise for interferers. Where the play is 
 through the more open part of the line the runner should 
 usually carry the ball under the arm which is away from 
 the opponents who are likely to meet him first, shifting it 
 to the other arm when necessary. - In this case, likewise, 
 it is occasionally better to carry the ball in both hands 
 until there is need for warding off an opponent, at which
 
 65 
 
 moment the bail can be easily shifted to whichever arm 
 it is desired. This provides for any emergency. This 
 way of carrying the ball is especially valuable in dodg- 
 ing, since the ball can be placed quickly under either arm 
 and a better defense made ; for if forced to dodge, the 
 runner may transfer the ball to the arm away from his 
 opponent and have the other free to ward off. By moving 
 the ball from one side to the other in front of the body 
 while running, the dodge will be made more effective. 
 
 In carrying the ball under the arm it should be held 
 well forward, because it can be held more tightly in this 
 position. The reason why the ball is often pulled out from 
 under the arm is that it is held so far back that the strong 
 muscles of the chest are of little assistance. When held 
 in this position the ball is often forced out from under the 
 arm when the runner is thrown to the ground. By test- 
 ing these two positions it will be easily seen which is the 
 safer way. If a runner is inclined to lose the ball he 
 should practice squeezing it in the most approved man- 
 ner until he has trained himself to hold it fast under all 
 circumstances. 
 
 We have already spoken of the runner getting under 
 headway quickly. It is also necessary that he should run 
 with all his speed ; whether he plunges into the center 
 part of the line or follows the interference out to the 
 wings (unless he is obliged to slow down in order to 
 receive the ball, to let a runner in ahead of him, or to get 
 by an opponent). No runner is so invincible in all his 
 play as he who rushes with all his strength ; who shows 
 by his every movement the determination and power 
 with which he is charged ; who inspires in his opponents 
 a hesitancy and dread of tackling him ; who never gives 
 up when tackled but keeps struggling on, twisting,
 
 66 
 
 squirming, and wriggling himself out of the grasp of one 
 after another until he can no longer advance. Such a 
 man is worth a dozen who hesitate. 
 
 The dashing runner is the one who usually makes the 
 advances. If he goes through an opening he goes 
 through on a jump. Such a man, when checked, will 
 keep his feet and legs going like a treadmill and will bore 
 his way through in spite of resistance. This sort of 
 pushing accomplishes wonders. For effective applica- 
 tion of power it is worth vastly more than the same 
 amount of force applied slowly, for the attack is sudden 
 and continuous. Its effectiveness, however, is altogether 
 dependent on the head being well bent over, so that the 
 whole weight and impetus of the body is forward, for the 
 legs are then in a position tc exert the greatest power. 
 
 Another reason for running into the line well bent 
 over, is that it is much more difficult to tackle a runner 
 when in that attitude. It is impossible to get under a 
 short man in order to make a low tackle when he is com- 
 ing straight toward one, and the result is that the tackier 
 receives the runner's head in his stomach, or if he be good 
 in the use of his arm, he will very likely have a hand 
 thrust into his face or against his chest. At such times, 
 the runner is very often able to slip past. 
 
 Again, running with the head down enables the runner 
 always to fall forward when tackled. This usually means 
 a further gain of two or three yards. 
 
 In running low care should always be taken not to lose 
 the balance. After considerable practice the balance can 
 be very well kept when running much bent over and still 
 great speed be maintained. As soon as the line is cleared 
 and there are no opponents very near, the runner should 
 assume a more upright position so that he can run at his 
 utmost speed, lowering his head whenever he thinks best.
 
 67 
 
 In making the end plays, the runner need not put his 
 head down except, perhaps, when it is necessary to duck 
 under a tackier. He must now put on speed up to the 
 full limit of the interferers, following them very closely, 
 now using this one and now that, according as the danger 
 shifts. He must constantly be on the alert for changing 
 his position to take advantage of every little help, or to 
 prevent being pocketed, at the same time being ready to 
 break away from his interferers if he sees he can gain 
 more by so doing. In general, the runner should keep 
 behind his helpers until the last, but now and then an 
 opportunity comes which he ought to accept. 
 
 The light-footed, agile man who can keep his balance 
 well is physically best capacitated for running behind in- 
 terferers. To do it well the runner should be able to 
 change his stride to meet the emergencies which arise in 
 passing from one iaterferer to another, or in following 
 very close when a long stride would cause him to stumble 
 over his interferers. 
 
 Another requirement which the backs, or at least one of 
 them, presumably the full-back, should have, is the ability 
 to kick. It would be well if all three possessed this 
 ability, for there are times, now and then, when conster- 
 nation could be brought to the opponents by the half-back 
 returning a kick. But this could happen only occasionally, 
 and it is much more important that the half-backs be 
 especially strong in running with the ball, for that will be 
 their main work. The full-back however, should be a 
 skillful kicker both in punting and drop-kicking. 
 
 It requires long practice to punt well. The oval shape 
 of the ball precludes simply tossing or dropping it from 
 the hands and then kicking it, to get the best results. 
 
 The mechanical construction and adjustment of the
 
 68 
 
 muscles of the leg and body in their relation to kicking 
 require careful study. Long practice is necessary to be 
 able to regulate the power, and at the same time deter- 
 mine the angle and direction which the ball shall take. 
 All the practice which the full-back can get to acquire 
 skill in punting will be well repaid, for it will make him 
 of inestimable value to his eleven. 
 
 Where the full-back does not know how to punt, the 
 following directions will be found helpful : Hold the bal' 
 between the hands, the ends pointing to and from the 
 body, lacings up. Extend the arms horizontally in front 
 and bend forward with the body until the ball is held just 
 below the level of the waist. Take a short step forward 
 with the foot not used in kicking, and at the same time 
 drop the ball from the hands, and bring the kicking leg 
 quickly forward to meet the falling ball about knee high. 
 Do not try to kick hard at first. Attend simply to drop- 
 ping (not tossing) the ball without changing the relative 
 position of the> axis. This must be closely regarded or 
 there will never be any certainty as to where the ball will 
 go. The first point noticed by a novice will be that the 
 ball reaches the ground before his foot meets it. This 
 shows that the foot was not started forward soon enough. 
 One way to obviate that difficulty is to drop the ball from 
 a higher point ; but the best point has already been 
 selected and the tardy member must be trained to be on 
 time. It will also be noticed that sometimes the ball will 
 meet the leg above the ankle. The aim should be to have 
 the ball fit into the concave of the extended foot, and it 
 will probably be necessary to give the ball a slight toss 
 forward in order to make the kick powerfully. Care 
 should be taken when doing this that the ball is not 
 turned, or tossed so far that power is lost. In practicing
 
 6 9 
 
 in this way it will at first be noticed that the whole force 
 of the blow will be given by using the leg from the knee 
 down. This, one can readily see, would weaken the 
 blow because the leverage is short and the muscles which 
 extend the lower leg not especially powerful, and at the 
 same time it is very trying to the knee joint. The most 
 powerfn kick would be one which had the leverage of 
 the full length of the leg, thus bringing into play the 
 strong abdominal muscles to add speed and power. In 
 making .this kick, the leg should be extended at full 
 length (with toes pointed) and should swing on the hips 
 as an axis. After the forward kick has been learned so 
 that it can be well executed, the side kick may be at- 
 tempted. In this case the ball is dropped a little to the 
 outside. The great advantage in the side kick is, that if 
 not too much on one side, a very considerable increase in 
 power can be gained, because a longer swing can be 
 given to tbe leg, and because the swing is further as : 
 sisted by some additional muscles which give increased 
 power. Another advantage is that the full-back can take 
 a step to the side and kick around an opponent. 
 
 In practicing, do not keep the leg rigid through all the 
 swing. The muscles must be sufficiently lax to make 
 the swing easy, the rigid contraction coming just before 
 the foot reaches the ball. 
 
 The angle at which the ball is kicked can be regulated 
 by elevating or lowering the point of the ball farthest 
 away from the body, or by dropping the ball in such a 
 way that the position of the foot in the arc described by 
 it shall regulate the direction which the ball shall take. 
 If the kicker wishes to make a high kick, he drops the 
 ball so that the foot reaches it when knee high or above, 
 and when he wishes to make a low kick he allows the ball
 
 7 o 
 
 to get closer to the ground before his foot meets it. By 
 trial, it will be found that a point varying from about six 
 inches above to six inches below the height of the knee 
 is the place of greatest convenience and power. 
 
 After punting and drop kicking has once been learned, 
 the whole practice should be centered on kicking quickly. 
 The ball should be caught, adjusted, dropped, and kicked 
 just as quickly as possible. In practicing this, it will be 
 found expedient to have several balls for the quarter- 
 back to pass. After practicing for a few weeks in this 
 way the full-back will find that he can stand considerably 
 nearer the rush line and still avoid having the ball blocked. 
 
 The drop kick is made by dropping the ball on one of 
 the small ends and kicking it with the toe at the instant it 
 rises from the ground. Some kickers prefer to have the 
 ball lean toward them at a slight angle as it strikes, others 
 to have the ball lean slightly toward the goal, and still 
 others drop it with the long axis vertical. The latter style 
 is most commonly used. Practice in all these will deter- 
 mine in which position the foot meets the ball most nat- 
 urally. The ball should be kicked with a free and easy, 
 though quick, swing of the leg. If close under the goal 
 the kick may be made more quickly with a short half swing, 
 whereas in punting the leg is swung from the hip and the 
 large abdominal muscles of the body brought strongly into 
 play. In drop kicking very accurate, rapid, and effective 
 work can be accomplished when the swing is made almost 
 altogether from the knee joint with only a slight swing 
 from the hip. Beginners frequently make a great mis- 
 take in drawing the foot far back in preparation for a 
 long drop kick. By extending the leg below the knee 
 quickly and suddenly, so that the point of the toe will 
 meet the ball at the instant it rises from the ground, great
 
 distance can be attained with little apparent outlay of 
 force. 
 
 It requires a great deal of practice to be quick and ac- 
 curate at the same time. The full back should place 
 himself a little farther from his rush line in attempting 
 the drop kick than in punting, because the ball starts 
 lower and it is not so easy to control the angle it takes. 
 
 In trying for a goal from a place kick the ball should 
 be brought out to a spot from which the angle to the goal 
 and the distance from it are most favorable for the trial. 
 If the touchdown is made directly behind the goal, or near 
 it, the ball should not be carried far out into the field. A 
 point should be selected where there will be no danger of 
 the opposing rushers stopping the ball and from which it 
 will be easy to kick the goal. Some men prefer to make 
 the trial from a point not more than ten yards away, 
 while others carry the ball out fifteen or twenty yards. 
 The former, always make a quick half swing of the leg in 
 kicking, lifting upward with the foot as they kick; the lat- 
 ter usually kick with the leg swinging full and free from 
 the hip. 
 
 The ball should be held between the outstretched hands 
 of the quarter-back or some other player as he lies ex- 
 tended flat upon his stomach. The best way of holding 
 the ball is to place the fingers of one hand behind it about 
 three inches from the lower end, the fingers of the other 
 hand being placed at a corresponding point at the top and 
 slightly in front of the ball. The ball should be held in 
 firm but easy balance, and the fingers should be so placed 
 that it will be easy to turn it and least interfere with it 
 when placing it down for a kick. Great care must be 
 given to holding the ball steady. 
 
 When the spot has been selected from which the trial
 
 7 2 
 
 is to oe made, and the player who is to noli the ball has 
 prostrated himself in firm balance on the ground, at right 
 angles to the line of direction, and on the right or left side 
 of the kicker, according to the foot which he is to use, the 
 ball being properly held between the fingers with the 
 elbows resting on the ground, the kicker must proceed to 
 sight the ball. He first asks the holder to turn the lacing 
 of the ball toward him; next he tells him how he wishes 
 the ball to point and at what angle, if any, using such ex- 
 pressions as "head forward" and "head up," meaning 
 that the ball is to be tipped away from the kicker in the 
 first instance and held vertically in the second. Other ex- 
 pressions like "head out" and " head in " indicate that 
 the point of the ball is to be moved in or out in reference 
 to the player holding it. 
 
 The sighting of the ball toward the goal can be done 
 best by using the lacings as a guide, the holder being di- 
 rected to twist the ball out or in , in reference to himself, 
 by the expressions "lacings out," "lacings in." When 
 the ball has been well aimed and everything is ready the 
 kicker should tell the holder to " touch it down," at the 
 same time moving forward to kick. In touching the ball 
 down the holder must be very careful not to change the 
 position. As the ball touches the ground the lower hand 
 is removed in order not to interfere with its course. It is 
 well to remove beforehand all pebbles or tufts of grass at 
 the spot selected for placing the ball down, for a slight 
 unevenness is often sufficient to prevent a goal. 
 
 The kicker should keep his eye on some point on the 
 ball as he steps forward and aim to kick it in that 
 spot. Practice beforehand will determine the best place 
 to give the impetus. When the ball is vertical this spot 
 will be found by trial to be very near the ground ; when
 
 73 
 
 the ball leans toward the kicker the best point for the 
 kick is just below the lacing. The height of the point 
 above the ground is nearly the same in both cases, but the 
 point on the ball changes as the ball leans. If there is a 
 wind blowing the kicker must take into consideration its 
 force and direction in pointing the ball. 
 
 In catching kicked balls and long passes, it is usually 
 better to catch them with the arms. Every effort should 
 be made to take the ball when about waist high, for at 
 that point the arms can be better adjusted to it. The 
 body also, here much softer, can at this part be drawn in 
 to form a sort of pocket, as it were, for the ball. Care 
 must be taken not to have the ball strike high up on the 
 chest, for it is then difficult to shape the arms well to re- 
 ceive it and the ball rebounds much quicker from its firm 
 walls. 
 
 There are two ways of catching with the arms. In 
 one, the arms work in conjunction with the body, the 
 latter being used to stop the ball while the arms close 
 around it. In this style, one hand and forearm should be 
 held lower than the point of contact with the body, while 
 the other hand and forearm should be held above that 
 point. The arms should be bent and should not usually 
 be extended far from the body. In the other case, the 
 ball is caught entirely with the arms and hands. This 
 can be done only when it is kicked well into the air. The 
 arms are held parallel in front of the body about six inches 
 apart, being half bent at the elbows and wrists. The in- 
 stant the ball strikes, the hands are curled forward over it. 
 The fault of catching in this way usually lies in the catcher 
 failing to bring his elbows near enough together and so 
 leaving a space for the ball to go through.
 
 74 
 
 In nearly all plays the backs, from the nature of their 
 duties, are among the first men to start. Their position 
 behind the line renders their every motion conspicuous, 
 and the watchful rushers upon the opposing team will be 
 upon the constant lookout for some movement, glance, or 
 position of the body that betrays the direction of the 
 play which is about to be executed. On this account the 
 backs should take the greatest precaution to conceal their 
 intentions. It is of assistance sometimes in deceiving 
 the opponents to assume a position as if being about to go 
 in one direction when an entirely different move is in- 
 tended, but if this is practiced too frequently it will de- 
 feat its own end.
 
 EXPLANATION OF THE DIAGRAMS. 
 
 Before passing on to consider the following plays, a 
 few words of explanation will be necessary. 
 
 The side of attack in every instance, when in their 
 regular positions, will be represented by the solid dots 
 ( ), and the side acting on the defensive by rings 
 (O O O). When it is desired to represent a player in a 
 position other than that which he originally occupies 
 the figures O O O will be used. The broken line 
 
 ( ) will represent the course of the ball in 
 
 the pass and the direction taken by the runner who 
 receives it. 
 
 A simple dotted line ( ) will be used to in- 
 dicate that a player is to follow the runner with the ball, 
 while the solid line ( ) indicates that the man 
 shall pass in front to act as a line-breaker or interferer. 
 The arrows indicate the direction which the players shall 
 take. 
 
 The men represented by the letters given in the 
 diagrams are as follows : c, indicates the center ; Q B, the 
 quarter-back; R H, LH, RE, and L E, the right and left 
 half-backs and right and left ends respectively ; the right 
 and left tackles are indicated by R T and L T ; while F-B 
 represents the full-back. 
 
 It must be distinctly understood that the drawings 
 are in a measure diagramatical and do not in all in- 
 stances represent accurately the relative distance be- 
 tween the players. 
 
 For example : in the diagramatical representation, 
 wide spaces are left between the individual men in the 
 rush line, while as a matter of fact, when the game is in 
 progress, the rushers stand so closely together that they 
 can easily touch one another and are frequently placed 
 shoulder to shoulder. This manner of representation has 
 
 (75)
 
 76 
 
 been decided upon as conducive to greater clearness in 
 showing the relative positions and directions where a 
 number of men are obliged to pass through one opening, 
 and in case the beginner is misled by this in any way, 
 his error will be readily corrected by careful study in 
 other parts of the book. 
 
 In arranging the positions of the side acting upon the 
 defensive, the quarter-back has been placed immediately 
 behind one of the tackles while a half-back has been 
 brought forward and stationed behind the other tackle. 
 The abilities of the two half-backs should determine 
 which position they shall occupy ; the points to be con- 
 sidered being the ability to catch the ball when it is 
 kicked, and the qualification for meeting the heavy tack- 
 ling in the line. 
 
 Sometimes it is preferable upon the third down, or 
 when the ball is to be kicked, that the half-back stationed 
 behind the tackle should immediately return to his 
 proper position. At all other times the quarter-back and 
 half-back usually remain directly behind their respective 
 tackles as indicated, after the ball is snapped, until it be- 
 comes clearly apparent through which one of the openings 
 the opposing side is to make their attack, and then to 
 spring forward directly into this breach and meet the on- 
 coming runner in the line. 
 
 This is considered a safer and more powerful defense 
 than to have either one of these men attempt to break 
 through, in the hope of meeting the runner behind his 
 own line before he reaches the opening, and is the 
 method adopted by the leading college football teams in 
 the country. When opposed to a team using the running 
 game almost altogether, both half-backs may be sent for- 
 ward to support the line, the full-back alone remaining 
 well behind the line for safety.
 
 77 
 
 It will be noticed that the ends upon the side acting on 
 the offense are placed near the tackles and are drawn 
 slightly back from the line. We believe that the ends 
 are in the strongest possible position for an attack in any 
 direction when they stand about a yard and a half from 
 the tackles, and about a yard back from the line. From 
 this position they are of equal value in blocking, should 
 the play be made around their end, while in plays 
 through the center and around the opposite end, their 
 position back from the line enables them to get into the 
 play with far greater rapidity, and wellnigh doubles 
 their efficiency. From a position in the line the running 
 of the end, with the ball, which may be made a power- 
 ful play, would be extremely difficult. 
 
 Nearly every diagram represents two plays or more, 
 and it should be borne in mind that, whereas in the 
 diagram a play may be represented as made to the left, 
 the same play may also be made to the right, and vice 
 versa. 
 
 In representing the arrangement of the men in the 
 wedges and in the opening plays from the center of the 
 field, the formation is given which in the majority of 
 cases would seem to be most advantageous. But this 
 arrangement need not be considered fixed and may be 
 changed at the discretion of the captain. 
 
 For special reason, too, it may in some instances seem 
 best to alter the arrangement of the interference so that 
 the positions of the preceding and following runners shall 
 be interchanged. When there is sufficient reason for 
 doing so, there should be no hesitation in making the 
 alteration. When nothing is said as to duties of a player 
 in the description of the diagrams, it will be understood 
 that the player blocks his man.
 
 o 
 
 
 
 o\o : 
 
 \
 
 79 
 
 JS 
 
 A C 
 fll 3 
 
 . -c c 
 
 <u 
 
 3 
 *55 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 2 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 u 
 c 
 
 T3 X. * 
 
 fc 8 > 
 
 3 
 
 <^- 
 
 ^ rt 0' 
 
 S 55 
 
 S "g 
 
 XI D C 
 Co <U c3 
 
 s - s^ 
 
 2 'H 2 ^a 
 t* 5 S 
 
 = "1^ 
 
 sis 
 
 O A V 
 
 X ? 
 
 a -2 o 
 
 X! J5 
 
 EH 
 
 OH 
 
 a 5 u ? ^ 
 
 C <a c o ^ 
 
 ttf ^3 ^5 -G ^ oj 
 
 r "^ a i3 
 
 * 
 
 Vi K^-i fll 
 
 u S S 
 
 t 03 
 
 C 
 T3 ^5 
 
 ^1 
 
 o .a 
 
 S 
 
 "1 "3 
 
 .S w 3 
 
 M 
 
 T) ^ >;i; 
 
 O >. . 
 
 8 -d d 
 
 C fe 
 
 O 
 
 TJ 
 
 6 I
 
 o 
 
 o
 
 81 
 
 
 same 
 
 
 T j 
 
 2 05 
 
 1| 
 
 U 
 
 O 
 
 ID en 
 
 en SH 
 
 C <U 
 
 3 
 
 ^c 
 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 a; 
 
 
 
 , ^H 
 
 *J ^ 
 
 
 " o 
 
 oi bo 
 
 r ^ 
 
 
 
 j3 
 
 ;a 
 'in 
 
 0) 
 
 " 
 
 
 | * 
 
 1 * 
 O %i 
 
 d 
 
 .5 -< 
 
 en <U 
 
 U G 
 
 t-c O 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 s" 
 
 c 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 "*^ ^ 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 ,G 
 
 0) bO 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 d 
 
 C 
 
 j5* 
 
 
 ^ S 
 
 ^ "*"* 
 
 "x* 
 
 rt 
 
 ,G ^ 
 
 |ki 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "H S 
 
 1=5 
 
 1 
 
 tu 
 
 r O t-H 
 
 "^ 0) 
 ? 5 
 
 d 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 
 ^j 
 
 
 CQ ^* 
 
 '*"/ 
 
 r- i 
 
 ~ ,n 
 
 o3 in 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 (/) 
 
 
 
 ^ %i 
 
 r-" "^v 
 
 C* 
 
 
 "- rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 "-T* 
 
 
 
 
 
 .S >* 
 
 
 
 
 
 IH 
 
 
 
 fl 
 
 a 
 
 
 O 
 
 fj S 
 
 S 
 
 ^t ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Sn 
 
 
 
 *" 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 OCCU 
 
 
 c ^ 
 
 O^ 
 
 o ^ 
 
 en 
 
 
 ^ . 
 
 * -i 
 *-" 
 
 G O 
 
 _G 
 
 9, 
 
 ."5 
 
 
 1 
 
 _a> 
 
 _^ 
 
 
 -d -g 
 
 O ^3 
 
 i o 
 
 U-| X 
 
 S S 
 
 J-> rt 
 
 . ^ 
 
 ex 
 
 ex 
 
 
 ^2 
 
 
 So 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 E aj 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 ~ D 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 j!^ 
 
 0) 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 S 
 
 **5 ^ 
 
 p t CD 
 
 
 D 
 
 G 
 
 
 " 
 
 u 
 
 a3 
 
 -d 
 
 
 *d o 1 
 
 C ctf 
 
 ^ O 
 
 jd 
 
 ^ fl) 
 
 5 
 
 U 
 
 
 H 
 
 |^ 
 
 d 
 
 
 *-H 
 
 Vi 
 
 0) 
 
 .-! 
 
 rG G 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 aj g 
 
 $! 
 
 ~ o 
 
 ^ "tf 
 
 '" 
 
 O 
 
 2 
 
 
 D 
 
 -a 
 
 G 
 03 
 
 09 
 
 
 ~r o 
 
 IT. ^ 
 
 ^ -M 
 
 > t-, 
 
 - rS 
 
 1 o 
 
 " ^H 
 
 ij 
 
 <U tfl 
 
 C 
 
 .S rt 
 
 JD 
 
 ?< 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 Ui 
 
 J: 
 O 
 
 
 ~ 1 
 
 *f^ 
 
 ""* C 
 
 ^ s 
 
 7 ^ 
 S 'd 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 
 43 
 
 bo 
 C 
 
 nj 
 
 3 
 
 
 ^ "tJ 
 
 r d "J 
 
 <D '" 
 
 c .3 
 
 rt oj 
 
 S 
 
 ri 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 B 
 
 S) 
 
 h 
 
 
 "ft^ 
 
 J ^ 
 
 S 'd* 
 
 1 2 
 
 r^S c3 
 
 "c 
 
 _ 
 
 
 o 
 
 g 
 
 c 
 
 <U 
 
 <u 
 
 1 
 
 
 .S cj 
 
 II 
 
 O &" 
 
 "H c 
 
 G x 
 
 " 6" 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 u 
 
 M 
 
 -4J 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 S as 
 S. 
 
 3 M 
 
 
 
 q 
 
 
 5 X 
 
 S -2 
 
 05 .2 
 
 ti .c 
 
 0) * 
 
 fe o 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 <u .S 
 
 be -a 
 
 -i-> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o3 '35 
 
 o -*- 
 
 
 
 
 ci u 
 
 2. Half-back be 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 ,8 
 
 i-i 
 
 c 
 % 
 o 
 
 EH 
 
 d 
 
 -' 
 ft 
 
 C 
 
 et 
 O 
 
 The instant the ball 
 receives the ball at abou 
 
 i s 
 
 O -T ^ 
 
 4) ^ *J 
 5 S ^ 
 
 0, ^ U 
 
 S -^ 
 4 o M 
 
 O -J 03 
 
 LT lifts his man bac 
 right the moment the bal 
 
 LE, RT, and RE also st 
 first man behind the oppo 
 
 LH from outside of LT bef 
 indicated in the diagram, 
 
 S 
 
 d 
 
 2 S 
 "3 
 
 tC 
 
 u w 
 
 G 55 
 
 o 
 a 
 
 _G 
 
 "j 
 ~ 
 
 his particular man. 
 
 * It will be a great advant 
 to have the other to use in wa
 
 O! 
 
 o: 
 
 ;0
 
 83 
 
 <u 
 
 a 
 
 G 
 03 
 
 IM 
 
 O 
 
 | 
 o 
 
 
 v: 
 rt 
 
 
 .S 
 
 
 y. 
 W 
 
 
 ^ 8 
 t-, "^ 
 
 >. 
 
 runner's 
 ver used. 
 
 *o 
 
 Q 
 
 o7 
 
 H 
 
 ** 
 
 ,_r 
 
 
 ;j 
 
 
 a; .. 
 
 d 
 
 m a> 
 
 c 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 1 
 
 "ii 
 fl 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 eve 
 
 A 
 O 
 
 S 
 
 y 
 
 *" ^ 
 a g 
 
 D O 
 ^3 T;) 
 
 [^ 
 
 OS 
 
 
 C/3 
 
 ^>* 
 
 A 
 
 
 "vT 
 
 
 aT rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 tf. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -e o 
 
 r 
 
 
 o 
 
 W 
 
 !S 
 
 G 
 
 0) 
 
 ex, 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 1 
 
 opening j 
 
 .G' 
 
 3 
 u 
 g 
 
 S 
 IE 
 
 "7. 
 
 s 
 
 
 G 
 
 o 
 3 
 
 r opponer 
 liagram, t 
 
 *> the line ; 
 
 f the game, 
 but is now i 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a; 
 
 0) 
 
 S, 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 d 
 
 j 
 
 'S *" 
 
 i 
 
 __.. 
 +* 3 
 
 TJ 
 
 C 
 
 D 
 
 G 
 01 
 
 id 
 
 "3 
 
 i 
 
 fl 
 
 rt 
 
 J 
 
 
 G 
 rt 
 
 I 
 
 l.s 
 
 1 
 
 0) 
 
 C < 
 
 a & 
 
 G -> 
 f 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 
 G 
 oS 
 
 0) 
 
 1 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 <i 
 
 Q 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 2 'S 
 
 4) 
 
 u S 
 
 D >> 
 
 rt 
 
 as 
 
 "*"* 
 
 aj 
 
 . 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 -S "oS 
 
 rt 
 
 *c ^ 
 
 <u 
 
 o 
 
 03 
 
 ^ 
 
 5S 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 U 
 
 -M .y 
 
 .8 
 
 a; O< 
 
 J3 V 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 4-> 
 
 OJ 
 
 .c 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 <u 
 
 o 
 
 fQ 
 
 y; 
 
 
 ea 
 
 IE 
 >. 
 
 ^ 
 
 deavors 
 
 11 
 
 aj 
 
 11 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 S 
 
 tage of t 
 make th 
 
 C 
 
 i-! 
 
 73 
 
 4s 
 
 "5 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 0) 
 
 01 O 
 
 OJ 
 
 TJ 
 
 d 
 
 cj 
 
 -5 
 
 f 
 
 
 Q 
 
 d 
 
 C Trt 
 
 5 
 
 V 0) 
 a "^ 
 
 
 rt 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S ^ 
 
 !> 
 
 
 
 P* 
 
 > 
 
 =. 
 
 
 - 
 
 oj 
 
 g< 4) 
 
 
 
 w o 
 
 "flj 
 
 H 
 
 g 
 
 rt 
 
 c 
 
 I-I 
 
 
 
 
 T; 
 
 o :S 
 
 G 
 
 4) fi 
 
 (J 
 
 rt 
 
 S 
 
 ffi 
 
 *^ 
 
 To send ui between i 
 
 g 
 
 >> ai 
 
 p t ^ 
 
 .S G 
 
 4) U< 
 IH 
 ft - 
 
 I 5 
 
 eiving the ball at x on 
 with his head down. 
 
 1 
 rt 
 rt 
 
 a 
 '3 
 
 1 
 
 is blocked. 
 
 LT makes a supreme e 
 
 ectly for the opposing er 
 
 -*-* 
 a2 
 ^ 
 
 O "^ 
 _ <u 
 
 T3 D 
 G J3 
 03 *- 
 
 
 
 LHf at the left end and i 
 
 * This play was made in t 
 lity to dodge was trusted to 
 t See NOTE, diagram 2. 
 
 
 
 .S 
 
 S S 
 
 
 .G 
 
 S 
 
 
 b 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 
 
 "S 
 
 rt 
 
 o!
 
 -a 
 
 c 
 <u 
 
 _=' 
 E 
 
 0) 
 
 ^ 
 
 Oi 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 _o 
 
 '7. 
 
 o 
 
 (A 
 
 d 
 
 5 
 S 
 
 a 
 ft 
 
 0) 
 
 
 on 
 
 0) 
 
 4-1 
 
 1 
 
 .a 
 
 0) 
 
 V. 
 
 1 
 
 Bj 
 
 1= 
 
 C 
 ft 
 /. 
 
 
 
 /. 
 
 le outside of the opposing 
 
 0) 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 IS 
 
 | 
 1 
 
 Q 
 
 si I 
 
 !|| 
 
 0) O -M 
 
 ^1 ft 
 
 * 2 
 
 w aj ^ 
 
 &H f^ <-5 
 
 d'- 3 ^ 
 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 cu 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 O 
 
 ft 
 
 IS 
 
 
 i 
 
 ft 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 cf 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 '(-" 
 
 : same 
 
 /. 
 
 "7. 
 O 
 
 
 (fl 
 
 c 
 
 J 
 
 a 
 
 j: 
 oJ 
 
 V. 
 
 /. 
 
 leavers 
 
 VM s_i 0) 
 
 w> 
 
 en O ^ 
 
 ^ 'C - 
 
 'O ^ '?- 
 
 .C 
 0) 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 If-back around 1 
 
 -' 
 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 ^: 
 > 
 
 ,-) 
 
 <4-l 
 O 
 
 .1 
 
 H, 
 
 M 
 O 
 X 
 0) 
 
 tention. 
 
 u start forward at u 
 
 d 
 o 
 
 I/I 
 
 E 
 "3 
 
 ,0 
 
 s 
 
 -d 
 
 pa 
 
 
 :_ 
 oJ 
 
 1J 
 i- 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 is opponent, and eni 
 
 8 fe o 
 
 a-2 ft 
 
 " x .a tr. 
 
 1^ I 
 
 e C ^ 
 S g 
 
 3 E ^ 
 
 l y 
 
 ,=, 3 
 ^ f 
 
 M-l .s- O 
 
 0) 
 
 _c 
 <u 
 
 s 
 
 J3 
 
 M 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 (4 
 
 S 
 
 bfl 
 
 ^5 
 
 C 
 
 "3 
 
 rj 
 
 to 
 
 d 
 
 35 
 y 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 CO 
 
 0) 
 
 
 rt 
 
 "J; 
 
 
 
 It 
 
 - 
 
 ** 
 
 _o 
 
 
 
 ss ^ ^ 
 
 >% 
 
 ,c 
 
 E 
 
 K 
 
 -r 
 c 
 
 ,n 
 
 '-!, 
 
 C 
 y 
 
 1 
 
 'IT. 
 
 
 IH 
 
 j *^ O 
 w '^ t *- 1 
 TJ 
 
 S|a 
 
 o 
 
 , 
 
 cl 
 
 & 
 C8 . 
 
 5 " 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 f 
 
 (5 
 
 |H 
 
 ^j 
 
 . *^ 0> 
 
 l-l r ^ 
 
 ., 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 *_ 
 tn" 
 O 
 
 r- 
 
 u 
 cd 
 
 K 
 
 -- 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 = 2 3 
 - bo ? 
 
 Cj rr 
 O 10 
 
 0) ft 
 
 O 
 
 f 2 
 1 Sf 
 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 -^ 
 
 to 
 
 0) 
 <M 
 
 without 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 makes 
 
 o 
 
 "s c 
 > w <u 
 
 i-" - J3 
 
 a 
 
 *"* 
 
 O C 
 
 s 
 
 '-3 
 
 P 
 
 z 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 ?* 
 
 to 
 
 d5 
 
 ~~Z 
 
 H 
 
 - m -4- 
 
 -t-> H 
 
 I>J 
 
 j^ 4) 
 
 
 ^H 
 
 JO 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 ft 
 
 ' 
 
 
 <D fl 
 
 ^ C^ 
 
 -t 
 
 en 73 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 JS o) E 
 
 bt 
 
 -T 
 
 * -i- 
 
 
 
 -^ ' 
 
 d) 
 
 
 
 _ J 
 
 'O 
 
 c ^ S 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 "ft 
 
 ,c 
 
 
 gj 
 
 ,3 
 
 a 
 u 
 
 S cS 
 O -*-* r ^ 
 
 d 
 w 
 
 .1 

 
 QQD 
 
 o, 
 
 0^0 
 
 0^0
 
 87 
 
 2 
 '53 
 
 '5> 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 <u 
 J3 
 
 C 
 O 
 
 '(Si *"2 
 
 *Xi Cg 
 5 
 
 <! 
 
 <e t) 
 
 -d c 
 
 t-< C3 
 
 5 * 
 
 <u <*> 
 
 CN ^* 
 
 rt 
 
 0) 
 
 C 
 >-> 
 
 j>, 
 
 IL- 
 
 -55 B 
 bog 
 
 .a 3 
 
 g 
 
 ^, en 
 3 ^ 
 -d o 
 5S ^ 
 
 1 
 *-i <u 
 
 O [-5 
 
 1* 
 
 rQ -s. 
 
 s| 
 
 through the line, breaking an 
 d the opposing line. 
 L the run or by a short pass, and 
 
 _bp 
 
 13 
 
 0) 
 
 .g 
 -d 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 p 
 
 k 
 
 ^ 
 
 u 
 
 s 
 ,g 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 1-a 
 
 s ~ 
 
 S -3 
 
 a 
 
 g rt 
 
 V. 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 -M 
 
 H) 
 
 (H 
 O 
 
 M-l 0) 
 
 1 
 S 
 
 >d 
 
 o 
 
 b 
 
 
 V-, 
 
 <u 
 
 J_l 
 
 ^^ 
 
 .a w 
 & o 
 
 c " 
 
 
 V *M M 
 
 3 
 
 k 
 
 1 
 
 1 2 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 a 
 u 
 
 c3 .ti 
 T3 O 
 
 2 
 
 T3 T5 
 
 w^ o 
 
 *~* 
 
 
 (D X 0) 
 
 tn " 11 
 <S J2 "^ 
 
 ia 
 
 1 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 a) o 
 
 o 
 
 
 a 
 
 H ^j 
 
 6 G 
 
 - >d 
 
 
 tn "rt ^ 
 
 5 
 
 
 "5 
 
 rt .| 
 
 
 
 
 _j 
 
 -*-* 
 
 'S id 
 
 5 & 
 
 
 (li p> t o 
 
 "S 
 
 ^_, 
 
 c*\ 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 "W 
 
 V? 
 
 > (U 
 
 X rt 
 
 
 t/1 r! 
 
 pC 
 
 d) 
 
 'C 
 
 K *^ 
 
 b/) 
 
 
 Half-back between guard an 
 
 o send LH between RG and c, the ends 
 yard and a half outside of the tackl( 
 
 yards directly behind the guards, RH 
 itands between three and four yards b 
 
 he instant the ball is snapped FB, LH, 
 en RG and c ; RG lifts his man back 
 
 M 
 
 G 
 
 'S 
 
 1 
 
 o> 
 
 4 
 
 0) 
 
 6 
 
 _0 
 
 B dashes straight into this space, pas 
 ig, and jumps into the first man in his 
 H receives the ball from QB'S hands as ] 
 
 es into the opening directly behind FB 
 :d at his stomach with 0A# hands.* 
 
 tj 
 
 D 
 
 6 
 gl 
 U 
 
 Is 
 
 rt ft 
 
 = In 
 
 T, simply forcing his opponent to pass 
 d the instant the ball is in play, to ar 
 
 xeeds in getting through the line. It 
 and make it his especial duty to take 
 
 jD 
 
 M 
 
 "8 
 <u 
 
 o 
 G 
 rf 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 rt 
 
 S 
 
 |H 
 
 O 
 
 ee NOTE, diagram 2. 
 ee NOTE, diagram i. 
 
 n 
 
 H rt 
 
 - u^ 
 
 II 
 
 -! V 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 0) 
 
 ft 
 
 o 
 
 IPS, 
 
 1 a 
 
 ft "3 
 
 CH G 
 'rt 
 
 rt 
 
 J s 
 
 -3 
 
 s-s 
 
 4) rt 
 
 & & 
 
 
 WC/J 
 
 * +-
 
 0-0
 
 8 9 
 
 <u 
 
 '<n 
 
 <u 
 
 '55 
 o 
 
 0. 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 a; 
 43 
 
 4J 
 
 C 
 
 o 
 
 JJ 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 rt 
 
 | 
 O* 
 
 0) 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 id I.K start forward at utmost speed 
 
 ED 
 
 C| 
 
 4 
 I 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 a> 
 
 z 
 
 a 
 
 << 
 
 - ~ 
 
 9) 
 
 i3 
 C 
 
 43 
 
 5 
 
 a! 
 f-, 
 
 OJ 
 
 CU 
 
 O 
 
 T3 
 O 
 
 cT 
 
 o 
 t 
 
 c 
 
 "ci 
 p 
 
 U3 
 
 S 
 
 rt 
 ^ 
 
 A 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 ii 
 
 
 'S 
 
 '3: 
 
 (D 
 
 g 
 
 cS 
 
 I 
 
 * 
 
 S 
 
 with RH ahead oi LH, to break the 
 g from behind. 
 
 
 (4 
 *O 
 
 1 . 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 a 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 be 
 n 
 
 a> 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 2 
 
 ^^ 
 
 "cS 
 
 42 
 
 0) 
 43 
 53 
 
 
 
 'o 
 
 
 D 
 O 
 i-. 
 
 IT) o 
 
 i o 
 
 C8 -M 
 vV t/1 
 
 opening 
 id pushin 
 
 
 :k between the guai 
 
 4> 
 (K 
 
 S 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 u 
 
 4) 
 
 ,5 
 
 rt 
 
 "3 
 
 & 
 
 a 
 
 _2 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 < M 
 "? 
 
 "5 "So 
 
 O 'J5 
 
 c w 
 
 LH follows immediately 
 i, the ball held as before. J 
 
 his position the moment 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 jd 
 
 eS 
 
 C 
 
 J 
 
 i' 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 -4J 
 
 f LT is the same as in diag 
 is own man and endeavor 
 
 may be sent through the 
 re, instead of following ai 
 
 ion of positions of diagram 5. 
 ion in diagram 5. 
 
 W 
 
 rt 
 J3 
 
 H) 
 
 Tl 
 tt) 
 
 2 S 
 
 S,a 
 
 w 
 O 
 
 
 
 ? i 
 
 'xi 't/: 
 
 s! 03 
 ^ 'O 
 
 ~ o 
 
 tn 
 0) 
 
 rt ; 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 aT 
 
 43 
 fr$ 
 
 a 3 
 
 <u 
 
 "tt 
 
 0) 
 
 w-2 
 
 .&.& 1 
 'C 'C 
 
 g 
 
 OJ 
 
 o -a 
 
 ffi 
 
 01 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 ^3 0) 
 |H 
 
 1 
 
 ">3 
 
 l 
 
 5 % 
 
 13 
 
 3| 
 
 C8 
 
 n 
 
 | 
 
 0) ** 
 
 43 W 
 
 H rt 
 
 11 
 
 4) 
 
 m j) 
 
 K i) 
 
 cfi cn 
 * -t- 
 
 O 
 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 VI 
 
 11 
 
 !i 
 
 
 09 
 
 
 .2 

 
 9 1 
 
 IS 
 "53 
 
 1 
 
 72 
 
 0) 'C 
 T C 
 
 ^ a 
 
 5* 
 
 IBS 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 o interfere 
 
 4-< 
 t/> 
 O 
 
 -l-> 
 
 3 
 4-1 
 
 c3 
 
 he outside 
 
 14 .S 
 
 8 a 
 <S i> 
 
 head of LH 
 
 4) 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 
 v 
 
 4-> 
 *W 
 
 O 
 
 -/. 
 fl 
 
 is. 
 
 <-) 
 
 <a 
 
 s 
 
 v* 
 
 ^ 
 
 v, 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 -l-> 
 
 (D TJ 
 
 c 13 
 15 <c 
 
 60 
 .S 
 
 <D 
 
 z 
 _y 
 
 *-l rfl 
 
 l|.a 
 
 a 
 g 
 
 *H 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 a 
 o 
 
 ^0 
 
 *S 
 
 c 
 
 4> 
 
 a 
 
 4J 
 
 Oj 
 
 t3 
 0) 
 
 ti 
 
 
 
 d forces hi 
 
 f. 
 K 
 
 9 
 
 <D 
 C 
 
 P, 
 
 
 0) 
 
 S-, 
 
 _*j 
 d 
 
 4) 
 
 ^n 
 
 ot 
 
 Pi 
 
 J 8'S 
 
 . > O -u 
 
 Hs 
 
 5 rC (H 
 
 S 
 
 G 
 3 
 t-, 
 
 "o 
 
 G 
 
 r^ 
 
 4) 
 
 O 
 
 ^- 
 
 jd 
 
 
 c 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 $ 
 
 d 
 
 M 
 
 cfl 
 
 
 
 -^ M 
 
 V 3 ^3 
 
 O 
 
 | 
 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 4) 
 
 .c 
 
 | 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 Cj 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 _2 
 
 2 
 
 IH a! -i-> 
 bO 
 
 G .S bC 
 
 "- 1 G C 
 
 >-. 
 0) 
 
 ^ 
 5 
 
 
 c 
 
 4> 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 | 
 
 'S 
 
 .S 
 
 
 
 "o 
 
 
 bO 'S -x 
 
 S o 1 - _S 
 
 3 
 
 E; 
 
 
 *0 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 x 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 
 o 
 
 ts 
 
 
 
 ^j w 4*3 
 o (D c rf 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 D 
 
 l-i 
 
 1 
 
 P3 
 
 O 1 
 
 TJ 
 
 d 
 
 ^j *5 O S 
 
 S 
 
 8 
 
 d 
 
 
 4J 
 
 3 
 
 u 
 ctf 
 
 4- 
 
 4> 
 
 M 
 M 
 
 _C 
 C 
 
 5 
 
 in 
 
 tn 
 
 Id 
 
 >i 
 
 _2 
 
 H 
 
 04 
 
 <M 
 
 1 
 
 .53 
 
 <u 
 
 S 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 5 
 
 P* ^ S a>" 
 
 sill 
 
 ^sg- 2 
 
 "o o > 
 
 
 
 interfere 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 T-* 
 
 PH 
 
 "^ 
 
 *-* u> 
 
 O rn 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 C 
 
 -- 
 
 H 
 
 T3 
 
 H 
 
 5 
 
 d 
 pj 
 
 05 
 
 o 
 
 * -^ PH S 
 4> $ .S 
 
 rt fli 
 
 rQ ^ 
 
 'S 
 
 
 <u 
 
 ^ 
 
 4-> 
 
 (U 
 J3 
 
 J! 
 
 u 
 
 rt 
 
 between RT 
 
 05 
 5 
 
 09 
 
 M 
 
 opening to th 
 
 1 
 aT 
 
 D 
 
 g 
 
 "3 
 a> 
 
 tn 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 d 
 
 et 
 j 
 
 iHl 
 
 flit 
 
 l3| 
 
 the opposing 
 re must be ta 
 
 *S 
 
 o 
 
 
 X 
 
 To send I.H 
 
 * 
 
 oS D 
 
 bo 2 
 
 tant the ball 
 
 0) 
 
 *J 
 
 - 
 2 
 
 a 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 
 bo 
 
 G 
 
 1 
 cS 
 
 P. . 
 
 % '' 
 
 LH. 
 
 LH receive 
 
 ^J 
 
 RH and FB to 
 QB should, 
 LE follows 
 LT, going 1 
 
 jj CJ 
 
 1 U 
 
 ^ H 
 
 3g 
 
 1"* 
 
 to diminish ' 
 
 -p 
 2 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 /. 
 
 _s 
 
 n 
 
 S 
 
 * 1 
 e8 . 
 
 14 
 -* 
 
 I 
 
 '*S 
 
 rt 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 -5
 
 o 
 
 o
 
 riB.ill|3i^iI 
 ffilPl^ilifil; 
 
 o<^''^ic-SP(D f -fe<D* J ir: ci c' 
 
 jn-^.^rtO^O^OHS^Cctflo 
 t, W l|.S^o o,.S^o 
 
 a^-wg J.9fl^SaI^^^ 
 
 'g^^ " a-g'o ^ S^ 5 "^"H 
 
 -4 >"> IS V. r ^ tO 
 
 SIJ.SPS g . 
 
 a^TSfi-SSa 
 
 o 
 
 s .s- 2 1a^ 
 
 
 &S 5 
 
 ^-S 
 
 O <S a) 
 
 J3 J?^
 
 0^0
 
 95 
 
 
 .s 
 
 IT. 
 
 0) 0) 
 
 -4-1 -M 
 (H O 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 JZ 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 IS 
 
 *) 1) 
 ll 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 "2 
 
 cd 
 
 <2 ^ 
 
 ? 
 
 ^ 
 
 " 
 
 r< 
 
 to *- 
 
 S 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 bO 
 
 o 
 
 C 
 
 1 
 
 "E 
 
 l-i 05 
 
 5 s < 
 
 i ^ 
 
 a 
 
 j 
 
 1 
 
 learest bac 
 
 tt) 
 
 D 
 
 iv: 
 5 
 ft 
 
 '1 
 
 U 
 
 CS 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 ight again 
 resistance, 
 
 *j 
 
 oj O 
 || 
 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 cS 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 cS 
 
 .G s 
 
 g 
 
 ~ 
 
 2 
 
 CD 
 
 S 
 
 !- 
 
 0) 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 OS G 
 
 i 
 
 ~; 
 
 
 .2 
 
 ., cS 
 
 O -rH 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 -l-l 
 
 i 
 
 .2 
 
 o 
 
 A 
 
 h 
 
 o> 
 
 ~ 
 
 S 
 
 0) w 
 
 *^ .<~! 
 
 -B g 
 
 
 bo 
 
 G 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 S ^~* 
 
 *^ 
 
 J: 
 
 
 Is 
 
 c '5 
 
 -3 s 
 
 rj 
 
 '55 
 
 
 0) 
 
 u 
 
 0) 
 
 6 
 
 *! 
 
 a 
 t> 
 
 _-r 
 
 "^ 
 
 c 
 c 
 
 d 
 
 a, 
 
 o ? 
 .fa * 
 
 be dj 
 
 .s -s 
 
 bO 
 C 
 
 a 
 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 cS ~ 
 
 > 
 
 'J2 
 
 09 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 0) 
 
 in 
 
 O +! 
 
 'S5 
 
 o 
 
 
 cu 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 cS 
 
 S ~" 
 
 - "G 
 
 H* 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 "o 
 Is 
 
 -^ 
 * 2 
 
 J3 
 
 ex, ^ 
 
 c 
 
 G 
 
 .g 
 s 
 
 
 J-l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 CO *3 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 u 
 
 c 
 
 ^ S 
 
 .-C 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 
 G TJ 
 
 
 U} 
 
 !>> 
 
 
 .0 
 
 "" 
 
 - o 
 
 k 
 
 <a 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 r U 
 
 M ^g 
 
 T) 
 
 (U 
 
 73 
 
 
 C 
 
 tween 
 
 SH S 
 
 K g 
 
 "* 03 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 0) 
 
 5 
 
 c 
 
 " 
 
 2: 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 S G 
 
 o5 
 
 ") 
 
 ^1 
 
 succe 
 
 o 
 
 -3 
 
 
 1 
 
 co 
 
 .0 
 
 oJ 
 
 || 
 
 
 
 c 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 c 
 
 d 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 
 S f> 
 
 5 <l) 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 
 r _ 
 
 .2 
 
 cS -u 
 
 ' 
 
 X 
 
 *>M 
 
 
 - c 
 
 ^ r 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 
 bO 
 
 ' 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 c8 
 
 ^" 
 
 1 
 
 "G ^ 
 
 O J^ 
 
 S G 
 
 M 
 |H 
 
 
 | 
 
 .c 
 
 be 
 
 J 
 
 5 
 
 
 {A 
 
 _=' 
 
 S 
 o> 
 & 
 
 bC 
 
 IS 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 !^ 3 
 
 2 ? 
 
 o rt 
 
 .S -M 
 
 ^ G 
 O CS 
 
 - 0) 
 
 a 
 
 li _Jj 
 
 2-S 
 
 CO 
 
 r3 ^ 
 
 CO O 
 
 .2 
 
 g 
 
 5 
 c 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 cS 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 -M 
 
 *"* J-2 
 
 rG 
 
 (11 2 
 
 be - 
 
 rt 
 
 S 
 -*. 
 
 0) , 
 
 "ij c 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 'G .,2 
 
 be c 
 
 ^ O 
 
 o> -2 
 
 ty 
 ^2 >, 
 
 xlS 
 
 cS bfl 
 
 S P 
 
 2 g 
 ^2 
 IP 
 
 *, 
 
 ^ 'C 
 
 J* 
 
 rj 
 
 if 
 
 
 J 
 
 u .a 
 
 ? 
 
 .S o 
 
 5 
 
 'I* 
 
 3 
 
 g s 
 
 "S 
 
 u 
 
 O 
 
 u 
 
 fa 
 
 c 
 
 . "i 
 
 ^r 4) 
 
 tn 
 
 'c -d 
 
 HH 
 
 5 
 
 'C w 
 
 o H 
 
 (LI 
 
 S 'd 
 
 ^ XI 
 
 _o 
 
 -5 
 
 
 IS 
 
 
 1 
 
 cS c 
 
 . *- 
 
 u: o 
 D >5 
 
 
 * 5j 
 
 n 
 
 '^; 
 
 
 
 
 'C 
 
 
 ' cS 
 
 t-( "^ 
 
 T3 
 
 <> 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 'S 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 (B 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 t^* 
 
 w" to 
 
 i-J 0> 
 
 p^ o 
 
 1^ 
 
 li 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 0) 4) 
 
 0) 1) 
 
 co co 
 
 
 r-j 
 
 0) 
 
 cu 
 
 >L 
 
 2 
 
 d. 
 ex 
 
 t3 S 
 
 OJ ^ 
 
 ; 
 
 bO 
 
 0> 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 si 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 S: 
 
 cS 
 
 .5 
 
 cS 
 
 -<-) 

 
 O'-O
 
 97 
 
 JU 
 
 (J 
 
 H 
 I 
 
 H 
 
 *. 
 
 1 
 
 "E, 
 
 -u 
 
 a 
 cu 
 
 - 
 
 *J 
 
 d 
 
 G 
 
 3 
 
 t 
 
 "c 
 
 8 
 
 :tra man behind th 
 
 ishes into the open- 
 
 _c 
 
 bt> 
 'S 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 d) O 
 
 
 prevents the oppos 
 
 
 the preceding dia- 
 
 
 03 
 
 M 
 S 
 
 4) 
 
 *^j 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 4) 
 
 d 
 
 x> jjj 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 _G 
 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 
 d 
 
 Q 
 
 -M 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 
 rt 
 
 S ^ 
 
 2 S 
 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 'S 
 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 *0 
 
 X 
 
 
 Efl 
 4) 
 
 y. 
 
 15 
 
 V. 
 
 1 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 p 
 
 ^1 
 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 
 ^3 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 
 cj 
 
 
 
 "w 
 
 ~ 
 
 T3 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 4> 
 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 c 
 
 OS 
 
 1 
 
 Is 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 V 
 
 *d 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 3 
 o 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 g 
 
 0" 
 O 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 23 
 
 c a) 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 +j 
 
 c 
 
 
 S 
 
 2 
 8 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 bo 
 
 a 
 
 | 
 
 .0 
 T3 >> 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 .9 
 
 
 1 
 
 g 
 
 y 
 | 
 
 4> 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 "2 ^ 
 S .2 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 lu 
 
 BJ 
 
 1 
 o 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 " 
 
 d 
 d 
 o 
 
 ,a -d 
 
 |1 
 
 AH ,-i 
 
 ii 
 s 
 
 4) 
 
 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 S 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 "~ 
 
 
 
 .r 
 
 J. 
 
 4) 
 
 .S 
 
 
 01 
 
 
 rt 
 
 jn 
 
 JM 
 
 T 
 
 Z~ 
 ^ 
 
 5 
 
 "2 
 
 << 
 
 ^ 
 
 f 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 'It 
 
 32 
 
 rikes th 
 
 d 
 3 
 
 
 
 Efl 
 
 n 
 tc 
 
 2 
 
 bo 
 
 a 
 g 
 
 iagram 5 
 m 9. 
 
 d 
 
 M 
 
 S 
 4) 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 p 
 
 
 jd 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 d 
 
 n 
 
 I 
 
 -f. 
 
 ^ 
 
 OJ 
 
 H 
 
 X 
 
 receives the 
 
 ectly behind 
 , QB, and RE 
 
 M 
 
 i) 
 
 
 IS 
 
 h 
 4> 
 
 5 
 
 ai 
 
 
 p 
 o 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 i 
 
 , without ho 
 
 description, d 
 NOTE, diagra 
 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 ;y. 
 
 JS 
 
 < ^J 
 
 a 
 
 *d ^ 
 
 "o 
 
 K 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 4) 
 
 5 "S" 
 
 v o 
 02 Cfl 
 
 
 
 
 
 *^* S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * - 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 t4 
 
 .^C ^J 
 
 
 bo 
 
 r- ~ 1 
 
 
 CVj 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 hJ 
 
 v! 3 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 . 
 
 So 

 
 0-2
 
 99 
 
 -o 
 
 c 
 
 OJ 
 
 o 
 
 C 
 rt 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 -*j 
 
 there is no change in the position taken 
 rd in the lines indicated the instant the 
 
 4) T3 
 
 41 
 
 5 1 
 C ^ 
 " a; 
 
 i 1 
 
 c 3 
 
 B ' <J 
 
 C 4) 
 
 <s 
 
 4>" S 
 
 3 
 3 
 
 4J J 
 
 -^ o 
 
 -M 
 
 S 
 
 B 
 
 3 
 
 "S 
 
 W 
 
 _c 
 
 4> 
 
 .a 
 f. 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 IS 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 4> 
 
 E 
 
 o 
 
 Q 
 
 "S 
 
 bo 
 
 
 peed, seek to protect and assist him. 
 
 g tackle 0f and in toward the center, 
 d in the arm away from approaching 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 
 -j 
 
 
 diagram 8 and NOTE. 
 
 jack between 
 
 s I 
 
 1 -2 
 
 2 1 
 
 J -c 
 
 s % 
 
 fe G 
 ^ 4) 
 <U 0) 
 
 e extra man behinc 
 he opposing RE wl 
 
 *c on a pass from OK 
 
 i;r and endeavors 1 
 
 
 (n 
 
 -!-> 
 
 S 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 13 
 
 to force the opposm 
 .d always be carrie 
 
 1 
 
 'rt 
 
 *j 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 09 
 
 i- 
 
 | 
 
 5 
 
 js 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 D 
 
 , . 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 *- 
 
 
 5 
 
 U, 
 
 M 
 M 
 
 I 1 
 
 JH X 
 
 g ^< 
 S a 
 
 ^ 
 
 2* 81 
 
 i & 
 
 o ^ 
 
 5 ? 
 
 J -S 
 
 5 e- 
 
 w v> 
 
 > force him c^// 
 ves the ball al 
 
 head well up. 
 in close behin 
 
 
 RE, running b 
 s as before.f 
 
 ts every powei 
 The ball sho- 
 
 "d 
 
 "c 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 X 
 
 tfl 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 iption of diagra 
 
 
 "^ ^ ^ & 1 
 
 a c ^5 a, 
 
 <U 4> *J rt 
 '" B 4) ^ 
 
 ^ J3 
 
 u 4> a 
 J'S -J 
 
 W3 
 
 I 
 
 s s 
 
 > a 
 
 2^ 
 
 f M 
 
 r^-t 4-> 
 
 *j ;- 
 
 g S 
 -co* 
 
 4) 
 
 rference 
 
 rrj >1 
 
 os "Ei 
 a H 
 
 C^ P^ 
 
 i-, 
 
 X M 
 4* H 
 
 p- O 
 
 J 5? 
 
 5 
 
 j 
 
 cr 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 See descr 
 
 
 ^""1 
 
 
 T3 
 
 fl_) 
 
 _o 
 
 
 
 1-^ 
 
 E 
 
 CD 
 
 * 
 
 
 ?T^ rt 
 
 3 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 lJ 
 
 ^J 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 O 
 
 4) 
 
 WJ 
 
 .S 
 
 
 
 ci 
 
 fl 
 
 o 

 
 101 
 
 G 
 
 D 
 
 4-> 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 :re is no change in the position of the men. 
 the same way as shown in the preceding 
 H endeavors to force the opposing end 
 peed and rounds the end outside of him. 
 es may arise which offer an advantage in 
 than that called for by the signal. While 
 nal, for the interferers are working with 
 ure long gains for his side by judiciously 
 
 outside of tackle as before. (See diagram 
 und the end is shown in diagram 63. 
 
 u, 
 
 rt 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 4- 
 
 a: 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 U 
 
 1 
 
 
 g 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 0) 
 
 dentica 
 
 x 
 
 ; J 
 
 "P 
 o 
 
 C 
 
 e 
 
 "2 
 d 
 
 ircumst 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 | 
 
 er may 
 
 
 o 
 c 
 
 i-B runs 
 
 1^ 
 
 . 
 
 4 
 
 x 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 b 
 
 ^ \ 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1, 
 
 d 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 45 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 0>, 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 pq 
 
 4) 
 
 p , 
 
 4J 
 
 ^3 
 
 c 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 1^1 
 
 
 
 fa 
 
 .^ 
 
 C 
 
 'f. 
 
 ^~| 
 
 o 
 
 r~ 
 
 2 
 
 N 
 
 1 
 
 .2 
 
 .3 
 
 _0 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 3 
 
 cT 
 
 X 
 4) 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 di 
 
 
 !S 
 
 d 
 
 ^l 
 
 
 "7. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 rt' 
 
 
 5 
 
 ^ 
 
 "S 
 
 
 p 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 4-> 
 
 oS 
 
 ^0 
 
 to 
 
 i-H 
 
 U 
 
 
 <-4 
 
 4) 
 
 6 
 
 S 
 
 X 
 
 -M 
 CJ 
 
 J 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 <* 
 .^ 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 >, 
 
 o] 
 
 4) 
 
 nd 
 'to 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 -x 
 
 1 
 
 X 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 $H 
 
 O 
 
 "o 
 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 "p. 
 
 X 
 0) 
 
 1 
 
 r-l 1U 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 1-1 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 d 
 
 ^ 
 
 < 
 
 
 to 
 
 4) 
 
 fl 
 
 
 IS 
 
 tf! 
 
 , g 
 
 c 
 
 rt 
 
 ** 
 
 ^v 
 
 
 O 
 
 e 
 
 s 
 
 i 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 O 
 
 _y 
 
 
 
 M 
 08 
 
 .2 
 
 4-> 
 
 b/ 
 
 .2 
 
 '3 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 '-5 
 
 1 
 
 
 X 
 
 03 
 
 rt 
 
 6 
 
 1. 
 
 
 -o
 
 0^0 
 
 0^0
 
 103 
 
 d 
 
 Ut 
 
 he preceding 
 
 0) 
 
 1 
 
 -d 
 
 LH follows 
 H is followed 
 
 LH 
 
 and between 
 
 - .S 
 
 d o 
 
 ^- H 
 
 d 
 G 
 
 03 
 
 J2 
 
 2 
 
 o> 
 B 
 
 5 
 
 -d 
 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 
 6 
 
 
 cd 
 
 ** 
 
 .0 
 
 i 
 
 u 
 
 *^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 "a. ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 _G 
 
 'i 
 
 
 3 
 M 
 
 G 
 
 'i 
 
 s-l 
 
 1 
 
 tn 
 
 15 
 o 
 
 & 
 ^ 
 
 bfi 
 
 eives 
 
 | 
 
 G U 
 
 rt w 
 W * 
 
 :n 
 3 
 
 0> 
 
 _G 
 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 'd 
 
 g 
 
 5 . 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 
 ^s 
 
 O 
 
 
 4-> 
 
 S 
 
 tn 
 
 o 
 
 +* %> 
 
 E 
 
 >, 
 
 s 
 
 <-! H 
 
 . 
 
 J3 
 
 
 'w 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 a. 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 nJ 
 
 "c 
 
 V 
 
 
 4; 
 
 c, the positions are the sa 
 
 ie three backs and the enc 
 
 ndicated. 
 //, while KG endeavors to i 
 
 pening abreast, and close 
 veight j ^ strikes the lii> 
 
 d 
 
 OS 
 
 d 
 
 <u 
 
 Cu 
 
 G 
 en 
 
 .2 
 
 Is 
 
 O 
 
 then turns in immediate! 
 
 iame manner as shown foi 
 is formed as the men stri 
 
 falls in immediately behil 
 follows directly in the rea 
 
 Vi 
 
 <o 
 
 m 
 
 G -t-> 
 
 O oS 
 CD "5 
 
 as far as possible, strike 1 
 
 
 X! 
 
 d 
 
 ^j3 
 
 "" *-$ 
 
 o ** 
 
 S 
 
 W 
 
 J. rl 
 
 33 K^ 
 
 t"~> 
 
 
 
 4J 
 
 C 
 V 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 O, 
 
 tn 
 
 0) D 
 
 .S 5 
 
 tn 
 
 * 
 
 . " G 
 
 S 
 
 jj 
 
 ** 
 
 -1 
 
 if 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 
 a> 
 ^ 
 
 4-> 
 
 <U 
 XI 
 
 d 
 
 ill is snai 
 
 .sl 
 
 11 
 
 g 
 II 
 
 il 
 
 . 
 
 3 CD 
 
 -. bo 
 
 PQ | 
 
 o -S 
 
 5 G 
 
 || 
 
 tn 
 
 bo 
 G 
 
 'E 
 
 agram 5. 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 
 
 w 
 3 
 
 n 
 
 0) 
 
 rj C3 
 
 o> -d 
 
 be G 
 
 ' * 
 
 2 
 
 II 
 
 ^ 
 
 "S _G 
 H 
 
 d 
 
 (D "3 
 
 0) 
 tn 
 d> 
 
 & 
 
 -d 
 s 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 
 
 4-1 
 
 c< g 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 G 
 
 
 x tJ 
 
 Q "*" - 
 
 
 (_, ^^ 
 
 rH en 
 
 * -^ 
 
 bo 
 
 & 
 
 _ 
 
 43 
 
 at 
 
 G tn 
 
 
 Co t/1 
 
 
 ol 
 
 G 'r3. 
 
 ^ ^H 
 
 *d 
 
 
 fO 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 .S 
 
 D 'G 
 
 ^ -d ^ 
 
 K e <" 
 
 ^"^ n* ^O 
 
 tl 
 
 5 
 
 g 
 
 U 4) 
 > 
 
 (I) 
 
 "5 w 
 
 0) 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 V 
 
 d 
 
 
 01 
 
 o 
 
 *. i 
 
 _ S 
 
 * ^> 
 
 S H 
 
 S 
 
 -d '^ 
 
 
 
 a s 
 
 0) 
 ,G 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 | fa | 
 
 
 O 
 
 9 
 
 ii 
 
 -s^ 1 
 
 S 8 
 
 W ^c 
 
 cfl 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 5 
 
 .Q 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ & 
 
 js j; 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 >2 

 
 i.
 
 10 5 
 
 it! 
 
 
 
 jS B ^5 
 
 J3 t -*- 1 xV. ' 
 "^ cc o .2- 1 
 
 
 
 -g S 
 
 ,2 
 
 bfl 
 .S 
 
 <u 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 4J 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 rt 
 
 ; position of the men. 
 
 forward for the point 
 ile RT forces his man b 
 
 opposing guard with 
 i interferes with the 
 through and runs dire 
 
 a 
 
 L- 
 
 (0 
 
 V 
 
 % 
 
 to interfere. 
 'tead down dives into 
 
 e opening between RG 
 ugh and getting LE be 
 
 & 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 >^ 
 
 c 
 
 cj 
 09 
 
 4-) 
 
 -H 
 
 rt 
 
 3 
 bo 
 
 x 
 
 .5 
 o 
 M 
 
 -Si 
 aS p 
 
 ^^ 
 C> 
 J > 
 
 o> 
 fi 
 -w 
 
 bo 
 _C 
 
 '^i 
 
 ^^ 
 
 T5 "3 
 ^ 
 8> 
 
 o 
 
 _2 
 
 2 
 
 15 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 j| 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 bO 
 
 0) 
 
 p bb 
 
 ^1 
 
 T3 S 
 
 V 
 
 4J 
 
 i 
 
 "S5 
 
 "S 
 
 ^3 
 
 m as 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 "5 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 
 o 
 
 '8 
 o 
 
 C 0* 
 c4 O 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 - 1 - 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ea 
 
 o 
 
 - 0) 
 
 'Jo 
 
 o 
 
 . o 
 
 *o" 
 
 .-, t 
 
 ^ 
 
 ffi 
 
 ^: 
 
 
 
 c* 
 
 0) rj 
 
 o 
 o. 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 k* ^ 
 
 l-s 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 O 
 
 
 > 
 
 8 
 
 3 ^ 
 O X 
 
 a 
 
 j\ 
 
 I- a 
 
 [f 
 
 ^ S 
 
 ^ 
 
 ,d 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 <G 
 
 -3 , 
 
 o 
 
 P 
 
 M C3 
 
 p( 
 
 05 35 
 
 a 
 
 CA 
 
 p 
 
 c 
 
 
 <U s-i 
 0} s^ 
 
 <L> 
 
 ci 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 a ^ 
 
 0) 
 
 0) fo 
 
 d 
 
 S 
 
 (H 
 
 r. 
 
 i 
 
 
 ,3 
 
 d 
 
 0> 
 
 u 
 
 5 
 
 0) O 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 t/3 
 
 
 ri 
 
 r! 
 
 C- 
 
 
 4-> 
 
 
 
 14- End between 
 
 ^ 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 ? 
 M 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 The instant the ball is snapped 
 :n RG and RT. RG lifts his man 
 
 ^O 
 
 4 
 
 p 
 o 
 
 ,g 
 
 "o 
 
 c 
 
 sj ^ 
 .^ 
 
 k -/ 
 
 cu g. 
 
 6 [I 
 
 ( 
 
 K| 
 
 ^ O 
 
 Cu r^ 
 
 is 
 
 51 
 
 ^ IS 
 
 JS M 
 
 o 
 3 g 
 
 0) S 
 ^ D 
 
 ^<-i .H 
 
 1 2 
 
 E 
 
 "x 
 0) 
 
 CD 
 
 5 
 S 
 
 5' 
 
 '7: 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ugh the center of the opening i 
 
 LE receives the ball at x on a 
 
 directly behind LH. 
 
 LT plays as shown in diagram 
 After making the pass the best 
 
 prevent the opposing guard or 
 trikes the line. 
 
 "S 0> 
 
 a - 
 
 aj K 
 
 B 
 
 4J W) 
 l 
 
 -S 
 
 tu t; 
 
 ^ CJ 
 CTj r* 
 -^ 
 M 13 
 & g 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 H 
 
 O ci! 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O tr. 
 
 - (D 
 
 p 
 O 
 
 B .g ?3 S
 
 s*
 
 107 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 C *- 
 
 c 
 
 G * h 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~4j 
 
 *^ 
 
 
 | 
 
 m S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 u 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 v}- 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 
 T3 
 
 |U J 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 "5 
 
 fc .2 
 
 d 
 
 
 tn 
 
 G 
 
 <U o 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 <5 .5 
 
 n 
 
 
 3 
 
 G" B, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 J8 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 BO 
 
 
 
 ci 
 
 o> 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 " Q^ 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 2 3 
 
 ^r 
 
 d 
 
 bO 
 
 5 "S 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 1/3 
 
 3, -M 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 G 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 4J 
 
 
 
 
 (G 
 
 <c In 
 
 H 
 
 4> 
 
 1. 
 
 <N * *H 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 t/3 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 P 
 
 P< 
 
 |JS 
 
 
 
 _> 
 
 4) 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 G w 
 
 ^ 
 
 ,_^ 
 
 0) 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 O 1 
 
 O 0> 
 
 <D -i 
 
 
 
 tj 
 
 5 s 1 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 -*-> 
 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 flj 
 
 4) 
 
 
 
 id 
 
 c """ 
 
 rG 0) 
 
 _2 
 
 
 "^ 0) 
 
 
 
 aj 
 
 
 
 
 <L> 
 
 o <u 
 
 
 u 
 
 C 
 
 ^*j . 
 
 
 
 */ 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 <L> 
 
 .c 
 
 " t: 
 
 p 
 
 - 
 
 G ^ 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 CU 
 
 <i> 
 
 m .fa 
 
 -G XI 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 $ tl 
 
 
 
 O 
 O. 
 
 
 
 
 
 4-1 
 
 8 
 
 c be 
 *3 3 
 
 O 4-^ 
 
 g G 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 Cj yi 
 
 
 
 0. 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 c 
 1 
 a; 
 
 TJ 
 C 
 
 in 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 D 
 
 I 
 
 'o 
 H 
 
 1 
 
 4j 
 a 
 
 O 
 
 teen. 
 RE plays as shown in diagram eight. 
 
 RH plays as LH in diagram eleven. 
 FB plays as shown in diagram seven. 
 
 QB plays as shown in diagram eight. 
 LH proceeds in the line indicated, at utm 
 ing side as he rounds the tackle and con 
 ; either the opposing LG or I.T breaks-thro 
 
 irevent LE from being stopped before he r 
 LT. leavinjr the line as shown in diagrai 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 
 5' 
 PI 
 
 4) 
 4> 
 
 RT plays as shown in diagram eight. 
 LE receives the ball at x from QB, and, p 
 field in the line indicated at utmost speed 
 NOTE. The end must be careful to run 
 
 opposing rushers as they break through. 
 
 * See NOTE, diagram seven. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 c/) t/5 
 
 \-L* 
 
 'Z* 
 
 
 0) 
 
 (U 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 8,8 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 

 
 o ; 
 
 0^0
 
 < -d c 
 
 cS oj H 
 
 t-l 4> 3 
 
 In ~ 
 
 S-a-g 
 
 II a 
 
 <o tn 
 
 a*1? 
 
 il! 
 
 -a 
 
 G 
 
 O 
 u 
 aJ 
 
 a 
 
 C 
 
 UJ 
 
 O OJ V= 
 
 5 g f 
 ^ ! 
 
 g 
 
 *-C r- d) 
 
 T3 
 
 uj .^ 
 
 o L " 
 'S &^ 
 
 .5 o -5 
 D u s- 
 
 T3 ^3 O 
 
 5 ** * 
 
 <-! tn -M 
 C <U ,3 
 tn J W) 
 
 '^2 2 
 
 - S 
 CX 
 
 -*- H "5 T3 
 
 .M a) tn .is 
 
 (/) 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 a 
 o 
 
 Z bCtn 
 ^5 y o 
 
 VM l-i "^ t-i 
 
 ooo^ 
 
 ^ ^ -S 
 
 bp-s 
 
 *! 
 
 ^3 '- 
 
 w -M 'C 
 
 5 ? 
 -M D _OJ 
 
 T3 * *-! 
 
 C3 "TO 
 
 % 
 J-* ^j -4 
 
 S c^ 
 
 1-1 S 8 
 
 S 2 * 
 S & ^ 
 
 d .3 
 S *3 *3 
 
 I a{ 
 
 a c 
 
 t^ 1 > s 
 
 o ^ 
 
 "S *o 
 
 i 
 
 * o 
 
 ^ t> rr* 
 
 %>2 g 
 
 B "5 a. 
 ^2^ 
 
 S ^3 ^ 
 
 '^'E J3 
 o o a< 
 
 C C T3 
 
 ^">,S 
 
 a! 13 ~H 
 ^1 
 
 s 
 
 ^s 
 
 t" T; 
 
 S^ 
 
 tn o 
 
 IS &* 
 . I*H fn 
 
 >2 ^3 
 '25 .5P- 
 "s " 
 
 
 
 r O IH 
 
 I I 
 'S 
 
 0) _ 
 
 5 -S 
 
 - c 
 
 3 "1 2 2 
 
 g^g S S 
 
 ^ -4- f-H fli 
 
 r 1 V uS O 
 
 -fi|3 
 
 ^ < 
 
 i^ 
 
 3 
 o 
 
 E =5 
 
 oi o
 
 :o 
 
 O
 
 III 
 
 opposite guard. 
 
 position. 
 
 
 
 
 o 1 
 
 a 
 
 4) 
 
 
 
 4-> 
 Ul 
 
 - 
 
 0) 
 
 ed 
 
 o 
 
 5 3 
 fco-d 
 
 '> ^ 
 '5 ? 
 o * 
 
 D r-l 
 
 II 
 J* 
 
 0) fl 
 
 ft - rt 
 
 & 1 M 
 
 Cj (U 
 
 S g> 
 
 in 
 
 7; 
 
 S 
 *3 
 ^ 
 c 
 fl 
 
 
 > 
 
 c: 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 | 
 
 H 
 4> 
 
 4) 
 
 it assistance, I.E may follow 
 ear and to push him through 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 "" 
 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 cd 
 
 
 
 >> 
 
 ^ 
 
 "O 
 
 c 
 
 rt 
 
 u 
 <u 
 
 i 
 
 to 
 
 4) 
 
 ,C 
 
 
 o4 
 
 15 
 
 ^2 
 
 t3 
 
 5 
 re 
 
 '5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 1 
 'C 
 
 _H 
 
 j= 
 
 a/ 
 * 
 
 !>> 
 
 necessat 
 
 X CD 
 
 11 
 
 4J 
 
 4) 
 
 
 O 
 
 r; 
 
 - -" 
 
 Q 
 
 V /J 
 
 ^- 
 
 r3 
 
 < 
 
 g 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 eserv 
 
 0) 
 
 tc 
 
 a> 
 
 s 
 
 tn 
 C 
 
 j 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 | 
 
 e8 
 
 -z 
 
 
 
 p. 
 
 l! 
 
 re 
 
 0) 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 M 
 
 O 
 
 . 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 tfl 
 
 . J 
 
 1 
 
 1/5 O 
 
 2 bo 
 
 4-J 
 
 C 
 U 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 (3 
 
 ed 
 
 u 
 
 'C 
 
 1 
 O 
 
 re 
 
 S 
 
 d 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 in 
 
 _d 
 
 to 
 
 
 O 
 
 c 
 m 
 
 >, 
 
 rt 
 ft 
 ^ 
 
 B 
 
 ;= 
 
 2-1 
 
 S- 
 
 s-i en 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 (U 
 
 .Q 
 
 4) 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 pj 
 
 a5 o 
 
 tn 
 
 3 
 
 n 
 
 s 
 
 ^j 
 
 "3 
 
 XI 
 
 4) 
 
 rt S 
 
 in ro 
 
 JTS 
 
 'G.'C 
 
 >,^2 
 
 9^ 
 y *j 
 
 ^ G 
 ^ 
 
 JU 
 
 o 
 
 ". 
 
 
 .S **- 
 
 "7. 
 
 ^3 
 +J 
 
 t) 
 
 c 
 
 T3 
 
 
 <D CL, 
 
 u 
 nt 
 
 H 
 
 
 . > 
 
 02 
 
 a 
 
 >, 
 
 "5 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 ! ' 
 
 apposing 1 
 aks away 
 
 j, turns ir 
 
 -C 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 Q 
 
 . 
 
 n 
 
 01 
 
 d 
 c 
 
 ^posing R - 
 
 able to b: 
 lind LT to 
 
 j 
 > tr. 
 
 Sr 
 
 bO 3 
 
 2 
 
 03 s _j 
 ^ .S 
 
 sir e 8^ 
 
 o <u s w ^ iJ 
 
 J-< rC "I fV *"* 
 
 Sat! .3 P - 13 
 
 a) re - *5 .s a: 
 
 ^o o ^ 4_j *^ Ca
 
 S-.O 
 
 / i 
 
 00 O '"O 
 
 - V -' OC V ^
 
 
 
 
 >> V 
 
 C 
 
 c t 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 ID O 
 
 .C J3 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 rt 
 
 s-g 
 
 ^3 cS 
 
 2 
 t-i 
 0) 
 
 1! 
 
 
 
 c S 
 , 
 
 -i-> -r. 
 
 
 *-> 
 
 g 
 2 > 
 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 u 
 
 
 
 B > 
 
 .5 _c 
 
 -4-J *""' 
 
 3 <U 
 
 "rt 
 
 1 
 
 M-l 
 
 J V 
 
 o5 
 
 
 
 a P 
 S> a 
 
 0) T3 
 
 w G 
 
 
 8-1 
 
 * 
 
 0) "* 
 
 JJ 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 J= 
 
 O 
 
 -, m 
 
 T! 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 3 S 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 _i + J 
 
 d 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 -4-J 
 
 
 ^ ? 
 
 
 *O 
 
 c 
 rt 
 
 | 
 
 
 r3 K~J 
 
 *^ 
 
 "-- 
 
 fa ? 
 
 <D 
 U 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 5 3 
 
 ^2 
 
 T3 0) 
 
 
 
 bC "5 
 
 .2 'S 
 -d 
 
 8 
 
 E 
 
 "3 i* 
 
 1 
 S a 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 0) 
 
 ^-* *^ 
 
 
 
 C o 
 
 rt 
 
 A 
 
 
 a 
 
 '7 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 (-1 
 
 C >-> 
 
 
 
 <fH l-c 
 
 ifi 
 
 t.,6 
 
 
 u 
 
 8 
 
 
 -w' "** 
 
 U5 
 
 ol 73 
 
 
 
 C '5 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 rt 
 
 P. 
 _g 
 
 
 2-S 
 
 S 
 
 D 
 ^3 
 
 S "> 
 
 cS -J3 
 
 
 
 te 
 
 
 
 f .;2 
 
 w 
 
 ju 
 
 * 
 
 .2 2 
 
 C r, 
 
 
 W 
 
 O 
 
 ^~ 
 
 *^~^ .^ 
 
 (_4 
 
 b/) i 
 
 
 
 C/J pH 
 
 G" 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 
 <U 
 
 cX 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^" "^ 
 
 cS 
 
 ^ 'cS 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 rt 
 
 C m 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 - 
 
 T^ 
 
 o v 
 
 T3 
 
 'S rO 
 
 
 
 rt c 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 te 
 
 i8. Tackle between the opposi 
 
 To send LT between RG and RT, there is no chj 
 
 3 
 
 <3 
 5 
 | 
 
 c 
 
 "v: 
 
 SI 
 
 r2 
 E 
 
 
 w 
 
 RH is nearer the opening and should pass thr 
 hind him, but both must take great care that th 
 
 t stopped so that they choke up the opening, an 
 ance than help to the runner. 
 LT leaves the line as shown in the preceding 
 j between RH and FB, with head down and the 
 
 m, or clasped at the stomach with both hands.. 
 
 RG and RT play as shown in diagram six. 
 
 QB and LE following LT immediately, and pust 
 LH also follows f directly behind LT to throw 
 
 M 
 
 o 
 
 CJ 
 
 4) 
 
 0> 
 
 rt' 
 
 o 
 
 ja 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 1 
 
 t/3 
 
 tn 
 
 rt 
 
 f 
 
 * When RT runs he will carry the ball in the left arm. 
 e farther from the opponents where it will be less lia' 
 
 a toward the opposing tacklers free for use in warding c 
 t See NOTE, diagram seventeen. 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 J3 
 
 c -S 
 
 Mf 
 
 _g 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 S
 
 o
 
 opposite tackle and end. 
 
 ,H 
 
 o 5 
 
 J 
 S 5 
 
 c4 ^ 
 
 13 
 
 3 3 
 
 .S 6 
 
 c .52 
 o 
 
 !ji 
 
 CS ,0 
 
 c8 ^ 
 ^ n 
 = ^ 
 
 ta "o3 
 * u 
 
 H3 <D 
 5 
 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 
 fl 
 S 
 
 'ar as possible to the left. 
 :>r takes the opposing LT in case he succeeds 
 
 am seventeen and carrying the ball in his 
 fteen. 
 opposing tackle, if necessary, or follows LT 
 
 revent him from being tackled from behind 
 
 'C 
 
 3 
 
 (U 
 
 -x 
 
 c 
 
 ; flank of the line, the rushers on that side 
 ake the play successful. When the play is 
 in turn block with their utmost power. 
 
 
 
 _ 0> 
 
 <^* 
 
 *T* 
 
 
 K 
 
 C <u 
 
 M4 
 
 n 
 
 5 P 
 
 ^; 
 
 
 Tackle between th 
 
 
 
 I ; 
 
 * S 
 
 U 0) 
 
 *i 
 
 c .S 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 c *j 
 
 U I " 
 
 D *O 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 TJ 
 
 3 
 
 rt 
 
 C 
 0) 
 
 . 6 
 
 It 
 
 T3 
 
 .2! 
 
 tiis man and forces him as 
 
 ; shown in diagram eight 
 ough the line. 
 
 f 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 
 O 
 
 iys as does LE in diagram 
 nto the line and blocks th 
 
 own in diagram seven, 
 close in the rear f of LT to 
 
 m by interference as he r< 
 
 all plays around the rig 
 their energy in order to 1 
 
 rushers upon that side wi 
 
 iagram eighteen, 
 iagram seventeen. 
 
 <> 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 'C 1" 
 
 
 
 U3 "> 
 
 :ra man 
 and RG 
 
 M 
 
 U 
 
 C 
 
 2 
 
 en *- 
 
 r. 
 
 p 
 
 rt 
 
 TO -T-l 
 
 "Pn 
 
 D< 
 
 E 6 
 
 S.E, 
 
 a | 
 
 S J2 
 
 ^<s 
 
 IS 
 
 4J 
 
 ' 
 '7. 
 
 rt 
 
 C 0) 
 
 ~! 
 
 d| 
 
 4> 
 
 A 
 M 
 
 <t 
 
 ri 
 
 o -a 
 
 faT w" 
 
 H H 
 
 fc ^ 
 
 
 ,0 
 
 S S 
 
 u) I 1 
 
 5 
 
 3- c3 
 
 ,5 
 
 * w 
 
 ^S K 
 
 _o 
 
 S 
 
 0) 
 
 (U v 
 
 
 
 tfl 
 
 . 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^Q 
 
 TJ 
 
 r^ 
 
 5 
 
 +3 
 
 * -t- 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 'C 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 
 2 
 
 

 
 117 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 0) 
 
 g 
 
 rt 
 
 '7. 
 
 B, 
 
 0) 
 
 
 E 
 o 
 
 c/. 
 
 a 
 
 '7. 
 
 c 
 
 I 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 a5 
 
 ^ 
 d 
 
 ~ 
 
 g almost directly behind 
 end-rusher if necessary, 
 down the field. 
 
 
 
 iking the direction indi- 
 
 js LE in diagram sixteen. 
 
 
 in and take LT'S man, as 
 he rounds the end. 
 
 OJ 
 
 M 
 "55 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 p 
 
 
 .1 
 
 . 
 
 C be C 
 
 HE 
 
 -o ' 
 
 
 
 4-S 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 3 
 
 j: 
 
 M 
 C3 
 
 Cfl 
 
 
 " en 
 0, d 
 
 e s 
 , 
 
 a 
 
 ex 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 JG 
 -M 
 
 is no chang 
 
 
 
 
 
 "5 
 
 5 
 s^ 
 
 d 
 5 
 d 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 .2 
 
 (-1 
 O 
 
 ^ /c 
 
 Hi 
 
 ^-^ ^ 
 --3 -_> u 
 
 goo 
 
 rQ -T S-l 
 
 
 
 seventeen, 
 
 ,2 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 CD 
 
 -2 
 
 n 
 
 2 U5 
 
 a'i 
 
 o "H 
 
 >, 5 
 
 a 
 
 G 
 
 O 
 
 u 
 as 
 
 JJ 
 
 H 
 d 
 
 CM 
 
 around the right end, there : 
 
 2 
 n 
 
 -d 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 ed 
 
 p 
 
 X 
 
 
 rt 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 8 
 
 0) 
 
 eft exposed, bowls him over, 
 
 rts with the snapping of the 
 tly outside of him, helping t 
 3 on ahead of LT to interfere 
 
 i 
 
 0) 
 
 5 
 
 g 
 g 
 
 c 
 
 to 
 
 3 shown in diagram nineteen 
 
 5 
 
 E>. 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 _g 
 
 d 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 to 
 
 c^ 
 
 o 
 
 .E 
 
 C9 
 
 ^ 
 
 the right end at utmost spec 
 
 play as shown in diagram ni 
 RG block their men. 
 
 may be necessary in this pla 
 ne ; otherwise he may follow 
 
 
 H 
 
 " 
 
 ^-* 
 
 ' 
 
 C3 rC CD 
 
 CO 
 
 w 
 
 
 05 
 
 w *& 
 
 ^-j 
 
 
 > 
 
 to 
 
 ^ 
 
 en 
 
 ^ 
 
 +* M 35 
 
 i .2r t/i 
 
 to 
 
 M 
 
 tu 
 
 _o 
 
 -< c 
 
 * ' o) 
 
 
 "C 
 
 E 
 
 tt 
 
 cp 
 
 
 
 O In ^ 
 
 > 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 (H 
 
 -d rt 
 
 1 
 
 
 S 
 
 :: 
 
 J^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 J5 w ft 
 
 2 
 
 
 K 
 
 '3 
 
 ^ c_T 
 
 K 
 
 
 j-_ 
 
 
 CO 
 
 {A 
 
 o3 CD C 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^( 
 
 , i 
 
 p 
 
 cu 
 
 H 4) 
 
 
 O 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 c/; CD 
 
 ^ X 
 
 H 
 
 m 
 
 H 
 
 V 
 
 a o 
 
 > 
 
 
 e 
 
 P4 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 ^ S ? 
 
 ^ 
 
 O) 
 
 J 
 
 | 
 
 "ri 
 
 J J 
 
 z ^ 
 3 
 
 CD
 
 ;o 
 
 .o
 
 119 
 
 u 
 
 M 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 aJ 
 
 a 
 
 - 
 
 rt 
 3 
 bO 
 
 '55 
 o 
 
 he instant the ball is snapped LG jumps 
 from the opposing guard. He whirls di- 
 e ball from his hands as he passes, plunges 
 ; ball held as shown in diagram one. 
 
 iS 
 o 
 
 .S 
 
 be 
 
 'S 
 
 d> 
 
 'S 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 * 
 
 i 
 
 4) 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 . 
 
 'i 
 
 to 
 
 1 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 d 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 (0 
 
 X 
 as 
 
 'rt 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 "o 
 ,5 
 
 tt 
 
 u 
 
 "S 
 
 y. 
 
 tpped, dash into the opening ahead of LG, 
 
 
 
 0. 
 
 ** 
 
 ^, 
 
 C ,-i 
 
 d) *^fj 
 
 c 
 
 C5 
 
 
 J 
 
 'r* 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 OJ 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 o 
 
 rt' 
 rt 
 
 bfl 
 
 c 
 
 I 
 
 , receiving 
 . RG, with t 
 
 diagram fi 
 start instai 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 J2 
 
 o 
 p 
 
 ^ 
 
 H] 
 
 -d 
 
 . 
 
 'o 
 
 ^ 
 >, 
 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 i/. 
 
 7. 
 2 
 
 "rt 
 rfJ 
 
 o 
 
 a5 
 
 
 -u 
 X5 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 rt 
 
 3 
 
 .G between 
 
 
 
 .0 
 
 o" 
 
 ^E 
 
 0) 
 
 A 
 
 a pivot and, 
 tween c and 
 
 1- 
 
 ^ 
 ^5 TJ 
 1/2 1 
 e 
 
 ~ 
 
 d 
 a 
 3 
 
 u 
 
 p c 
 
 immediatel 
 
 k their men. 
 
 "c 
 
 line before t 
 
 ; in diagram 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 | 
 
 e ^ 
 
 >, s 
 
 4> 
 
 g 
 
 u 
 
 c 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 fe 
 
 bp 
 
 
 jE 
 
 SH 
 
 = be 
 z' a 
 
 "a* K" 
 
 to 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 ^ 
 
 C 
 
 
 tn 
 0> 
 O 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 M 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 r*5 b 
 
 ^ 
 
 ,^ 
 
 
 > I 
 
 
 
 T) 
 
 rjr 
 
 N 
 
 i 
 
 "-Z 
 rt 
 ,3 
 
 c w 
 
 3 DH 
 
 i s " 
 
 'C 
 O 
 
 Q 
 
 "rt 
 
 d 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 'rt 
 
 '-> 
 z 
 
 tn 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 55 
 
 
 o 
 
 J= 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 cS dj 
 
 
 a 
 
 ( 
 
 
 
 '^_ 
 
 rt 
 
 $ 
 
 
 ; 
 
 M 
 
 ^5 
 
 CJ &, 
 
 t/J 
 
 d 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
 *j 
 
 cu 
 
 09 
 
 
 
 'I 
 
 *3 o 
 
 o i! 
 
 
 CO 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 .S D 'C 
 
 jf 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 t-i -S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'in 
 
 oj 

 
 po . 
 
 o'
 
 o c oc ./ ~ 
 
 t/1 C C 
 
 o .a 
 
 "*"* tn *r^ CH !5 
 
 a 
 
 "*""* **^ ' C) OJ 
 
 OH 1> bfl 
 
 8 ^ g<|j -^ 
 
 a .s 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ! js I 
 
 5 d g .2 
 
 i PL, <U : s-. C 
 
 2 ^ S 
 
 $ .22 * | | 
 
 .S -Si .9 .s 
 
 + "2 > -S ^ * 
 
 (5 '5 o 
 
 TI : SP^ -^ 
 
 \S (, rj C *J -*-* 
 
 rt 5 -S > 
 
 22. Guard between the opposite guard an 
 
 To send the LG around between RG and RT, LG breaks away fr 
 ;tant the ball is snapped, as shown in diagram twenty-one, re 
 as before, and dashes into the opening with head down. 
 RG and RT play as shown in diagram six. 
 RH starts forward the instant the ball is snapped and, dashi 
 tween RC; and RT, strikes the opposing LG with his shoulder wi 
 >le force as he passes through, and then proceeds on and takes 
 
 e line. 
 FB crosses behind RH and rushing into the same opening plui 
 5 tackle or the man immediately behind him. 
 RK plays as shown in diagram fourteen. 
 QB, LH, and LE follow behind LG and play as shown in diagra: 
 LT plays as in the preceding diagram. 
 NOTE. Rn and FB must see to it that they break through 1 
 ere blocked so that they fill up the opening through which LG, \ 
 ediately behind, is to pass.
 
 o; 
 
 :0
 
 123 
 
 oj 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 . c 
 
 g G 
 
 C > 
 
 <u o 
 
 o *S 
 
 G * 
 rt c 
 
 0) 
 
 0) .S 
 
 3 U 
 
 U X! 
 
 rt ~ 
 
 ! 
 0) 
 
 <u > 
 
 .t! S 
 
 w ' 
 o c 
 a ~ 
 o. - 
 
 3 
 
 B, plays as does LE in diagram fifteen, 
 sid at utmost speed the instant the ball is put 
 ig LE, forces him out or bowls him over, 
 ated, and passing outside of RT interfere by 
 
 5 
 
 V 
 
 a> 
 
 ts 
 
 c 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 i* 
 
 11 
 
 a-* 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 o *^ 
 
 *N 
 
 l| 
 
 >! 
 
 [ ^ 
 
 S 
 <u o .2 
 
 5 S to 
 
 tC ^S j-. 
 
 N-H - Q 
 
 S 
 1 
 
 S 
 2 
 
 c 
 
 a. 
 3 
 
 'rt 
 ca 
 
 ,2 
 
 0) 
 
 6 
 
 a> 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 y 
 
 y 
 
 O 
 
 G 
 
 o 
 
 
 *j *- 
 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 4J 
 
 (3 
 <u 
 
 0) 
 
 -^ 
 
 '7: 
 
 
 1 
 
 4J 
 
 T/; 
 
 11 
 
 cx 5 
 a, 
 
 O (/! 
 
 ^^ <U 
 D .-i 
 
 
 * 
 
 s 
 
 & 
 
 -3 
 
 as 
 
 (A <U 
 
 c -d 
 2 o 
 
 
 IH 
 O 
 IH 
 c4 
 
 1 
 
 <u 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 fO 
 
 6 
 
 6 - 
 
 (-1 O 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 . 
 
 13 "* 
 
 
 Ol 
 
 o 
 &, 
 
 
 M 
 
 4) 
 
 5 
 
 .! 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 | 
 
 <u 
 
 <D _g 
 
 
 D d 
 ^ G 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 
 C 
 
 
 ft 
 
 3 
 
 (9 
 
 i receiving 
 
 s 
 
 i. 
 
 r^ 
 
 s -S 
 
 o 
 
 2.S 
 
 opponents 
 
 c 
 
 Ifl 
 to 
 
 03 
 >> 
 
 d 
 p, 
 
 * J3 
 
 s^s 
 
 rt -0 
 ^S 
 
 
 a '-^ 
 H o> 
 
 ^^ 
 
 I! 
 
 .^ G 
 
 1 
 
 , diagram se\ 
 
 CO 
 
 H) 
 
 -^ 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 IH ~ 
 
 (5 *g 
 
 4-> 
 
 ;/. 
 
 tS 
 
 4) 
 
 ^r 
 
 H 
 ttt 
 
 -2 
 
 5 
 
 be 
 
 .s s 
 
 |2 
 
 ence. 
 
 follows 
 vertake 
 
 o 
 -d 
 
 ee NOTE 
 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 >, 
 
 ,2 ^ 
 
 U 
 
 5 
 
 X V> 
 
 a l 
 
 IH 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 W O E- 1 
 
 >J bOi-9 
 
 OT 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 P< 
 
 'fl 
 
 
 t3 
 
 
 .S 
 
 
 
 
 
 j; 
 
 
 .G 
 
 "5 
 
 
 V 
 
 w 
 
 5 
 
 0) 
 

 
 125
 
 i
 
 127
 
 129 
 
 o 
 
 c: 
 
 V 
 
 4-1 
 
 G 
 '* 
 
 11 
 
 s s 
 
 a ^3 
 " 8 
 
 .s 
 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 ving the ball 
 ost speed. 
 
 1* 
 
 -S e 
 
 tn .S 
 
 - A 
 
 P 
 
 G a) 
 
 O C 
 
 
 nj 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 8 
 
 tn 
 IS 
 
 O 
 
 M-l 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 k 
 
 "S 
 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 o 
 
 <D 
 
 
 C 
 
 jj-a 
 
 * *6 
 
 OJ 
 
 c 
 
 'S 6 
 83 
 
 C 0) 
 
 . 
 
 .2 M 
 
 
 0) 
 
 G 
 
 05 
 
 
 
 '5 
 ^ 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 O V 
 
 OH 
 
 -" ^ 
 
 IS "e 
 
 
 w 
 
 G 
 .(-t 
 
 
 0) 
 
 * 
 
 
 o 
 
 *-* OH 
 
 
 
 G ** 
 
 *3 .a 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 c 
 
 H 
 j 
 
 
 u 
 rt 
 
 i-3 p 
 
 3 
 
 o-g 
 
 '-W G 
 
 
 G 
 
 a 
 
 n 
 
 <u 
 
 cS 
 g 
 
 7J 
 
 bO 
 
 
 
 
 'tn 
 
 0) 
 
 G cfl 
 
 
 s 
 
 _E 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 _G 
 
 
 rt 
 
 2-" 
 
 1 
 
 G 
 
 3 2 
 
 3 - S 
 
 
 tn 
 
 3 
 
 g 
 
 M 
 
 _g 
 
 1 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ^ 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 
 ^ 0) 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 rH 
 
 0^ 
 
 
 
 "** > C3 
 
 t/5 
 
 g .e 
 
 nj 'O 
 
 ~^ 
 
 V-* 
 
 ^ 
 
 g 
 
 5 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 C 
 
 * 
 
 Cj *Q 
 
 P-t 6} 
 
 3 
 
 
 ^ 8 
 
 k"' 
 
 . ^0 
 
 2 
 
 fl 
 
 S 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 AJ 
 
 Q 'H 
 
 o J 
 
 V 
 
 S 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 . G 
 
 ^_) 
 
 ^Jj 
 
 
 Jsd 
 u 
 rt 
 X> 
 
 13 
 
 J3 
 
 OH Oj 
 c3 ftf 
 
 carrying it a 
 
 ^ 8 
 
 **"* tn 
 G " 
 
 a I 
 
 . rr-t 
 
 g 0. 
 
 ^3 
 
 |_ 
 K 0) 
 
 e'S 
 S 
 . c 
 
 sa" "^ 
 
 e greatest en 
 
 ;he opposing i 
 helping LH 
 
 a 
 g 
 
 'O tG 
 G^ 
 
 " 
 
 tn twenty-five 
 to protect hii 
 
 ;y. 
 
 "rt 
 -P 
 
 1 
 
 
 iss-crosses with 
 
 ii 
 
 ii 
 
 1 
 X* 
 "rt 
 
 "3 . 
 
 0) 5 
 
 " 4J H 
 
 bO ^S 
 
 2 .S 
 
 ill in his position until 
 opposite direction anc 
 
 ves the ball, FB, LH, Q 
 , dart for the left end, 
 
 .ock their men with th 
 
 rectly for and blocks 1 
 e direction indicated, 
 down the field. 
 
 - ! C 
 
 d <i> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^i 
 
 S & 
 
 -M C] 
 
 fl ? 
 
 "- 1 C 
 
 I'i 
 
 -s ?? 
 
 tn i> 
 
 s as does LT in diagra: 
 nmediately behind RH 
 
 3 
 w 
 
 0) 
 
 d 
 
 p 
 
 PH 
 
 ?J' 
 g 
 
 tn 
 
 OJ 
 
 y 
 
 .a 
 
 _G 
 
 G 
 .2 
 
 g;ram twenty-five. 
 
 u, 
 u 
 
 C 
 
 U] 
 
 send the 
 from his 
 
 'S rf 
 
 r-* O 
 
 in <l> 
 
 tn 5 
 | G 
 
 In o 
 
 RH recei 
 positions 
 
 .0 
 
 o 
 K) 
 
 -^ 
 5 
 
 makes di 
 takes th 
 oceeds on 
 
 a| 
 
 J3 ^ 
 
 t^.S 
 tn 
 
 PH & 
 
 o 
 
 vi 3 
 
 "73 O 
 
 Cy <4-i 
 
 S 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 \" 
 
 D O 
 
 0) tj> 
 
 5 Jo 
 
 rt 
 '^ 
 
 tiT 
 f-i 
 O 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 H -a 
 
 M ** 
 
 0) v. 
 
 3j 
 
 tn . 
 <J| 
 
 5 
 
 s M k 
 
 i rv. ^ 
 M G 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 H (4 
 tf 
 
 O 
 
 G cS 
 
 9 
 
 a 
 O2 
 
 * 
 
 N 
 
 1 
 
 T?^ 
 
 5 
 
 G 
 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 Cj On 

 
 o
 
 J3 1 
 
 *o ja 
 
 G -^ 
 
 QJ Q} 
 
 D . 
 
 5 u 
 
 o "*"* 
 
 r3 
 
 C o> 
 
 O g 
 
 IH i i 
 
 rt u 
 
 I H fl 
 
 "5. * 'Z 
 
 c u 
 
 all 
 de 
 
 m 
 
 a 
 
 >> 
 
 .Q '3 
 
 
 00 
 
 42 
 
 u ^ 
 
 a" 
 
 5 
 
 "S. 
 
 fH 
 
 21 
 
 ^ 
 
 _g 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 c8 ^) 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 .a 
 
 -M 
 
 T3 
 
 
 5 
 
 ~ a 
 
 0) O 
 
 tU 
 
 0) 
 
 3 
 
 tn 
 
 f 
 
 ^ 
 ^2 
 0) 
 5 
 
 642 
 
 e S 
 
 -2- a 
 
 S-a 
 
 H 
 M 
 
 S 
 
 tfl 
 
 D 
 
 la 
 
 
 > 
 
 '53 
 
 s a 
 
 ^Q 
 
 /~i 
 
 y 
 
 o> 
 
 * -M
 
 TJ 
 C 
 
 V 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 ives the line as the 
 
 K 
 M 
 
 <M 
 O 
 
 v 
 S 
 Q 
 
 ^ 
 ,G 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 ^! 
 
 O 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 T3 
 
 C 
 
 0> 
 
 
 
 
 
 4) 
 .g 
 
 
 :es him in. 
 
 0) 
 
 0) 
 
 .8 
 
 c3 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 bd 
 
 .5 
 '7. 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 v Ctf 
 
 a H 
 
 *3. 
 
 o 
 
 | 
 
 p 
 
 rH 
 
 
 &i 
 1 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 O 
 M 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 c' 
 3 
 
 VH 
 5 
 
 O 
 
 B 
 
 twenty- 
 e inside 
 
 JA 
 U 
 
 oj 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 et 
 
 W 
 
 5 
 oT 
 
 
 
 -./: 
 o 
 
 i 
 +j 
 
 ^ 
 
 " 
 fa 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 bowls hi 
 
 diagram 
 takes th 
 
 "(3 
 
 c 
 
 -M 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 13 
 
 0> 
 
 ^ 
 
 .a 8 
 
 X! 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 o 
 
 .s 
 
 ot 
 
 * i 
 
 jj 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 
 (A 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 4-J 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 4) 
 
 
 
 
 ~ cd 
 
 '5 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 
 
 c 
 
 rj 
 & 
 
 ^' 
 
 M 
 
 | 
 
 ceives 
 
 SB 
 M 
 
 M-l 
 
 O 
 
 V, 
 
 'A 
 
 O 
 
 1.1 
 
 . tt 
 
 V 
 (O 
 CS) 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 G 
 
 ^ 
 
 .s 
 
 1 
 G 
 in 
 
 -j 
 
 g 
 
 X 
 K 
 
 8 
 
 G 
 
 a 
 
 4> 
 
 o3 f)| 
 
 P* o 
 
 Ui 
 U 
 
 | 
 
 G 
 g 
 
 O 
 
 J 
 
 4J 
 
 03 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 
 
 f 
 
 j O 
 
 "] 
 
 (/) 
 .2 
 
 t; 
 
 O 
 
 'x 
 
 n 
 9 
 
 a) 
 
 6 
 
 s 
 
 4-> 
 
 _G 
 
 '^ 
 
 G ^ 
 rt c> 
 
 - o 
 
 U 
 
 o 
 
 Ui 
 
 nl 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 d 
 o 
 
 6H 
 
 . is snapped, as 
 
 "3 
 
 ,0 
 0> 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 bo 
 
 G 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 exposed. 
 At the momen 
 
 lines indicated 
 
 FB runs direct! 
 
 0" 
 
 c 5 
 
 ^ t/5 
 
 H " 13 
 
 06 
 
 
 -z: 
 
 ^> 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 tc 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 

 
 35 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 bo 
 
 
 fl j_; 
 
 
 <u .-. 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 "" 
 
 _c 
 
 
 cfl Q} 
 
 
 fl ?* 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 S "r< 
 
 
 ^5 00 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 [/I 
 
 Tj 
 
 
 
 
 
 '- J CS 
 
 eij 
 
 
 
 
 
 7^ 
 
 
 *3 
 
 _2 
 
 
 to u 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 1 
 
 
 bo 
 .S 
 
 -j 
 
 
 a) +j 
 
 
 fl bo 
 
 .2 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^j 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ti 
 
 
 
 WA M 
 
 
 *7~? t. 
 
 
 cd _o 
 
 c 
 
 
 r 
 
 *d 
 
 c 
 
 2 
 
 * 
 
 JS 
 
 ,0 
 
 *d 
 
 c 
 
 aj *d 
 
 5 S 
 
 4 
 
 om RH, LE draws slightly in an 
 
 *z 
 o 
 ft 
 
 & 
 
 a 
 
 r. 
 u: 
 
 ^ 
 5 
 O 
 
 B 
 o 
 
 n play, receives it at x, and pa 
 ushes directly into the opposing 
 the right end in the line indie; 
 
 to protect him from behind. 
 
 help RT block his man, or take 
 rush line and force him in towa 
 
 in diagram twenty-five. 
 RH and take the first extra m 
 t away with the ball without 1 
 
 aJ 2 
 
 l| 
 
 ^ u 
 0) ^ 
 
 js o 
 
 i^> 
 
 S-c 
 
 & <u 
 
 c3 ^j 
 13 fl 
 
 3 o 
 
 g J 
 o ^ 
 
 .C -fl 
 
 e 
 
 IS 
 
 is LH in note on diagram twent 
 
 ,lf-back criss-crosses witt 
 site 
 
 :nd LE around the RE on a pass fi 
 
 a line with the half-backs, befor 
 
 ashes forward as the ball is put i 
 
 LE gives him the ball, and then r 
 aving received the ball, starts foi 
 to his speed, as there is no one 
 
 ay either jump into the line and 
 s through on the right side of the 
 
 G, LG, LT, and FB play as shown 
 
 y be necessary for QB to precede 
 t end, in order to allow LE to ge 
 
 nd. Otherwise he will play as s 
 5e a man comes through the rus! 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Q 
 -P 
 
 oo 
 
 -u" 
 y 
 0) 
 
 . FB may precede RH and play ; 
 
 eg 
 
 V 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 J3, 
 
 -j 
 
 H V 
 
 ft 
 
 CO M-) 
 
 lc rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 eg 
 
 
 
 
 
 *-" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 HH 
 
 O 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 o w - 
 
 *^~! 
 
 M 
 
 LH 
 
 K """* 
 
 X 
 
 1^ 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 X 
 
 
 O 
 ^ 
 
 * % 
 
 c4 
 
 -u <0 
 
 1-1 
 
 ^ C 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 r 
 
 _c 
 
 ~a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 w 

 
 '37 
 
 ; end in play around the oppo- 
 
 ss from FB, RE works slightly in and on 
 d, while FB moves a little to the left to 
 
 0) 
 
 '> . 
 'S 
 
 X 
 
 .5? 
 
 D 
 1 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 SJ 
 
 _g 
 
 rt 
 
 <u 
 tn 
 
 4) 
 
 +j 
 
 to 
 15 
 
 ^d 
 rt 
 -P 
 
 jives the ball as he passes, 
 in the opposite direction and encircles 
 
 > 
 
 -t-> 
 ^ 
 
 <L> 
 It 
 
 .2 
 
 l 
 
 
 igh the line to the left of center, QB 
 y as in diagram twenty-eight. 
 
 f+ ^^ 
 
 rt 
 
 cl) 
 
 *-* 
 
 (H 
 
 w. 
 
 i 
 
 
 c 
 
 1) 
 
 +J 
 
 o S 
 
 5 C 
 
 ^ <u 
 
 -. j_> 
 
 P 
 <d 
 
 rt 
 
 c 
 
 ' a, 
 
 rt 
 en 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 w" 
 
 bo 
 
 4) 
 
 S 
 
 C 
 
 rt 
 ti? 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 tC 
 
 _>, 
 
 "c 
 
 -a 
 
 '? 
 >> 
 
 .S^ 
 
 ~ % 
 $Z 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 hi 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 c/; 
 
 4) 
 
 
 .~ >-, 
 
 ^ 'S3 
 
 CO 
 
 0) 
 
 
 13 
 rt 
 
 h- 1 
 
 'x 
 
 O 
 
 
 C-, 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 instant 
 
 
 B] 
 
 rt 
 J? 
 
 J 
 
 a 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 -M 
 
 s 
 
 ^ <u 
 rt ^3 
 
 S 
 
 & ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 u 
 
 4) 
 
 a> 
 
 ^ 
 
 4) 
 
 fl 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 ti 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 .s '^ 
 
 en D 
 
 CJ 
 
 ^ 
 
 C 
 
 Q 
 
 jS 
 
 ^ 
 
 V, 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 *S 
 
 .2 r^j 
 
 "S ^ 
 
 (A 
 
 
 <2 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 9) 
 
 Ed 
 
 _~ 
 
 'd t-i 
 
 
 . 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 . 
 
 "1 
 
 X' 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 to 
 
 r^ 
 
 H 
 
 tn C 
 
 Id 
 
 O 
 
 p 
 
 r 1 
 
 p 
 
 Q 
 
 H 
 
 -*-> 
 
 en 
 
 O 
 
 to 
 
 rt rt 
 
 r^H 
 
 Jd 
 
 u 
 
 rt 
 
 3 
 b 
 
 M 
 
 ai 
 
 S 
 
 4) 
 (0 
 
 b 
 
 EH 
 
 "rt 
 
 SB" 
 
 1 
 
 a> 
 
 CD rt 
 - en 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 
 _!-. 
 
 to 
 
 c 
 
 (5 
 
 e FB runs close : 
 
 Upon receiving 
 
 .eft end at utmc 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 rt 
 O 
 
 RT plays as doe 
 
 LE and LT play 
 LG blocks his m 
 
 In case anyone 
 ediately blocks 
 
 _ 
 
 
 c 
 
 rt 
 
 
 T^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 "^ "2: 
 
 g 
 
 
 U: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 n U, 
 
 o 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 .
 
 139 
 
 
 
 
 
 T; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l 
 
 t^^ 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 n 
 3 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 S, 
 
 1" 
 
 -4-J 
 
 ta 
 
 
 
 ,G 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 c^ 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 .bvj 
 
 
 be 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 .S 
 
 
 
 
 
 J5 
 
 O 
 
 u 
 
 *3 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 'o 
 
 
 H) 
 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 c 
 U 
 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 
 1' 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 T; 
 _g 
 
 1 
 
 b 
 
 S 
 43 
 
 
 0) 
 
 "* 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 L. 
 
 
 oa 
 
 ^J 
 
 u 
 
 t? 
 
 
 
 J3 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 <; 
 
 
 V 
 
 G 
 
 CJ 
 
 . G 
 
 S 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 ' 
 
 r! 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 > o 
 
 1 
 
 
 ** 
 
 a 
 PS 
 
 1 
 
 rt 
 
 1 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 
 
 -3 
 
 1| 
 
 09 
 
 ti 
 
 
 *O 
 
 r^-j 
 
 ,2 
 
 ff 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 "^ 
 
 2 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 s 
 
 
 "o 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 <U O 
 
 S 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 1 
 CO 
 
 (/) 
 
 2 
 
 u 
 
 CO 
 
 .2 
 "C 
 u 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 
 Ul 
 
 around the right end on a pass from RE, LE a 
 
 back until he is nearly on a line with the hal 
 
 start toward the left the instant the ball is s 
 
 r3 
 
 "o 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 >> 
 
 o 
 
 r2 
 
 4> 
 
 _g 
 
 O 
 
 5 
 
 S 
 
 G 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 rt 
 
 -Jj 
 
 S 
 
 5 the ball at x on a pass from QB, and running 
 d rushes on into the opposing RE. 
 
 4~> 
 
 -a 
 
 'C 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 ^ 
 c 
 
 rt 
 
 1 
 
 | 
 
 q 
 
 1 
 
 fe 
 w" 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 ic first extra man in the line beyond RT, LH 
 
 preceding LE, plays as shown in diagram tw 
 the first man through on the right hand side 
 
 wn in diagram twenty-five, 
 eceiving the ball, starts toward the right at u1 
 
 LG. 
 
 d RT play as shown in diagram twenty-five. 
 
 M 
 
 _! 
 
 I-H 
 
 3 
 
 to 
 
 (H 
 
 4> 
 
 D 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 tn 
 
 O to 
 
 O IH 
 
 -s 
 
 <s 
 
 CO 
 
 T) 
 
 3 
 
 ffi 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 "o 
 
 '3 
 
 8 
 
 | 
 
 in 
 
 a 
 
 9) 
 
 ^ 
 
 'c ^ 
 
 i 1 
 
 a) c5 
 
 
 S 
 
 H 
 
 ctf 
 
 G 
 
 c 
 
 
 P< 
 
 
 rt >Q 
 
 W3 
 
 '55 
 
 
 o 
 
 Hi 
 
 (V &>p4 
 
 Q) 
 
 6 
 
 [fl 
 
 PQ 
 
 - CO 
 
 S OJ 
 
 ^\ td 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 r p 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 bO 
 
 "a 
 
 <u 
 
 
 
 *> 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 t 
 
 5
 
 141 
 
 1 H 
 
 o * 
 
 % * 
 o | 
 
 
 
 JS to 
 
 G rt 
 3 ^ 
 
 
 rt *" 
 
 1 1 
 
 s a 
 
 *O 
 
 G . o 
 
 2 8 i 
 
 ** ? 
 
 - 2 
 .t; 
 
 & * 
 
 5 
 f-i (1 
 
 o" . 
 
 1 s 
 
 3 
 
 su rt 
 > ft 
 
 8 .3 
 
 a to 
 
 oj TO 
 
 11 
 
 10 0) 
 
 .a ^ 
 
 c a 
 ^a 
 
 2 to 
 
 i ^ 
 
 1 s 
 
 w" 
 
 ^3 a! 
 
 ^ ti 
 to O 
 
 (!) ^_, 
 
 > a 
 
 TO O 
 
 a> fc. 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 e 
 2 
 
 I 
 .g 
 
 " 
 
 P4 
 
 M 
 
 g 
 
 i 
 ? 
 & 
 
 G 
 
 | 
 M 
 
 'to 
 fl 
 
 ! 
 
 i 
 fes 
 
 S "^ 
 
 i twenty-nine.* 
 ps in and takes the opposing tackle as in diagram 
 
 thirty, 
 indicated as RE receives the ball, and precedes him 
 nt of RG as the latter swings in behind the line. 
 
 (A 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 'i 
 
 H fl 
 
 
 'C! 
 Oj 
 
 S 
 i 
 
 -s a 
 
 fl cd 
 
 S S 
 
 S <D 
 TO c 
 
 1 
 
 ? 
 
 CTOSS< 
 
 
 
 M 
 p 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 i-) "" 
 
 >>. 
 
 ^ to 
 
 03 o 
 
 "ft 'o 
 g g 
 
 2 
 
 (0 
 
 ^' 
 "ft 
 
 & 
 cd 
 
 9 
 
 _c 
 
 ^ '" 
 o 
 
 S.S 
 
 fH ^ 
 
 c cT 
 
 bV-s 
 
 TO 0> 
 
 ^36 
 
 .a .'a 
 
 _g 
 
 bO 
 _g 
 
 'so 
 
 to 
 
 <c 
 >> 
 
 c 
 o 
 > 
 
 (0 
 
 .52 
 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 X' 
 
 rH C 
 
 ^ s 
 
 'so 
 
 Q 
 
 s 
 
 t 
 
 3 g 
 
 a 
 
 I? 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 +j 
 
 8 
 
 'C 
 
 U 
 JU 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 TO 
 H 
 
 5 
 
 .bo 
 w 
 
 d 
 
 OH J" 
 
 .2 ^ 
 
 ^-. aS 
 
 13 :=) 
 
 J2 rt 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 aJ 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 05 
 
 1 
 
 to 
 
 >. 
 
 c8 J3 
 ^s to 
 ft to 
 H c3 
 to 
 
 s as doe 
 eaves tl 
 
 O TO 
 ^3 g 
 tn i-, 
 
 ^- 
 to JS 
 
 -3 
 
 d 
 
 CD 
 
 *-! 
 
 T^ 
 
 S 
 | 
 3 
 
 u* 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 h 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 H 
 
 q 
 3 
 
 .G 
 W 
 
 -X 
 
 V* 
 
 - 
 
 to -^ 
 <rl M 
 
 "S <u 
 
 (0 
 
 2 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 p 
 
 >> T3 ^> 
 
 ^3 c ,2 
 
 ft S ft 
 
 m o PJ 
 fe P^ a 
 
 "ft S g 
 
 U to ^ 
 
 tf < a 
 
 0) 
 
 ts 
 
 'ft M 
 W 
 
 iJ P4 
 
 0) 
 .g 
 
 -d 
 
 G 
 
 * See NOT 
 
 r^j 
 
 
 G 
 
 .j^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 PO 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 ifl 
 
 
 a} 

 
 '43 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 a 
 a 
 o 
 
 *o 
 
 e 
 3 
 
 2 
 9 
 
 a 
 
 c . 
 <u -a 
 
 2% 
 
 | 
 
 .a 
 
 d 
 
 
 .S 
 te 
 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 W 
 M 
 
 O 
 i-l 
 
 
 c 
 i-, 
 
 J-4 
 CO 
 
 i 
 
 from his man as in diagram twenty-one, re- 
 RE and rushes directly into the opposing LE. 
 s almost reached him, receives the ball from 
 
 :ding diagram, 
 -eight. 
 ir positions until the instant that RE receives 
 ; and precede RE at greatest speed to inter- 
 
 RH follows KB and assists him to block the 
 e end and takes the first free opponent, 
 id plays as shown in diagram twenty-six, 
 agram thirty-two. 
 
 -M (U 
 _ -4J 
 
 & 
 
 ri 
 
 >> 
 d 
 
 (H 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 o> 
 
 rt 
 
 j= 
 
 *S 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 rt '-3 
 
 criss-crosses with 
 si 
 
 E around the left end on 
 
 1 is snapped LG breaks aw 
 
 II 
 
 S jj 
 0) ^. 
 J] G 
 jD O 
 
 "o '-5 
 
 tn 55 
 
 D O 
 t ft 
 tn 
 ca 
 ftS 
 x" .d 
 
 ts <5 
 
 ~= 
 
 _G 
 j?' 
 
 H 
 
 is shown in diagram twei 
 
 d KB remain standing in t 
 
 e 
 
 ! 
 ^ 
 
 ra 
 
 c4 
 
 'd 
 
 S 
 .g 
 
 >, 
 
 
 bo 
 
 G 
 
 1 
 
 ft 
 ft 
 C 
 
 O 
 
 6 
 
 IH 
 
 3 
 
 j;, 
 
 O 
 
 D 
 U 
 
 y or continues on around 
 
 the line as LG reaches RE 
 ler men play as shown in 
 
 a 
 
 IN 
 
 id 
 
 S 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 G 
 u 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 ID 
 
 a 
 . f> 
 
 -< 
 
 es the ball 
 
 RE remair 
 
 w 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 - 
 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 tn 
 
 ^ . 
 
 s -e a 
 
 3 . 2 
 
 a|<2 
 
 d 
 
 (0 
 
 5 
 
 Ei 
 
 
 if necessai 
 
 v. 5 
 
 g 
 
 S 
 ^ "S 
 
 O ^3 
 P4 <J 
 
 s 
 
 
 K 
 
 O 
 
 u 
 
 
 09 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 <*H 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 0) 
 
 
 10
 
 '45 
 
 ?! 
 
 rifl 
 
 IB 
 
 J. 
 
 3 
 
 f, 
 
 E 
 
 (H 
 
 _c 
 
 09 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 C 
 
 (3 
 
 H 
 
 
 TO 
 
 1 
 
 in 
 
 i~H 
 
 i 
 
 "E/I 
 
 > 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 ackle criss-crosses with t 
 
 P*T3 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 -0 
 "3 
 
 <! 5 
 ju g 
 
 <0 pJ 
 
 6 &> 
 
 3 
 
 .a 
 
 13 a 
 
 E- g 
 j= 
 
 T3 w 
 
 reaches the line RT jumps sudden 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 _c 
 _c 
 >, 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 (fl 
 
 
 
 .c 
 t/; 
 
 g 
 
 a 
 
 ^0 
 
 1 
 
 cx> 
 
 O 
 
 0) 
 ^3 
 
 -M 
 ^bd 
 
 o 
 
 ^O 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 13 
 ^5 
 
 T3 
 
 a 
 
 as 
 
 
 WJ 
 
 a. 
 g 
 
 a 
 
 ^0 
 
 H! 
 
 y: 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 ? 
 _2 
 
 bvj 
 c 
 ' 
 
 1 
 ^ 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 09 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 M 
 
 n 
 D 
 
 cfl 
 
 13 
 
 3 
 to 
 
 X 
 a; 
 
 -O 
 
 a 
 
 :arts back in the opposite directio 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 _g 
 
 cc 
 u, 
 
 T5 
 C 
 
 cS 
 
 a" 
 9 
 
 i t3 
 
 o- c 
 
 ^i 
 
 <0 
 
 u 
 
 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 .s 
 
 c 
 
 a 
 
 EH 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 | 
 
 s 
 a 
 a! 
 
 round the end of the line. 
 
 h 
 
 O "~ 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 E* 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 tS 
 
 r 
 
 CO 
 
 T - 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 i-j 
 
 ?" 
 
 ' I ~ > 
 
 r^ 
 
 , 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ G 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 
 z 
 
 >. 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 k 
 
 Y^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 v 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 50 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 j 
 
 d 
 
 C - 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^" 
 
 K^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 /, 
 
 rH 
 
 >""^ 
 
 h-4 
 
 rt 
 
 0) <*i 
 
 SA 
 
 8 
 
 fO 
 
 
 r 1 
 
 
 <f. 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 x 
 
 iJ S 
 
 
 ts 
 
 
 
 H) 
 
 
 5, 
 
 U5 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 ri 2 
 
 
 P
 
 N 
 
 o 
 
 .0-0 :
 
 147 
 
 as pi M a 
 .2^ ^ 
 
 . 1 - 
 
 r^ P-J C > 
 
 is 3 
 
 ! 5 .: ^q < 
 
 '- 5.5 
 
 P " -/. 
 a .2 & 
 
 2 
 < 
 
 & 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 4-> 
 
 -a 
 c 
 w 
 
 6 
 o 
 
 
 .i 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 !3*|g||lg.aSj| 
 
 , , ^ ^ n ,g rt ^ J -J3 ra c 
 
 ^d <1J 
 
 iiriSilBl 
 
 a&i^s^^fi 
 
 c 314 ^^!! 
 
 ISfl-gSjaa a 
 lylllt 
 
 :>;ua 
 
 rcj ^ rt W'5-2 
 
 lo^cS- 
 "^fl^^ 
 
 rt TJ"" 0) _2 05 
 
 Ss^^'ft! 
 
 ^ ^ &c M * ^ s a "-^^ s c 
 
 ll^-aa^ala-s-Slna 
 
 a o 
 
 3 3 
 o c 
 VH 
 
 S 
 
 85- 
 
 Si o 
 
 ^ <u 
 j->- 
 
 03 rt 
 
 &|fr 
 
 ^^SU 
 
 IS si 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 uiH^nj^vjP.-ca^^rt 
 
 -a 
 
 rt 
 
 sl 
 
 ft P
 
 I
 
 149 
 
 s> 
 
 C c 
 *d 
 
 J3 o 
 
 M C 
 *O ^ 
 
 Se 
 
 O 4) 
 
 Gf 
 g 
 
 ! 
 
 4-1 
 
 OS 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 11 is snapped, 
 forces him in. 
 leld, as indicated, to 
 
 ut slackening speed, 
 
 3 
 
 g 
 c 
 
 to 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 n which case FB will 
 Id to interfere, while 
 
 
 (-, 
 
 
 d) 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 i ~" 
 
 0) (H 
 
 t 
 
 s 
 
 cfl 
 
 0> 
 
 " a 
 c q 
 
 
 > 
 D 
 
 g 
 
 H ^3 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 y3 J> 
 
 fli tn 
 
 3. 
 c 
 
 u 
 ni 
 JQ 
 
 1 
 
 
 U 
 
 -l-> 
 
 B 
 o 
 
 tn 
 
 i 
 
 5, 
 
 2 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 s 
 
 rt 
 2 
 
 2 
 9 
 
 I 
 
 tion in the primary arrangement. 
 11 is snapped, LT leaves the line, recei 
 
 end, precisely as shown in diagram ni 
 line and takes LT'S man as he leaves hi 
 
 play as shown in diagram eight. 
 
 iown in diagram eight. 
 . start for the right end the moment th 
 
 :>r the opposing LE, and bowls him ove 
 necessary, and then cuts in down t 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 ft 
 
 OS 
 (w 
 
 "3 
 .d 
 en 
 C 
 C 
 
 2 
 
 0) 
 
 ,C! 
 
 tf 
 G 
 <U 
 
 0) 
 
 6 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 s 
 o 
 
 C 
 i-i 
 
 "<H 
 
 r! 
 
 rt 
 
 
 oJ 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 K 
 
 Q 
 1 
 
 FB passes on encircling the opposing LI 
 
 nay be made with equal success to i 
 his man, and then pass on down th< 
 rse just outside of the opposing end-ru 
 
 Double pass 
 
 To send FB around 
 
 i the regular forma 
 The instant the ba 
 
 starts for the right 
 LE jumps into the 
 
 u 
 
 1 
 tt 
 
 at 
 
 bf 
 
 e a" 
 
 OH ClJ 
 
 1 ~ 
 a 
 
 RH runs directly f< 
 LH assists RH, if 
 
 rfere. 
 As FB is about to r 
 
 receives the ball a' 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 nd 
 a 
 V 
 4) 
 
 5 
 
 c 
 
 NOTE. The pass i 
 st RH in blocking 
 swings out in a cou 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 d 
 
 p 
 
 
 '55 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 ;/; a 
 
 co 
 
 
 b 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 rf 
 
 *M 
 
 
 CS
 
 o -a 
 
 c p 
 
 2 
 
 V rj 
 
 5 "3 
 
 -a 
 
 a m 
 
 SB 
 
 o. S 
 
 u 
 
 as 
 
 XJ 
 
 rt 
 O 
 
 -a 
 r3 
 
 I rj 
 
 "c rt 
 
 II 
 
 O 
 
 D 
 
 1 | 
 
 d 
 
 c <u 
 
 3 S 
 
 o 
 
 -S 2 
 
 D tn 
 
 ^ iu > o 
 
 8 SD 8 > 
 
 cj 
 
 a g 
 
 ** 
 
 ^3 
 
 S2 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 a> 
 
 . -d 
 
 C3 
 
 G 
 
 0) 
 
 J U 
 
 en 
 
 II 
 
 
 JH 
 
 ti 
 
 a 
 
 < ^ 
 
 - O 
 J 13 
 
 CQ 
 
 T3 
 
 2 ~" 
 
 b ^ 
 
 o3 aj 
 
 > o 
 
 bfl tn 
 
 03 C 
 
 S o3 2 "^ jj 
 
 II, .a 
 
 O .rf en 
 
 I 
 
 iiil 
 
 ^ u> s ^ 
 
 o ,a o 
 
 4-1 +J M 03 
 Oc I- 1 (-, 'O ^ 
 
 n-5-2 
 
 ^ -^21 
 
 G 'j o &i 5 
 
 *^ a a a 
 
 5 
 
 Cj rrt 
 
 PH 0> 
 
 ^ Ci. 
 
 g " 
 
 . c/l 
 
 11 
 ^ 
 
 *s 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 a 
 
 fi- 
 
 15 
 
 s'1 
 
 3- 
 k*- 8 
 
 n slight 
 directly 
 
 oi c3 
 
 Q .2 
 
 ' -5 
 
 > 
 
 53 OH 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 B S - X 
 
 d S 
 
 c - 
 
 ll 
 
 3^2 
 
 
 CO 
 
 M
 
 ^J 
 
 I
 
 ^"Q 
 
 
 ^ 
 & 
 
 2 
 
 e 
 
 3 
 
 line. 
 1 the guards, as 
 
 oj 
 
 0) 
 
 _C 
 tn 
 
 X i i 
 
 o 
 
 0) +j 
 Q tfl 
 
 OH Oj 
 
 % z 
 
 
 ackles and ends 
 ccompanied by 
 
 
 
 r. 
 
 ut across in the 
 mid it be found 
 
 o 
 "3 
 
 0) 
 
 C 
 1 
 
 0) 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 _0 
 
 c 
 
 4_ "KA 
 
 t/) 
 
 0) ^j 
 
 C 
 
 - bo 
 
 
 -i > 03 
 
 
 
 Jji 
 
 n 
 
 r~ 
 
 -H 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 cS 
 0> 
 i-, 
 
 % 
 
 11 
 
 _o 
 
 <D '1 
 
 a c^ 
 
 S J3 
 
 -M J3 
 
 
 5 S 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 "w 
 ^ 
 
 ^ M 
 
 
 b5 tn 
 
 en 
 
 CX 
 
 S 
 
 T3 
 
 O 
 
 e 
 
 TJ 
 
 15 
 
 X5 
 (D 
 
 38. Slow mass wedge from a do 
 
 slow pushing wedge through the center from a 
 s in the wedge formation, as shown in the cut, < 
 
 mself as close as possible to c's right, directly 
 firmly against c on the left and slightly back fr 
 ing rushers and half-backs take their positions 
 
 imilar manner to that shown in diagram forty-o 
 ust be drilled until they can spring into their ] 
 
 The ball should come back at the same momen 
 L to FB 1 , and the whole wedge surge forward wil 
 
 0) 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 >, 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 ay be repeated several times for short gains um 
 side are drawn well in to mass against it, whe 
 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 d 
 
 z 
 
 14 
 
 M 
 
 c 
 _c 
 
 d 
 
 I 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 1 
 
 -u 
 
 2 
 O 
 
 _>, 
 V 
 
 -c 
 
 c 
 
 " 
 
 shown in the diagram; in which case RII and R 
 o block the foremost men among the opponent 
 
 g backs come up to help block the play FB may 
 11 down the field. 
 
 d 
 
 2 
 o 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 c 
 
 "3 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 5 
 
 r. 
 r. 
 
 pa 
 
 x 
 
 0) 
 
 ^ 
 o 
 
 2 
 S 
 
 'i' 
 
 "Sn 
 
 0) 
 
 6 
 
 there should be a little delay in snapping th 
 .m more time to draw well in behind the center. 
 
 To send the 
 leir position 
 
 ja 
 
 .1 
 
 \> o 
 
 olds himself 
 The remain 
 
 l 
 
 c g 
 
 ll 
 
 g e 
 
 instantly. 
 has come ir 
 
 
 rf 
 
 This play m 
 he opposing 
 
 
 ng team, as 
 5 indicated t 
 
 the opposin 
 ind punt we 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 w 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 tnd the end, 
 opposing tea 
 
 ij 
 3 
 
 SQ 
 
 2 
 
 ,G 
 2 
 
 -3 
 .S 
 
 a 2 
 
 .2 "S 
 
 '*3 ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 % 
 
 p* t *^* 
 
 rt " 
 
 
 O fl> 
 
 *"* *^ 
 
 C3 4->
 
 to 
 o- 1 
 
 88: 
 
 :o 
 
 :o 
 
 ... ,
 
 155 
 
 , 
 
 i o 
 
 J-< t/3 
 
 ^ c 5 
 
 
 * 
 
 J- 
 
 > ^ 
 
 -S 
 - 
 
 PH 
 
 "5 5 
 
 W Q> 
 
 ^ O 
 
 <u bo 
 
 ^3 o> 
 -4-> r-! 
 
 o 
 
 T3 - 
 C3 C 
 ci 0) 
 
 * 
 rt +- 1 
 
 to block 
 
 blind to 
 i, whom 
 
 O 
 
 o> 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 6 '55 
 
 2 &< 
 
 
 H" ^ 
 
 c^ ^3 
 
 O 
 
 iJ-a 
 
 1 s 
 
 s 
 
 1! 
 
 VM 
 UJ 
 
 ci 
 
 jj" 1 - 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^^ 
 
 53 3 
 
 
 ^ 5 
 
 O rQ 
 
 w tu 
 
 .d 
 
 ci S 
 
 p, !-H 
 
 J 
 
 03 g 
 
 cS 
 
 -d" 
 
 'So Q) 
 
 "S 
 
 T3 
 0) 
 > 
 
 bO 
 
 .2 
 
 .s 
 
 G % 
 "~ a! 
 
 
 
 _s 
 
 J ^ 
 
 Q 
 
 2 
 
 "rt 
 o 
 
 o 4 g 
 
 'C 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 (U 
 
 bO 
 
 3 
 
 o O 
 
 
 SCO 
 K 
 
 f 
 
 o-^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 2^ 
 
 Td 
 
 1 2 
 
 aj 
 0) 
 
 -S 
 
 *^3 
 
 r< t/3 
 
 
 3 
 
 ? 
 
 en 
 
 r-i 
 
 O 
 
 
 f. H~* 
 
 aS 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 A3 
 
 M 
 
 W O 
 
 
 u C 
 
 <*-! O 
 D '43 
 
 o 
 
 C 
 
 rt -2; 
 o M 
 
 'O 
 
 .2 .2 
 
 0) 
 
 .S 
 
 .. ,13 
 
 ,13 
 
 3 
 
 u 
 
 05 
 >, 
 
 
 erf -.S 
 
 
 
 tD 
 
 
 
 
 
 d) (/j 
 
 (ii 
 
 
 <u 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 /en signal j 
 pact format 
 
 
 t under the 
 t demonstri 
 
 bent over 
 
 O C 
 
 'S 
 
 cj 4) 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 
 11 
 
 D 
 
 .2 
 w 
 
 bO a! 
 S 
 
 .sS 
 -M 
 
 his interfen 
 nobserved. 
 
 ; successful 
 
 *o 
 
 C 
 
 'So 
 m y 
 
 ^3 oS 
 
 tv: 
 
 v> _a> 
 In bo 
 
 | 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 (H 
 
 O oJ 
 t/3 "^ 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 11 
 
 0) 
 
 1 
 
 - 
 05 
 
 4) 0) 
 
 T3 p 
 
 II 
 
 TD 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 4J 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 cd 
 
 C 
 
 g 
 
 > 
 
 .S 
 
 in the line is formed at t 
 :n are closely drawn into 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 .5 
 
 2 
 !H 
 
 '5 
 
 
 
 05 
 
 y 
 
 1 
 
 nt the ball is snapped QB 
 r , without making the si 
 
 and stands still in his po 
 
 D -4-J 
 
 G 
 
 s s 
 
 &i O 
 
 bO^ 
 ^ 
 
 g g 
 
 ? Xi 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 2 s 
 
 "^ ^ 
 
 ?J *3 
 
 osition at the same mom 
 
 A, swinging in a long ci 
 osing team more time to 
 
 a) 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 _0) 
 
 o 
 
 tn jj 
 
 tn rt 
 
 a S 
 5 <U 
 
 '5i S 
 
 > have the ball. When F 
 ted, RE darts out to the r 
 
 is play can be worked 
 for several downs. 
 
 
 
 d) O< 
 
 bo 
 g J 
 
 0) ^ 
 
 ^ 
 S 
 
 D J-? 
 O ->-> 
 
 a '3 
 
 M O"^ 
 
 _S 
 
 0) 
 
 "5 "55 
 
 I-M 
 
 -j 
 
 d & 
 
 lr 
 
 ? -s 
 
 </3 
 
 a. 
 
 '55 3 
 
 D <D 
 
 <o -5 
 
 S ctf 
 
 y 
 
 o fl 
 
 P! 
 
 u 
 
 W 0) 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 3a 
 
 O -4-> 
 
 4-* 
 
 'r3 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 
 >> s 
 
 
 ^"* fn 
 
 fe *-" 
 
 CO 
 
 J 
 c_i 
 
 ^ 
 
 H | 
 
 d 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 o _| 
 
 <D 0> 
 
 H -| 
 
 3 ^ 
 t/3 -< 
 
 o ja 
 & t* 
 
 
 bo 
 */i^ 
 
 1 
 
 'S 
 
 CQ 
 
 /. 
 
 a 
 
 r>. 
 
 ^ ~ 
 
 c o 
 
 a 
 ^ 
 
 "on bo 
 
 rf __i 
 
 tn 
 
 CL 
 
 j_ i_ 
 
 1 
 
 i/l
 
 
 the cut 
 
 
 k 
 
 S 
 v. 
 <^ 
 
 
 <M 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 throws 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 | 
 
 K.S 
 <U 
 
 a 
 
 ^ _c 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 -H 
 
 d 
 
 
 .5t 
 
 aj S2 
 
 ri 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 i" 
 
 <3 
 k, 
 
 % 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 T! 
 
 <a 
 
 | 
 
 S 
 k. 
 
 IH "55 
 
 -s a 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 rt -u 
 
 ^> 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 '3 
 
 go 
 
 o 
 
 
 -3 
 
 1 
 
 .h 
 
 a 
 
 _, ci 
 
 .S s 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 t; 
 
 ~f 
 
 
 p 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 y 
 
 a> bo 
 
 d 
 
 
 d 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 '-M 
 
 5 
 
 bfl 
 
 o ^o 
 
 a 
 
 
 fe 
 
 D 
 S 
 
 14 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 0) 
 
 d 
 
 LJ tfl 
 
 
 
 Revolving wedge from a doi 
 
 ng wedge through the line the arrangi 
 
 e same manner as explained in diagrai 
 
 ay immediately, and the entire wedge 
 isely Compact body. 
 , when the opposing side have massed 
 
 ward progress is nearly blocked, the 
 
 O 
 
 rt 
 m 
 
 
 
 IH 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 (H 
 
 C 
 
 .S 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 .bo 
 "x 
 
 be 
 
 c 
 
 'p 
 5 
 
 4J 
 
 C 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 "o 
 
 ^ 
 
 d attempts to revolve around the opposi 
 
 the opponents are pushing with utmos' 
 'gin a I line of advance of the wedge, i 
 
 3 
 
 <L> 
 
 IH 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 
 
 a 
 .2 
 
 in 
 S 
 
 with the ball. 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 -2 
 
 "Sn 
 
 ^^ 
 
 Vk 
 
 en 
 6 
 
 p 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 r* 
 
 -> ^ 
 
 rt <a 
 
 2 
 
 'o 
 
 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 .S 
 
 rt 
 
 O 
 
 to 
 
 ,i 
 
 cT 
 
 rC 0) 
 
 ^ d) 
 
 5 bo 
 
 <, 
 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 ^j 
 
 C 
 
 O 
 
 T-1 
 
 . -- 
 
 fi 
 
 ^ ,C 
 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 /. 
 
 d 
 
 
 S 
 
 ^J 
 
 Ba 
 
 g 
 
 fl "^ 
 
 ** ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 | 
 
 | 
 
 PH 
 
 r. 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 4) 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 1 
 
 S 3 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 C 
 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 .S 
 
 -d 
 
 ^ 
 f 
 
 '"5 
 
 i 83 
 
 i_ a> -M 
 ^3 bo5 
 
 3 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 < &S" 
 ^ a 
 
 .c 
 
 |i 
 
 r2 
 
 
 o 
 
 e 
 
 I 
 
 ,0 
 
 O 
 
 ^3 
 
 P 
 
 f 
 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 
 ? 
 0) 
 
 bc,c 
 '5 .2 
 ^ * 
 
 ^ 8 
 * ^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 c 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 
 t/2 
 
 u 
 
 "t! 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 Efl 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 s 
 
 ."tJ 
 
 
 u rt 
 
 p* 
 
 09
 
 O 
 
 PQ 
 
 O UJ x
 
 '59 
 
 .
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 3 o* 
 
 B 
 
 LI 
 
 03^- 
 
 Sir 
 
 :o : 
 
 .oo
 
 i6i 
 
 all I 111^11^ I- Pt 
 
 "3 S <& -^ T3 v5 KJ g ^ o o> j> 
 
 Jg ^ c bo bo*- 1 ^ 5 3 c3 ^ G bo - o 
 
 ftS "^ jS ?J 3 ^ b^x,-, "^ r "" - S ^ ;g .22 J 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 9 
 o 
 
 u. 
 
 rt 
 
 IH 
 V 
 
 -M 
 
 C 
 0) 
 
 
 
 4) 
 
 43 
 ^- 
 
 a 
 5 
 
 % 
 
 *o 
 a 
 
 edge around the I.T, a preliminary signal 
 ith the signal which is to indicate the dire 
 in the large cut is instantly made, in pre 
 ceding diagram. 
 ;he wedge should have the appearance cf be 
 
 the ball comes into his hands QB whirls i 
 ices the ball in the hands of RH. QH tr 
 f to the side and a little behind LH, while P 
 ittaches himself in a like manner on the o 
 Aether in the lines indicated, around LT.* ! 
 idge so formed, while RE runs directly in th 
 they round the tackle. \ LE throws his em 
 s back, and LT forces his man back and to t 
 st take great care not to leave his positiol 
 n. The formation must be somewhat op 
 
 ; be borne in mind that the representation in 
 the guards are drawn close in by the s 
 r to shoulder with the guards in all plays
 
 C5 ",
 
 163 
 
 60 
 
 a 
 
 a; 
 
 -- 
 X! 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 *a 
 G 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 rt 
 
 8 
 
 nt 
 
 rt <a 
 O v* 
 
 C 
 
 0) a 
 > 0) 
 
 bo o 
 '55 , 
 
 S 
 
 oj 
 
 s 
 
 -d 
 
 Oj 
 
 <u 
 be 
 
 T3 
 
 M 
 
 bO _ 
 
 2 " 
 5 S 5 
 L. 33 5 8. 
 
 S P 
 
 rt 
 
 s= 
 
 S S 2 
 " u o 
 
 S s 
 
 - -53 
 
 ^e 
 
 w> , 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 IS 
 
 'JI 
 
 e 
 
 cd o 
 
 fe > 
 
 Jj 0) 
 
 < G rt 
 
 13 ? OH - 
 
 O j*T O 1 
 
 .2 "^ o- o 
 
 4-J O -U 
 
 C3 ^^ T^ 
 
 ff C <U -? 
 
 i I &| 
 
 be rt ^ 
 
 j D at S O 
 
 ; ;5 .^- tfl r~l 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 i " t3 t-l 
 M c3 *-" 
 
 r rt rtj t/5 
 
 C 0) ra 05 
 
 05 ?'* 
 
 s a I &* 
 
 8 sa 8 1 1 
 
 *> 
 
 C 4J ' 
 
 - 
 
 
 0) 
 
 s 
 
 O fl *d 
 
 H tn es C 
 
 2 2 g rt 
 
 GO 
 
 3 g 
 
 .S 
 
 wj * j 
 
 > & 
 
 -H 
 
 rt ~* 
 
 12 
 
 S 2 
 
 t/1 t/3 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o m d y *" 
 
 S -S - S 
 
 t" "- ^ .s 
 rt c 73 "> 'o 
 i- rt S u 
 
 0) ti t/3 ~ p 
 
 n s t3 ^, ^ 
 c .5 c ** K 
 
 p^-3 S 
 
 Zt* v < 
 
 3 72 0- ^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 PH 
 
 X 
 
 .s 
 t/i 
 * . 
 
 O 'd 
 
 ^5 c 
 
 O C ^S r
 
 I
 
 
 ram forty-one. 
 
 <0 
 4J 
 
 d 
 
 O 1 
 
 1 
 
 z 
 
 1 
 x 
 be 
 
 eft, accompanied by 
 on, and hold closely 
 
 0> 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 C 
 
 r-.' D 
 
 I.S 
 
 <u ** 
 <d 
 
 ) intercept it. 
 off toward the side 
 
 ;he opposite end, ac- 
 3 he has come around 
 
 r -nine. 
 
 , 
 
 bC 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 J3 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 
 S-> =3 
 
 
 IA 
 
 i^ 
 
 V 
 
 hO 
 
 o 
 
 .3 
 .S 
 
 *-> 
 bj) 
 
 *^, 
 
 "S 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 <D 
 
 n 
 
 S 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 >s 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 "3 
 0) d 
 
 09 
 
 "p 
 
 '3 
 
 LE in ca 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 I> 
 
 d 
 
 -t 
 
 ^i 
 
 Q) 
 
 "S 
 
 -fl 
 
 r^i 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 oi 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 8 
 
 . 
 
 bfl 
 
 d 
 
 b 
 
 -t-> 
 
 ft 
 
 - 1 - 1 2 
 
 H 
 
 bo 
 
 n 
 
 & 
 
 43 
 
 o 
 
 -9. 
 
 
 
 -f 
 
 g 
 
 "rt 
 
 a 
 
 rt 
 
 1^ 
 
 rt 
 ft 
 
 'S5 
 o 
 
 3 
 ^ 
 
 4-1 
 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 IH 
 
 "rt 
 ^f-; 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 ft 
 
 .S 
 
 g 
 
 
 3 
 
 '? 
 
 $ 
 
 o 
 
 jSj 
 
 
 tn 
 
 '& 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 
 c 
 
 J8 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 5 
 
 _g 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 <<-! 
 
 1 
 
 c3 
 
 C 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 G 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 p 
 
 2 S 
 
 3 
 
 & 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 4-> 
 
 rt 
 
 >, 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 & 
 
 *^ 
 
 o 
 
 IB 
 
 fe ^ 
 
 J^> 
 
 g 
 
 aj 
 
 "3. 
 j-j 
 .5 
 
 
 
 the signal the wedge is instantl 
 the ball is snapped FB rushes : 
 ouches down behind c, shielde 
 
 i tightly massed together. 
 then instantly darts out from 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 "o 
 
 be 
 g 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 r * to deceive the other side int 
 
 e opposing team immediately 
 
 is being attempted and rush to 
 remains crouched behind c unl 
 
 a 
 
 
 <-> 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 09 
 
 
 B5 <]j 
 
 , a) 
 
 <u -J3 
 
 TE. Compare this play with th 
 
 
 3 
 
 ta 
 < 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 t- K 
 
 d O* 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 fA 
 
 &H 
 
 & 
 
 T3 
 
 1 
 
 is 
 
 o 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 A 
 
 !? 
 
 X 
 
 'iv: 
 S 
 
 
 1 
 
 c 
 
 89) 
 ^Q 

 
 ;o
 
 i6 7 
 
 _fi 
 
 <B 
 
 
 
 .S 
 ^ 
 
 y 
 
 _d 
 c 
 
 4> E* tn 
 
 S.2* 
 0> 0> 13 
 
 8 -5 - 
 
 '-^ ) D 
 
 tn o> 
 
 <U c 
 
 bO C 
 
 s 
 u^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 "n 
 
 .2 
 
 y 
 
 M 
 
 g-a 
 
 ^^ 
 
 0) ^ 
 
 K C 
 fc 
 
 fl^S 
 
 !1) ^ 
 1^ 
 
 to break 
 
 tn .-j 
 
 '3 bo 
 
 bo C 
 
 rt 2 
 
 r^ in 
 
 ly strong 
 Dpposing 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 .1i 
 
 p 
 
 in 
 
 1 8 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 * .> 
 O 'S 
 
 -o g 
 c > 
 <u So 
 
 
 
 J/. 
 
 y 
 
 -C 
 
 
 
 vS 
 
 d 
 
 'I 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 me to reach the left end, by which 
 :n are properly drilled, and then snap 
 e springs toward FB, passing him th 
 
 35 * 
 fo -w 
 
 cs 
 
 sl 
 
 ^ oj 
 bO^__ 
 
 '55 < 
 
 IB 
 It 
 
 *: 
 
 ^ 
 
 bO^J 
 3 oj 
 
 s- 
 
 21 
 
 _d 
 
 
 5 
 x 
 
 "^ 
 
 4= 
 
 -4J 
 
 < 
 
 4) 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 C! 
 
 e 
 
 .S 
 ij 
 
 / angle to the left, LE jumps into th 
 le QB attaches himself to the rear of : 
 
 -M "Hi 
 ^^ 
 
 .3? 
 
 ^^> 
 
 *$ 
 
 bC^ 
 
 C ^" 
 
 .H <a 
 
 *-> KJ 
 && 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 ^ OS 
 
 Si s 
 
 a -! 
 
 n <u 
 
 1/3 o 
 
 *. fe 
 
 5 S 
 
 ^4 j 
 
 S m 
 
 s O 
 
 > take the opposing RE if he attempts 
 
 jnds the backs up into the line to mas; 
 e ball down the field instead of ru 
 
 ^5 O 
 ' "S 
 
 S-g 
 
 0) 
 c! M 
 
 1 
 
 -M <U 
 
 
 ^| 
 
 ^ | 
 
 O 
 
 6 -M 
 
 tn tn 
 
 tn 3 
 0) -> 
 
 O M 
 
 T3 -g 
 0) "S 
 J3 -^ 
 tn ^ 
 
 Bj 
 
 future similar formations it will coi 
 well behind the line as a protection. 
 
 G ^ 
 
 1 
 
 | 
 
 . u/ - 
 -M c = 
 
 * ti 
 
 ^ 
 
 S! 
 
 e 
 
 CL, -M 
 
 w 
 
 0) 
 
 in A 
 0) "^ 
 
 H '^ 
 
 S c^ 
 
 oS o3 
 
 &1 
 
 1 
 
 "a 
 
 1^1 
 
 i - 'S 
 
 g '> 
 
 ^1 
 
 s g 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 05 
 
 -5 p 
 
 > <u 
 .c 
 
 M S 
 
 . -5 
 
 m'$ 
 
 bo 
 B 
 
 0) 
 
 T3 ^j 
 
 55 .a 
 
 bo-* 
 2 ^ 
 
 bO tj 
 
 'I 
 "S 
 
 a 2 
 
 o o> 
 tn C 
 oS O 
 
 ^ u 
 
 s 
 
 (H 
 
 '7. 
 
 c 
 
 g-g g 
 1 1 0- 
 
 9 -w" 
 
 '55 c 
 
 o g 
 a, S 
 
 'C. 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 a> 
 d "5 
 
 S 2 
 
 & 'Z^ 
 
 g-E 
 
 OS 
 0) 
 
 <u 
 
 0) 
 0) 
 
 '55 2 
 
 as 
 
 X 
 O u, 
 
 a, 
 ft 
 o - 
 
 1 3 
 
 - 4-> 
 
 0) sn 
 
 in 03 
 O 0> 
 
 &^ 
 
 
 
 
 '" VH tn 
 
 _, o 
 
 (Q 
 
 t! c 
 
 in o 
 
 
 di - 
 
 -(-> /j 
 
 j3 Cj 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 2 
 
 S^< 
 
 Is S 
 
 3 
 
 O o! 
 C 
 
 +< 
 T3 .-I 
 
 ,2 
 
 | - 
 
 2 o 
 
 <^ c 
 
 g 
 
 :i 
 
 tn 
 
 tn o 
 
 VM 0) 
 
 5 3 
 
 13 ^ 'tn 
 
 bo D 
 .5 S 
 3 S 
 S <u 
 
 ^ 
 o 
 ^ 
 
 tn ti 
 <U o3 
 
 |t 
 
 ll 
 
 S fH 
 
 - 1 t 
 
 ^13 
 
 OS 
 
 6 
 
 X 
 
 a; -X 
 tn y 
 
 nS O 
 o 3 
 
 rrt 
 
 o 4J 
 4: x 
 
 o 
 
 .2 ^ 
 2 
 
 '3 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 a) +-> 
 
 <2 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 b* 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 ^ "| 
 s ^ rt 
 S g 
 
 0) bO 
 bo's in 
 
 5 1 3 
 
 5S 
 
 a 
 
 t T3 
 
 8 5 
 
 T3 b= 
 2o 
 
 time shouts " 
 
 &| 
 1* 
 
 3 ' 5 
 J bo 
 
 C 
 
 8 2 
 
 s:s 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 0) U" 
 
 bo s 
 T3 rr-j 
 4> o 
 ^ 
 
 " t! 
 o c 
 
 *7 o 
 
 d 
 
 NOTE." ] 
 the wedge am 
 
 QB protecting 
 position from 
 
 back will serv 
 opposing side
 
 169 
 
 g 
 
 {- a) 
 oj bo 
 
 
 "2 
 
 ,E3 D 
 
 IH 
 
 O 
 
 c 3 
 
 tn 
 
 cS 
 
 c 
 
 D -*-* 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 
 bo 
 
 _c 
 
 C rt 
 
 w 'S 
 
 
 ? 
 
 |c| 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 IH 
 
 o 
 
 tn tn 
 
 < 
 
 '^ 
 
 ** bo 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 c3 
 
 * C 
 
 S 
 
 j 
 
 <+1 
 
 tfl 
 
 rt o3 
 
 c 
 
 OJ 
 
 5 bo 
 
 t/) 0) 
 
 83 
 
 
 5 
 
 l-< O 
 
 1 rt 
 
 1 
 
 _c 
 
 3 
 
 T! 
 
 a 
 
 tn 
 cJ 
 
 C 
 
 C -j 
 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 B'-S 
 
 g 
 
 EJ *-> 
 
 si 
 
 
 J3 
 
 xg 
 
 1> o 
 
 3 
 
 C 
 bfl 
 
 c 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 tn 
 
 'tn O 
 bO- 
 
 bo 
 
 o 
 
 <u S 
 
 rT Cj 
 
 
 1 
 
 D -^ 
 
 tn 
 
 'd 
 
 ^3 
 
 2 
 
 G ^ 
 tn G 
 
 ^ 
 
 <ti 
 
 fcuO ^ 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 *d 
 
 35 
 
 
 -^J 
 
 g 
 
 
 2 
 
 e 
 
 *O 4) 
 
 "* w 
 
 
 
 
 o ^ 
 
 i 
 
 C t* 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 & 
 
 ^ 
 
 o3 bo 
 
 > tJ 
 
 S s 
 
 
 ^2 
 
 U3 S 
 
 a, 
 
 V OH 
 
 OS 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 O a) 
 
 ... 
 
 
 * .S 
 
 'o 
 
 
 K 
 
 > ^ 
 
 4-J 
 
 3 
 
 -M as 
 
 6 * 
 
 3 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ +* 
 
 g 
 
 fl 1 
 
 4) C 
 
 Cu <_i 
 
 
 
 'bo 
 
 ^ 
 
 .^o 
 
 a 
 
 M 
 
 "*"" ^ 
 
 11 
 
 c ^ 
 
 ** 2 
 
 g-s 
 
 C tfl 
 
 0) 
 0) TJ 
 
 a o 
 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 .2 
 
 8? ^ M 
 
 ,SS r9 1 
 
 p *- e4 
 
 ,-0 a. 
 
 | 
 
 IS 
 
 
 0) 
 
 Ij rd 
 
 || 
 
 .S 
 
 C 
 
 *^ c 
 
 
 (D 
 
 OT ^ 
 
 -4-> 
 
 u 
 
 S = 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 rC * 
 
 - J-H 
 
 Q W 
 
 ,j 
 
 ^d 
 
 
 7, 
 
 a ^ 
 
 o 
 
 9 
 
 I'a 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 H! 
 
 -S 
 
 u c 
 
 &^ 
 
 G jB 
 
 ,-T 
 
 rf o 
 
 
 c 
 
 |l 
 
 1 
 
 al 
 
 la 
 
 d 
 
 1 
 
 .S cL 
 
 tn 6 
 
 0) ^ 
 
 si 
 
 '$ 
 
 ^ 
 
 <o a 
 
 
 
 
 rC -M 
 
 nt 
 
 tn T^J 
 
 ^d 
 
 o 
 
 ^3 -. 
 
 t-t ^* 
 
 rt 
 
 CJ ~ 
 
 & n 
 
 
 JH 
 
 2 
 
 -2 
 
 tS tn 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 J2 Uc 
 
 Si ^ 
 
 y g 
 
 Play around the opposit 
 
 After the wedge has been formed < 
 
 re may be some delay in snapping t 
 xperienced team, both LT and LE ru: 
 
 en it advances. 
 
 In that case the following modifica 
 
 captain, seeing that the opposing L 
 understand as a signal to indicate tl 
 
 >osite end. 
 QB makes the pass as shown in c 
 
 and then instantly turns and precec 
 FB and RE dash toward the right a 
 
 opposing LE. 
 RG attempts to lift his opponent b; 
 
 isible. 
 As RE starts forward in the line ini 
 
 iiagram eight, and preceding RE, di 
 :ceeds in getting around RG, while R 
 
 1 1 
 
 M 0) 
 
 .a a 
 
 tl 
 
 g.a 
 =3 S 
 S^ 
 
 1 
 
 3 5 
 
 D 
 
 -1 
 
 -d - 
 1 
 
 NOTE. This maneuver will prevei 
 their men from the opposite end to 
 
 ^ 
 
 0> 0> 
 
 rS.S 
 
 A 
 
 
 1 3 
 
 M* 
 
 eu 
 o 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 - u 
 
 II 
 
 ^
 
 Ooo 
 u. 
 
 J O
 
 171 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 2 
 
 0) 
 
 >1 
 
 ! c endeavors to 
 
 a 
 
 !S 
 
 x 
 
 is 
 
 ^ 
 d 
 
 
 X 
 
 2 Sf 
 11 
 
 C ? 
 
 led to strike the 
 
 .selves on either 
 ,g until the man 
 
 "c 
 
 CJ 
 
 "o 
 
 s 
 
 _.j 
 15 
 
 "o 
 
 Q 
 
 III 
 
 E< 
 
 
 <u *O 
 
 | 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 4> 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 -. Running mass wedge through the 
 
 FB through the center on a running mass play di 
 s start forward the instant the ball is snapped. 
 
 C 
 
 -^ 
 
 I 
 
 ? 
 
 1 
 
 <o 
 
 fl 
 
 
 
 '5 
 
 to 
 
 p 
 
 straight ahead of him. 
 n dash in and attach themselves behind c on each si 
 
 ;s forward at the same moment, and receiving th< 
 
 ^ H 
 
 5,S 
 
 ^s 
 
 O C 
 
 13 O 
 .2 .g 
 "S 4) 
 
 ^ s 
 
 ^"o 
 
 "*J U5 
 ^ fl 
 
 - S 
 
 ^ 
 
 o> 
 
 2 -S 
 
 |J 
 
 '-s^ 
 
 6 
 
 T3 
 
 s 8 
 
 4) -g 
 
 
 2 
 U 
 4-> a 
 
 A3 
 
 ~^ (~* 
 ui rp 
 
 If -backs. QB throws himself in the rear of FB, and a 
 
 en 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 3 
 " 
 
 to 
 
 rf 
 
 u 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 '/i 
 
 point in the play is that all strike the line at as r 
 ind form a tightly massed wedge, which is driven 
 
 J2 
 | 
 
 a 
 
 -ti 
 " 
 
 O 
 0) 
 
 a) 
 
 .g 
 
 bC 
 
 .2 
 > 
 
 1j 
 
 2 
 tt 
 
 o 
 
 -5 
 
 CD 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 _s 
 
 v" 
 M 
 
 he rushes forward. The wedge must never cease p 
 is actually downed and absolutely held. 
 
 t^ 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 g s 
 
 g- 
 
 a 
 3, 
 
 a * 
 
 c^ 
 E c 
 
 on 
 5 
 'C 
 & 
 
 9 -" 
 
 J2 C 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 4> 
 
 .n 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 i; 
 
 a! +j 
 . C 
 
 > 5 
 
 ri 
 
 Z 
 
 V. 
 
 13 
 
 M ^ 
 
 
 < -o 
 
 *n 
 
 t/3 ^ 
 
 CA 
 
 - C/l 
 
 4-1 
 
 ^ 
 
 m J2 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 
 & 0) 
 
 
 S 
 
 .= 
 
 IS s 
 
 
 
 O 1 "- 
 
 d 
 
 p 
 
 * . 
 
 ,0 
 
 ^ 
 
 <+-( ^ 
 
 O "*""* 
 
 
 ~ tn 
 
 e 
 
 c 
 
 0) 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 c 
 o 1 
 S 
 
 c^ 
 "o 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 0) 
 
 c 
 
 u 
 
 *2 ? 
 
 'So
 
 o t 
 
 o
 
 u 
 
 4-> 
 
 C 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 e 
 
 rt 
 T> 
 
 ^ x 
 
 rt x o 
 
 ^ ^ "3 
 |'rt | 
 
 q .S ^ 
 
 s 1 " J 
 
 the line dash straight for 
 
 nan back and to the left. 
 
 trikes the opposing c with M 
 s the opposing guard in a J 
 
 en 
 
 'C 
 to 
 
 1 
 tn 
 
 9 
 
 2 
 
 "co 
 
 ic greatest possible force, 
 he receives the ball at x, 
 
 h 
 
 t-. 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 09 
 
 -H 
 
 a 
 
 01 
 
 1 
 
 C3 
 fl 
 
 
 jt 
 
 I 
 
 "3 
 
 d> 
 
 | 
 "o 
 
 IM 
 
 d 
 
 e 
 
 X 
 
 e 
 
 r5 
 
 3 
 
 bo 
 
 "S c4 
 co ~ 
 
 c - 1 
 
 J3 *3 
 rt W) 
 bo S 
 
 n ^ 
 
 ja 
 1 
 
 en 
 en 
 
 CO 
 
 en co 
 
 11 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 2 s 
 
 
 ^s 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 _fl 
 
 
 d" 
 3 
 v> 
 
 C 
 <u 
 
 "^ 
 
 'S 'C 
 8, 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 2 G 
 
 bo .5 
 C .a 
 
 
 
 ^"^ 
 
 CO 
 
 "w 
 
 en 
 
 co .C 
 
 
 3 
 
 be 
 
 u 
 
 ^ 
 
 ~ 
 
 - 
 
 ^5 
 
 <u 
 
 bfl 
 
 o 
 <u 
 
 ^ 
 
 *" co 
 
 If 
 
 il 
 
 co co 
 
 me to reach the o 
 T headway before 
 
 S 
 
 i* 
 |g 
 
 Q 
 TJ 
 
 vT 
 
 *; 
 
 Qg ahead,* at an a 
 ; directly behind 
 
 ith his head dowr 
 
 :ely behind the er 
 themselves to his 
 
 .5 
 
 o 
 
 en 
 rt 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 ^ .s 
 
 co *3 
 
 sS 
 
 a 
 <a 
 
 a 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 TJ 
 
 C 
 
 n reaching the openi 
 
 48. Running mass 
 
 To send the running mass 
 backs draw back slightly before 
 
 in order to give the ends more ti 
 enable themselves to gain greate 
 
 RE also works over slightly 1 
 At the instant the ball is s 
 
 the opening in the lines indicatec 
 C lifts his man back and to t 
 
 LE passes through the openi 
 his full force, while RE, crossing 
 
 similar manner. 
 At the same moment, FB w 
 
 the opening so made, immedial 
 the half-backs firmly attaching 
 
 and forcing him through. RT '. 
 
 in diagram thirteen, and toge 
 together as before and drive din 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 S 
 
 u 
 
 'S 
 
 d 
 "o 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 * When the ends find difficulty i 
 as in the preceding play.
 
 jo so 
 
 O; 
 
 to so
 
 J 75 
 
 .22 
 
 2 m 
 rt 9 
 
 *0 ,.- .M 
 1-4 ^ rt 
 
 g^3 
 
 *!* 
 
 J-3 til 
 
 4) n o 
 
 1 1 g.s-3 
 
 !fi 0) o "tn os 
 
 
 ., *3 a 
 
 ^T f /ti 
 
 - 
 
 hO 
 
 (A 
 
 OJ 
 
 s 
 
 hO 
 
 C 
 
 6 ^ 
 
 (0 U 
 
 '.a o 
 
 -^ 
 
 0) j) 
 
 Q -s 
 
 c a 
 
 > 2 -2 
 
 [> *- -4- 
 
 s ^ s 
 ^ ^ 
 t a ^ 
 I d ^ 
 
 b c * 
 
 f -yi 
 
 _ o 
 ^ ^ 
 
 d g <n 
 rt K rt 
 
 (3 tfl 
 
 C 
 
 0) <D 
 Cfi p| 
 
 rt 
 
 3 a 
 
 ^3 C 
 
 g || ^ | 
 
 n W> 
 
 c a rt 
 
 w rt . 
 
 ft 4) 
 
 Oi T3 
 
 TO a) rt 
 
 C J3 e 
 
 C/3 -*J G 
 
 o 
 
 83
 
 o
 
 177
 
 o
 
 2 
 
 "oJ 
 
 43 
 
 *O 
 
 u 
 <v 
 
 "S 
 
 u 
 
 0> 
 
 43 
 
 2 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 <*- 
 
 "5 
 o 
 
 a 
 .S 
 
 | 
 '7. 
 3 
 
 
 *Z 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 -c 
 c 
 3 
 
 o" 
 
 -s 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 <0 
 
 & 
 o 
 
 f. 
 
 y 
 O 
 
 it has been prearranged that he shall 
 
 retaining it in his hands, and passes ^ 
 1 the right end. At the same instant ^ 
 
 right as one man, and dash into the 
 
 rt 
 'a 
 a 
 
 13 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 0) 
 0) 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 >-> o 
 
 
 do not betray by their looks, before 
 
 run is to be made. 
 
 w 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 bO 
 .S 
 
 'S 
 
 (U 
 
 "o 
 
 
 "3 
 
 S 
 
 
 o 
 "S 
 
 
 derstood around which e 
 
 the opposing side whom 
 
 by kicking it while still 
 play is to be made arouni 
 
 e diagonally toward the 
 
 meet midway between t 
 s to interfere for him as 
 
 
 must see to it that they 
 
 e direction in which the i 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 Ui 
 (14 
 
 M 
 
 10 
 
 ? 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 x feet apart. 
 
 d 
 P 
 
 ' 
 
 en 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 "H 
 ^ 
 w 
 
 'A 
 < 
 
 .ayer selects the man on 
 lock. 
 
 X 
 
 rt 
 
 H 
 _c 
 
 "3 
 ,3 
 
 o 
 
 6 
 
 0} 
 
 is 
 
 
 ft 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 Q 
 
 1 
 
 .S 
 
 1-1 
 
 o 
 -p 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 ft 
 
 le entire rush lines mov 
 
 jposing rushers as they 
 RH and FB precede LI 
 
 
 
 
 5T 
 
 in 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 NOTE. The rushers 
 
 te ball is put in play, th< 
 
 
 
 5a 
 
 
 ft.0 
 
 
 .ti 
 
 ! 
 
 o 
 
 z 
 
 
 M
 
 181 
 
 d 
 
 V 
 
 I 
 
 "ft 
 
 % 
 
 u E 
 
 Jj i) 
 
 3 
 
 O Cu 
 
 Sj 
 
 -4-1 y 
 o rt 
 
 1 J3 
 M i3 
 
 
 h toward the 
 heir distances 
 
 G 
 
 C 
 
 IS 
 
 n 
 
 rt 
 
 .be 
 In 
 
 bO 
 
 
 o 
 
 t/2 
 0) 
 
 1 
 
 rt 
 
 ft 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 "S 
 
 cd 
 
 ^ 
 
 rt 
 
 SH 
 1 
 
 t: M 
 fe 
 
 "S *-" 
 
 1 2 
 
 d of across in 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 (0 -"- 1 
 
 YJ 
 
 tn 
 
 ^ 
 
 G 
 
 'C 
 
 (1) b 
 
 rt 
 
 
 C 1 
 
 (L> *- 
 U 
 
 o> ^ 
 
 G ^H 
 
 >rH ^3 
 G te 
 rt ? 
 x . o" 
 
 
 $ G 
 K '> 
 J l> 
 
 T3 
 
 vances 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 rt 
 
 | 
 rt 
 
 &-S o 
 
 T3 ^ 
 
 1 a S- 
 
 rt .G 
 
 aid inste 
 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 "^^ C 
 O 
 
 be 2 
 
 G 
 > T3 
 
 
 r-< ^ 
 
 s *- 
 
 rt p. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 | 
 
 -4_> 
 
 s-s 
 
 G r3 
 
 <G 
 Q 
 
 
 
 rt G 
 
 
 w" tn" 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 &-< 
 
 
 
 " rt 
 
 3 
 
 
 6 
 
 rt 
 
 
 t-5 ^ 
 
 id 
 
 r^ 
 
 *^ 
 
 t/3 
 
 8 
 
 G ^ 
 
 
 
 o ^ 
 
 0) 
 
 tf o- 
 
 
 . G 
 f- ^ 
 ^ tfl 
 
 a 
 
 G 
 
 5 
 
 -^ 
 
 15 
 c 
 
 H 
 
 C 
 
 ^ 
 rt X 
 
 ~~ -t-> 
 
 S 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 13 rt 
 ^ 
 
 
 tt S 
 
 x~ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 _o 
 
 ^ M 
 
 
 
 
 rt "^ 
 
 rt i> 
 
 
 ^ S 
 
 rt 
 
 'd 
 
 
 "rt 
 
 '7. 
 
 s 1 
 
 y 
 
 
 a 
 
 bO rt 
 
 -S -^ 
 
 oj ^ 
 
 
 (S v 
 
 *>,* 
 1*5 
 
 X 
 
 2 
 
 J^ 
 
 -s. 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 O 
 ,G 
 
 c 
 
 C< 
 
 T^ ^^ 
 
 t/i rt 
 
 bO 
 
 1 
 
 
 .5 ^ 
 
 O r O 
 
 
 ft'g 
 
 t/2 
 
 -3 
 
 a 
 
 i-H 
 
 t/5 
 
 5 
 
 ^3 oa 
 
 is 
 
 
 G * * 
 
 ^ crj 
 
 
 G i 
 
 rt 
 
 
 b 
 
 'C 
 
 
 O O* 
 
 P 
 
 
 jj ft 
 
 "*~* j>^ 
 
 
 ^ D 
 
 O. 
 
 c 
 
 ^g 
 
 c 
 
 _G 
 
 13 ._ 
 
 t- 
 
 
 a bo 
 
 .5 
 
 || 
 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 bo 
 
 G 
 
 _rt 
 
 CO 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 ^1 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ rt 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 Q 
 
 " 
 
 rt 
 
 6 "rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 u 
 
 CO a> 
 (0 ft 
 
 rt -c 
 
 4> 
 
 e 
 
 0> (X 
 
 rt 
 
 , 
 
 
 h 
 
 -*-> 
 
 (B 
 
 S e 
 
 ' 
 
 2 
 
 52. Double pa 
 
 To make the double pass c 
 
 as indicated, on the center line 
 ten yards between c and QB, ar 
 
 about three yards behind the li 
 
 The instant that QB puts 1 
 center of the field in lines nearl 
 
 m 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 "o 
 
 0) 
 
 I] 
 
 M-l 
 
 O 
 
 la 
 
 _bo 
 'C 
 
 0) 
 ^3 
 -> 
 
 3 
 
 C 
 (U 
 
 . U 
 
 3 rG 
 
 2 H 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 toward the center to block the 
 
 LH passes close in front 01 
 KB, to take it as he rushes by. 
 
 >, 
 
 1 
 M 
 
 _C 
 
 d 
 
 0) 
 
 5 
 
 H 
 O 
 
 'd 
 
 3 
 
 B 
 
 
 speed to encircle the opposing 1 
 NOTE. From this same fo: 
 
 kick, in which case the rushers 
 the lines indicated in the cut. 
 
 * See description, diagram fifty-
 
 if ^ 3:
 
 183 
 
 center with team divided. 
 
 e diagram, on either side of the field, the 
 
 ends about five yards from the side lines, 
 icks about three yards, behind the center 
 
 >ther, in order to render the opposing team 
 
 the right or left, or to FB for a kick down 
 shown in diagram fifty-one, and makes a 
 t x, following it immediately to make the 
 
 D fl^ 
 ^ 1 
 
 **"* tn 
 
 s g* 
 1* 
 
 * G 
 ^3 _O 
 
 13 
 
 0) Q, 
 
 S 
 .S "3 
 
 Dy his opponents as the other three men 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 1 
 
 Every man upon the team rushes to his 
 a signal the ball is immediately snapped 
 
 the field to RE, who catches the ball upon 
 
 T3 
 
 bo 
 
 G 
 
 rt 
 
 1 
 I 
 
 1 
 0) 
 
 CJ *r^ 
 
 c$ 
 
 a > 
 
 ,c 
 
 ID <1 
 
 w 
 
 O - 
 
 ci 
 
 
 ^ r^5 
 
 
 Ca 
 
 (H 
 
 
 <U p^ 
 
 53. Opening play from the 
 
 The men are arranged as indicated in t 
 
 lers being about two yards apart and th 
 s placed about two yards, and the half-1 
 
 QB looks to the one side and then to the 
 
 ;rtain whether the ball is to be passed t< 
 field. He then puts the ball in play as 
 ; pass to LH, who receives it on the run 
 
 co 
 
 v: 
 
 fl 
 
 '1 
 
 eJ 
 t3 
 
 rt 
 O 
 
 '"H 
 
 V. 
 
 The instant the ball is in play every p. 
 5 indicated, except RE, who stands st 
 
 ind close to the side lines, unobserved 
 i across the field. 
 
 It is of no consequence if only a small 
 
 kness of the following play for success, 
 tion in the line, and without waiting fo 
 
 a long pass made by QB straight across 
 run and has the entire field before him. 
 
 1 
 
 ^H 4J 
 
 s 
 
 1 >ss 
 
 >, ^ 
 
 .2 G 
 
 a 
 
 || 
 
 1/3 G 
 
 2 8 
 
 W ^ 
 
 H 
 
 
 & H <u 
 
 
 y (D 
 
 M 
 
 -- 
 
 0> 
 
 O f3 
 
 
 3 'o 
 
 ^ 0) 
 
 
 
 
 3 , w C 
 
 tH fo S 
 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 
 G 
 
 '- - Gj 
 
 
 a* &< 
 
 c J 
 
 03 *J 
 
 3
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 o;
 
 185 
 
 2 
 "3 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 
 ossible. 
 
 6 
 
 -y. 
 
 9 
 
 OH 
 1 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 OH 
 
 43 
 
 "rt 
 
 
 its formation, and 
 
 '3; 
 
 OH 
 
 a 
 
 h 
 
 ^rf 
 
 a 
 
 "d 
 
 tightly with both 
 his entire weight 
 
 . run in a compact 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 OH 
 
 O t/J : 
 
 ^ <! be - -ti u 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 IH 
 
 0) 
 
 tT 
 
 a 
 
 .9 
 
 
 _c 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 tn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4J 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 from the cente 
 
 bound togethel 
 
 '1 
 
 bt 
 
 d 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 idy to receive it, 
 
 act mass, preser 
 
 :um to advance 1 
 
 is stomach, clas 
 
 O 
 
 C 
 
 E 
 
 0) 
 
 1 
 
 "S 
 <- 
 i- 
 
 OH 
 1) 
 0> 
 
 
 Iginated at Princet 
 
 ,> 
 
 ^ 
 
 PI 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 OH 
 
 -*-> 
 
 & 
 
 - 
 
 S 
 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 4> 
 
 1 
 
 ^' 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 4) 
 
 
 O 
 
 c 
 
 T3 
 
 ^ 
 
 ti 
 
 Oj 
 
 ^2 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 . -rt 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 4) 
 
 
 H 
 
 s 
 
 <* *s 
 
 . 
 
 
 o3 tr. 
 O <u 
 
 | 
 
 __ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 .s 
 
 ^- 
 3 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 bO o 
 
 6 
 
 "rt 
 
 
 "s 
 
 |.. * Princeton opening 
 
 To send the wedge straight dc 
 
 *p 
 
 "o 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 
 d 
 p 
 
 
 "7. 
 in 
 c 
 O 
 
 "3 
 ^ 
 
 5 
 u 
 "3 
 
 i 
 
 "8 
 
 
 
 J 
 >> 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 J: 
 
 C 
 
 o< 
 
 3 
 
 the entire wedge rushes forwa 
 
 savors by mere force of weight 
 
 straight towards the opponent's 
 QB upon receiving the ball pi 
 Is and charges forward with 
 i behind. 
 
 1 
 j-j 
 
 t 
 "rt 
 
 ot 
 
 
 
 4J 
 HH 
 
 M 
 
 JE 
 
 s, preserving the formation. 
 
 The wedge formation at the center 
 
 m 
 
 
 'x 
 
 EH 
 
 
 1 
 
 >, 
 
 d 
 
 "On 
 
 w 
 
 a 
 
 C 
 4) 
 
 Wl 
 
 JH 
 
 ll 
 
 
 i 
 
 *
 
 s 
 

 
 187 
 
 
 4-t 4) 
 
 1> O ,r 4^ ^ *O *V 4) 
 
 
 fajQ 
 
 -fl*C ^ O ^3 flrrfb/) 
 
 
 d *g 
 
 S2. s i"l" 8 H 
 
 
 J3 
 
 S 3<" M SB* 
 
 
 in . 
 
 J3 
 
 |& Ul i = 
 
 
 VM 
 
 g -g ^^^ ^- & a 
 
 
 bo ~ 
 
 r O fe i^ ^ *4-* ^7^ ^fj 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 'S ^ 
 
 .S| JBe5 s l 5 ^! 
 
 v*\ 
 
 & s 
 
 rr-i^ "^-^O 4> t ' 1 'r! 
 
 T ' 
 
 y >*> 
 
 Te * oejc -M fe 
 
 J-H *V X t-> ** i-t ^ r-* >W 
 
 ale modification of Princeton we( 
 
 rs in one very important respect from the pr 
 wedge formation the guards are placed OK 
 
 ball is put in play, LG and RG spring forwa 
 opposing guard and center midway betwee 
 ir opponents start. 
 ly into his man and attempts to throw him 1 
 c in the same manner, attempts to throw hit 
 ncing immediately behind is thus saved the s 
 ds under full headway, 
 charge thus at an angle slightly to the rigt 
 c and RG or c and LG, as the case may be. 
 highly desirable that the men without the 
 found more advantageous to place the tack 
 these positions, while the guards are retain 
 
 > 
 
 I J 
 
 |!|Ji!lirpf 
 
 iA 
 m 
 
 lb 
 
 T3 -M 
 
 ^flS.y^&wWJtuC^bc 
 ^gc^tng-bC.CbOg-^gS 
 ij-tj'-'feCJLi r Ocn r O5r'C4J 
 
 
 ^ rf 
 
 Cui^-j^c^mouO 
 
 
 ? fl, 
 
 -S-ScgBa^^^Sw--^ 3 
 
 
 5 
 
 l^'^S'^bO^o'^'SH^- 
 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 :>> r- 1 -rl rt 2* S w _S O 00 fc 
 
 __^ *^^ fl\ ' L. ' ^ *- fl-i *+ ^f. V *M ^. 
 
 
 H bo 
 
 ^H Sj-^J-^e'^e n^^-S-^ 
 
 
 Q 
 
 D T3C OJ *J -rt "S> 
 
 
 
 C 0) 'R 4> ^ -^ 9 -rt 
 
 
 2 
 
 ^ CO r-< ^' crt S5 43 
 
 13 ^o. 8 & 2 'Ocs
 
 189
 
 191 
 
 !_ 
 OS 
 
 1i 
 
 
 
 
 
 a S 
 
 4-1 4-1 
 
 11 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 o 
 ^- 
 
 1 
 
 "oS 
 
 
 S 0) 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 '/- 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 6 
 
 _d 
 
 o 
 
 4^ 
 
 1 
 
 T3 ^ 
 <-l ^ 
 
 *^ cj 
 
 
 1 
 a 
 So 
 o> 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 i* 
 
 03 o 
 ^ +5 
 tfl 
 
 yr by touchin 
 ing it back. 
 
 ill have had 
 will be upon 
 
 tid seizing RI 
 LE follows 
 
 a 
 
 M 
 l 
 
 ^ 
 
 '5 
 
 o" 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 4-4 
 
 O 
 0) 
 
 "be 
 
 1 
 I 
 
 C 
 
 0? 
 
 a 
 
 13 
 
 
 ^>x> 
 
 
 
 
 *^ 13 
 
 jS -^ 
 
 ^ to 
 
 S3 a) 
 
 rr-t 
 
 1 
 
 C 
 
 oS 
 
 J: 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 1 8 
 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 CX tH 
 
 <y 
 
 c IS 
 
 >-SJ tO 
 
 p 
 
 c 
 
 ^J 
 
 5 
 
 .% 
 
 !_i 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 | 
 
 S 'c 
 
 O* u. 
 
 
 . 
 
 4J 
 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 'ay 
 
 r~ 
 
 
 Z. 
 
 ^ 
 
 *-> 
 
 i-, 
 
 'It 
 
 ^ 
 
 o5 
 
 > 
 
 
 i 
 
 g 
 
 1 
 w 
 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 N-S 
 
 ^1 
 
 ^ 
 
 t/3 T3 
 
 II 
 
 r& 
 
 zi n/j 
 
 3 jf 
 
 *^ bJO 
 
 CO (_ 
 
 "^ o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 to 
 0) 
 
 O 
 
 4-1 
 
 mation 
 
 03 
 
 "K* T^J 
 
 
 "x 
 
 c 
 
 TJ to 
 
 -M ^H 
 
 fH 
 
 d 
 
 oj 
 
 ,f! 
 
 (H 
 
 & & 
 
 bO 2 
 
 *o '-3 
 
 ^ " 
 *Kt O 
 
 
 3 
 
 t. 
 
 v S 
 -1 
 
 bO . 
 
 c ? 
 
 03 ^ 
 
 to" 0) 
 
 || 
 
 1 
 
 
 -o 
 13 
 
 0) 
 
 
 B 
 
 8; 
 
 bii 
 
 *~- G 
 
 
 i 
 
 ,e 
 
 H-l 
 
 C 
 
 11 
 
 ^ 
 
 _r"| '^ 
 
 to "*" 
 
 fl 
 <D 
 
 G 5 "! 
 
 T3 
 gl 
 
 5 
 
 0) 
 
 4-> 
 
 q 
 
 & 
 
 4-> 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 r2 
 
 
 rt 
 
 ex o 
 
 C ^ 
 
 3 
 
 -H > 
 
 73 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 ex 
 
 2 "^ 
 
 c 
 
 
 to ^ 
 
 D * J 
 
 aj ^ 
 
 to ~ 
 
 ^ *S 
 
 09 
 
 a 
 
 .ti ^ 
 
 
 C 
 ^ 
 
 OT ^_, 
 
 "c 
 
 9 
 
 4) 
 
 3 
 
 > -^ 
 
 0) C* 
 
 4J <4H 
 
 
 ? 
 
 'o 
 
 ^1 
 
 ^ 
 
 1) VH 
 
 0) S 
 
 >, 
 
 5 
 
 
 4-1 a 
 
 a "^ 
 
 C O 
 
 ^ 
 
 fe 
 
 
 ~-s 
 
 13 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 "^ 
 
 X> eg 
 
 g oS 
 
 to "3 
 
 Sfi 
 
 c g 
 
 'p l 
 
 03 
 
 JjH j 
 
 <O "^ 
 
 <w 
 
 5 
 
 5 D 
 
 (1) 
 
 ? p 
 
 .^ o 
 
 7* 
 
 8 U 
 
 (0 
 
 0) 
 
 'to 
 
 2 44 
 
 z 
 
 
 0) 
 TJ ^ 
 
 'to T <~; 
 
 !-l "*" 
 
 C jj 1 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ o 
 
 rt 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 '"^ ^ 
 
 0) 4J 
 
 4- 
 
 ^ c/3 
 
 c? 
 
 i 
 
 *w *-< 
 
 
 V 
 
 ,C 
 
 OS t) 
 
 4J ? 
 
 
 r y 
 
 ^ 
 
 4- ^" 
 
 g 
 
 g 
 
 ** 4) 
 
 in > 
 
 to 
 
 !^ 
 
 _2" 
 
 "5 
 
 tfl > 
 
 1 
 
 0> ~- 
 
 _(-, 
 
 S 
 
 .2 g 
 
 p 
 
 o. 
 
 0) 
 
 
 1) 4) 
 
 c fe 
 
 .S 
 
 X J 
 
 -^ 5 
 
 O ^3 
 
 rr< ' ' 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 "^ XI 
 
 G 
 
 
 j 
 
 ~'% 
 
 g 
 
 be 
 
 'd 
 
 The formatior 
 
 arranged so that t 
 brace themselves 
 
 c 
 
 U 
 S| 
 
 
 ea 
 
 tackles, and half-bj 
 row unobstructed 
 
 V 'fj 
 
 0) 0) 
 u 4^ 0) 
 
 S o o 
 
 S ^oS -^ 
 
 2 O ^ 
 
 the same moment 
 time to secure the 
 
 go" 5 
 
 f J3 
 1 8 
 
 I-! 
 
 <4-l C 
 
 o c 
 
 X J 
 0) 0) 
 
 g^ J3 
 03 4-< 
 
 mediately behind 
 apex, and QB direc 
 to the original dire 
 
 4) 
 
 rG 
 g 
 
 
 
 that the second we 
 utmost speed.
 
 OJ 
 
 4-> 
 
 C 
 o 
 V 
 
 4-> 
 
 ts 
 
 60 
 a> 
 
 II 
 
 ^ <fl 
 
 Wl 5> J 
 
 o ic^'g 
 
 5 $ o 
 " rt *"" - 2 u 
 
 ^ fe 
 
 fH rt^ 
 
 C t- 
 
 Q *5? 3 
 
 OS 0) ^ 
 
 > X uj tn 
 55 cS a, rt 
 
 o ^ 
 
 U3 g 
 
 fe . 
 
 O ^ 
 
 ^ O- 
 
 1/3 o 
 
 01 
 
 O. 
 
 0) 
 
 OT 
 
 a -a 
 
 H "S >, 
 
 PH 
 
 ^s C 
 
 -M <u 
 
 e "tt 
 
 G (D 
 
 1.1 
 
 JJ ^ 
 
 00 
 
 m 
 
 a ss a 
 
 2i^ 
 
 OJ O 
 
 * .i2 
 <s ^ 
 
 .Si w 
 y H 
 .ts o 
 
 as ei
 
 '95 
 
 
 OJ G 
 
 <u 
 
 S, 
 
 J3 -S 1 
 1i> O 
 
 0) -!-> 
 
 
 I ^ 
 
 cS "pi* 
 
 a a 
 
 43 - 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Q 
 
 43 
 
 w 
 
 '35 
 
 4^ 
 
 *j a> 
 
 jj 
 
 
 "c 
 
 
 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 tn 'g 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 Cj 
 
 
 -4-> 
 
 nJ 
 g 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 <L> 
 
 S 
 
 0> 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 cd 
 
 e 
 
 4J 
 
 S 
 
 O 
 
 ~J >' 
 
 43 P 
 ( _O 
 
 rtl 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 < 
 
 _o 
 
 (H 
 
 .rrangem 
 
 : putting 
 
 ffective. 
 
 t. 
 
 bC 
 
 S-g 
 
 '- 0) 
 
 B S 
 
 2O 
 G 
 
 ) 0> ^ 
 ^3 C 
 
 C P 
 
 O w 
 
 s-s 
 
 H rrt 
 
 HI 
 
 a 
 
 .S 8 
 
 ^ S - c 
 
 a 5 o^g 
 p .s -s ' 
 a=3 s 
 
 m > 
 
 S 
 
 M S *^ X O 
 
 DOtu^DiU^OG 
 P G4^ ri.fa *-t^- 
 
 h -~ ..'. u rR rn T? fl 
 
 M 
 
 5 
 
 bo 
 
 cS 73 ^3 
 
 6 .S 
 
 rM f-* 
 
 ^> 
 
 CJ f^ 
 
 r-t *-
 
 197
 
 o
 
 199 
 
 ic center. 
 
 o 
 
 C 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 c 
 
 .0 
 
 irily the position of RG. 
 dashes forward, receive: 
 
 u/ 
 
 bo 
 
 .S 
 
 1 
 t/i 
 
 c" 
 
 13 C 
 a! - 
 
 o G 
 A a 
 2 fcj 
 
 .s 
 
 09 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 .3 
 T; 
 
 
 fc 
 
 * 
 li 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 -4->' 
 
 
 MJ 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 a 
 a. 
 
 1 
 
 be very effective to have 
 
 .2 
 n 
 
 G 
 
 o 
 
 9 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 i 
 
 "bo 
 
 .W) 
 
 'S 
 
 
 4-> 
 
 in 
 
 C 
 
 o 
 
 a 2 
 
 <c 
 
 c 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 rH 
 
 ;3 
 
 c 
 
 s 
 
 
 10 
 
 Jd 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 i-H 
 
 
 
 0,04 
 B 
 
 . 
 * J T3 
 
 J3 'd 
 'S G 
 
 jj '-i 
 
 bo 
 
 ^C 
 
 I 
 
 S 
 
 
 I 
 
 4J 
 
 C^ 
 
 y 
 
 d 
 
 IH 
 
 S 
 
 
 3 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 G 
 
 to 
 
 3 21 
 
 3 CH 
 
 G 
 
 U 1 
 
 "S^ 
 tt * 
 
 ta 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 -4-> 
 <H 
 
 aroun 
 
 M 
 
 
 e 
 
 03 
 
 '55 
 d 
 
 
 
 G I/I 
 
 rt tn 
 
 O'^^ 
 
 8 
 
 H 0) 
 
 .S 
 
 .9 
 
 
 rt 
 
 <2 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 c 
 p 
 
 t/5 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 oS 
 
 ,0 
 
 _> 
 ed 
 
 -u 
 
 aj 
 
 ^H 
 
 a 3 
 M 
 
 a> ^3 
 
 - G 
 O ^ 
 
 "o 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 a. 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 03 
 
 u 
 
 1 
 
 enter on 
 
 ^ 
 
 T3 
 
 M 
 
 
 CO 
 
 0. 
 
 8 
 
 o 
 
 center, 
 
 a g 
 
 (X 
 
 oj '55 
 
 s a 
 
 .s .S 
 
 8. 
 
 ^5 
 
 O >-( 
 
 (/i 
 g 
 
 "rt 
 
 G 
 
 a 
 
 j? 
 
 _rt J 
 
 "jjj 
 
 at the c 
 
 "o 
 
 d 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 OH 
 
 
 *a 
 i3 
 
 1 
 >f 
 
 * < 
 
 o.- 2 
 
 u ^ 
 
 ^ .3 
 S& 
 
 H 
 <y 
 
 13 
 
 .s 
 
 M 
 
 03 
 
 "E, 
 
 0) 
 
 H a 
 |S 
 
 "5: 
 
 G 
 (U 
 ,G 
 
 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 M 
 
 To send RG to buc 
 
 ces the position at R 
 As soon as RG is ii 
 
 it x, and plunges in 
 e hard* An openi 
 
 a 
 
 X 
 
 H) 
 
 K 
 W 
 
 VI 
 
 "3 
 .S 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 d 
 
 H 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 ^5 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 ^0 
 
 avy and powerful g 
 After RG has been 
 
 B 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 ,c 
 
 tfl 
 
 1 
 
 r3 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 rt 
 
 4-i 
 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 *See NOTE, diagram 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 .*! s 
 
 
 rt 
 U 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 & 

 
 :0
 
 
 t/: <u 
 
 ,* y 
 
 y c 
 
 c4 oj 
 
 5 S 
 
 2 S 
 
 ,0 
 
 be 
 a 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 OS 
 w 
 
 v 
 
 J3 
 j_> 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 ,0 
 
 "5 
 
 <M 
 
 i4 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 to 
 
 u 
 
 S 
 
 = 
 
 M 
 
 ~r d <u 
 5, &, bo 
 
 ^ -2 .3 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 -5- 
 J 
 
 y*J *"5 
 
 - 
 
 
 o 
 
 "H 
 ^ 
 
 0) 
 
 .d 
 
 
 HH 
 
 n opening on 
 
 a> 
 
 5 
 
 cT 
 < 
 o 
 *j 
 
 5"- 
 'C 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 CQ 
 fa 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 e8 J" 5 CX, 3 
 S y o '> rt y 
 
 s a -s ^. a 
 
 ^ 2 - *S 2 J 
 
 s 5 o a -^ 
 
 Cj *" S O *J 
 
 ^ X . bfl aS oj 
 
 a 2 3 wi! -3 
 
 .0 * - .S 5 
 
 > ^ o & 
 ^5 -a S " ^-^ G 
 
 11 out and receive 
 
 'S 
 
 to make a forward 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 en 
 
 J3 
 
 be 
 
 m 
 
 C 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 n 
 
 "3 fx 
 
 J2 .^^3 ^ 
 S' 3 ^* 
 
 5 ^ o *S 
 
 5^ 
 
 o 2 
 5 "3 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 >, 
 
 u 
 
 ^0 
 
 1 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 f. 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 n 
 a 
 
 IS 
 
 "S 
 jj 
 
 own op< 
 
 n 
 3 
 
 ^" 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 .-< fi* *H C 
 
 g g ^ cl 
 
 -a c d ^ 
 
 x ^ 
 
 59 
 
 g 
 
 iccessful 
 
 *d 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 >, 
 
 5 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 3 
 
 | 
 -*j 
 
 a 
 
 M 
 
 2 
 
 ja 
 
 to 
 
 I 
 
 ci 
 
 1 
 
 <j_i 
 
 01 
 
 fl) -4-* 
 
 > a, o 2 
 S & ** -9 
 
 y 
 y n % 
 
 > IS 
 
 a) 
 
 ^3 ^ 
 -r ,0 
 
 pj 
 
 r. 
 f. 
 r. 
 
 ^j 
 
 n 
 
 be 
 
 c 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 <*H 
 
 nost abso 
 
 must be t 
 
 i t 
 
 as 
 
 ,2 
 
 3 
 
 o 22 rj 
 *j fli 
 
 ' E 
 
 ^' 
 
 >. 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 * EH C 
 
 3 c3 .f C 
 
 OH O 
 
 O > 
 
 <u S? 
 
 "En 
 U 
 
 ej 
 
 'E, 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 
 
 l 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 3,5 " "S 
 
 5| 
 
 1 
 
 "S 
 o 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 H 
 
 ^o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 C C/3 " *^ 
 
 ^3 D 
 
 w 
 
 ,5 
 
 -^ 
 
 3 
 
 
 e 
 
 "S. 
 
 _Q 
 
 3 O 
 
 < 
 
 p 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bC ""*' 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 s .si 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 C 

 
 VbJ 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 =01
 
 203 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 +-< .5 
 o .3 
 
 13 rf bO 
 
 r 
 
 8-d o 
 
 rt O ;=! 
 
 t/3 ctf ra 
 
 *d 
 
 e 
 9 
 o 
 
 rt 
 
 C 
 
 o 
 
 rt ej 
 *1 
 * O 
 
 
 45 tn 
 
 O 
 
 oS o 
 
 * . - o 
 
 4) ^3 X. OJ 
 
 W< G ^^ ^H 
 
 ^ ?i rt 
 
 O d & 
 
 rt J> 5 S 
 - -S *j o 
 
 
 ^ oO 
 
 tD - 
 
 i 
 
 o a, a. 
 5 S 
 3/.a 
 
 P! 
 
 00 t/j <D 
 
 .a ; -3 
 i^^ 
 
 8 i ^ 
 . % 
 
 . y Ol 
 ^ -" P< 
 
 III 
 
 ^^s 
 
 > Q 05 
 
 _3 S 
 
 5 8 
 
 I s 1 
 
 ^1-S 
 
 N 
 
 8 S^ 5 
 11 
 
 D " 3 
 
 ^^S 
 
 a P w 
 11* 
 
 - .- . 
 
 10 
 
 a o 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 .2 
 
 ,G 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 H 
 
 bfl 
 
 +j 
 
 'rt 
 
 
 o 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 ^c 
 
 ^ "55 2 
 
 ^ g,^ 
 
 o o. r\ 
 
 F 
 
 9 
 
 be 
 a 
 
 'S 
 
 0) 
 T3 
 
 be 
 
 1 
 
 "i 
 
 ,s 
 
 
 1 
 
 1? 
 
 . 
 
 O 
 a) 
 5 
 o> 
 
 darts ti 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 -i-> 
 A 
 be 
 
 in waiti 
 
 2 
 
 rt 
 
 e 
 
 rt 
 <u 
 
 1 
 
 .2 
 
 ^ 
 
 u 
 
 <; 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 H <J 
 
 j-;, 
 
 n 
 
 SB 
 
 3 
 
 to 
 
 r^ 
 
 V 
 
 s 
 
 'J2 
 o 
 
 -4-J 
 
 
 o 
 
 ja 
 
 e 
 
 a 
 
 P 
 
 (4 
 
 "8 
 
 'c 
 
 1 
 
 4) 
 
 5 
 
 h 
 
 -W 
 
 c 
 
 7) 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 0>
 
 -o
 
 205 
 
 .s 
 
 .C 
 
 bo 
 
 3 
 o 
 
 u 
 43 
 
 Ml 
 
 .53 a 
 
 q 2 
 
 - 
 
 I 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 - 
 
 -4- S 
 
 d -S 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 *-i -s o 
 
 -^ >< :!: i i 
 
 3 
 
 -4-> 
 
 _d 
 
 <y CQ 
 
 Cj 
 
 g 
 
 O 
 
 _G 
 
 A 
 
 ~j m 
 
 i9| 
 
 c >- "^ 
 
 1 Q 1-1 O 
 
 ^i "** .2 "*"" 
 
 oj *d J3 x 
 
 S, 
 
 d 
 
 0) 
 
 <ii 
 
 xi 
 
 - 
 
 a S 2 gl 
 
 s -s ^ >.-! 
 
 i 2 
 
 i- rt .h ^ W *> 
 
 rt 
 
 U3 
 
 <
 
 :oo 
 
 o: 
 
 " 
 
 ' \
 
 207 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 (D D 
 
 S 
 
 (fl o 
 
 (D 5 
 
 <4H "* 
 
 Si 
 
 0) t-< 
 
 Q) 1_( 
 
 -d o 
 '55 a) 
 <u g 
 
 S -S 
 
 "o 
 
 
 U3 "^ 
 O J 
 
 2 ^_, 
 o 
 
 in the oppo- 
 
 03 
 0) 
 
 '51 
 a) 
 
 J2 
 
 <i> 
 
 "2 
 '53 
 
 'd 
 
 1 
 
 ct 
 
 a 
 IS 
 
 ry line as he 
 
 
 -2 
 
 cj *a 
 
 , 
 
 S 
 
 
 oj .S 
 
 M 
 
 "*"* 
 
 r^ 
 
 ? 
 
 rt 
 
 (U* 
 
 s 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 tn" 3 
 d O 
 
 a *" 
 
 o .Q 
 
 S 1 
 
 C .4^| 
 
 tn ui 
 
 *s 
 
 _0 
 
 a> 
 
 to di 
 ^3 J> 
 'o u 
 
 o 
 
 T3 
 
 e 
 
 3 
 
 ^3 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 | 
 
 ~H 
 
 d 
 
 _o 
 
 tn 
 
 *S 
 
 E 
 
 p 
 
 -J 
 
 O 
 
 C 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 cS 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 4> 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 *O ^ 
 
 a u) 
 
 y 
 
 0) 
 
 c S 
 
 og 
 
 aj 
 
 C 
 
 in 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 4J ^ 
 
 4J . 
 
 ~ 
 
 ^ 
 
 S3 
 
 J^' 
 
 Wl 
 
 OS 
 
 
 o 
 
 'w 
 
 *s 
 
 4-J 
 
 3 C 
 O 
 
 tn p , 
 
 y O 
 
 p 
 
 .s 
 
 fo 
 
 1 
 
 .2 
 
 be 
 
 % 
 
 o 
 
 J3 
 
 
 
 j-l *" 
 
 PH CJ 
 
 O 
 
 
 IH 
 
 CJ 
 
 2 . 
 
 y. 
 
 tn 
 
 CCI 
 
 o> 
 
 t 
 
 * 
 
 v; 
 
 "o & 
 
 3 
 
 'd 
 
 ^ 
 
 j>* 5 
 
 'H 
 
 4_> 
 
 rS 
 
 ** 
 
 to 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 f; 
 ^ 
 
 
 0) O 
 X! +- 1 
 * J >, 
 bfi-d 
 
 O 1 O 1 0> 
 
 S'sl 
 
 ^ 
 
 c" 
 
 4-1 
 
 'S-l 
 
 I; 
 A 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 2" ' 
 
 a 
 m 
 X! 
 
 5 
 
 4-> 
 
 C 
 
 a 
 
 "3, 
 
 tfl 
 
 O 
 
 - 
 U 
 
 5 
 
 (3 
 O 
 ,4 
 
 
 >, 
 
 gj 
 
 'E, 
 to 
 
 V. 
 
 ;he field, keepin 
 in his hands rea 
 
 &r*i 
 
 ^ ^ otc 
 
 _tn o r^ ^ 
 
 a ^ S a 
 S o <u i> 
 
 gS* a 
 
 cJ o -d 
 
 losely and solidl 
 
 !fi tn 
 
 O 1) 
 
 I* 
 
 "75 
 
 -S 
 
 a 
 
 ED 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 PH 
 
 a 
 
 t/i 
 
 d 
 
 01 
 
 0) 3 
 
 """ .2 
 
 
 
 ^ tn 
 O w 
 
 th equal success 
 
 e greatest care 
 
 to 
 
 
 u 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 , o g 
 
 ^ r^\ 
 
 4? 
 
 u 
 
 a ^a 
 
 JH 
 
 3 
 
 *d tn" 
 t-4 tn 
 
 cj Cj 
 
 '$ 
 
 5 
 
 'C 
 U 
 
 in 
 
 r. 
 
 53 
 o 
 
 
 IS .Q 
 
 . 0) 
 
 c4 C ? 
 
 " ,n 4-> 
 
 !>, 
 
 t/3 "tj *t5 
 
 'C 
 
 S 
 i> 
 
 
 
 d 
 o 
 
 tn *O 
 
 '" u 
 1 | 
 
 f. 
 
 
 A 
 
 FB reaches 
 
 cS >, 
 
 ^ a 
 
 S f 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 s . 
 
 SCO 
 0) 
 
 <u .a 
 
 o 
 
 JH 
 
 5 
 
 4J 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 8"o1 
 *w 
 
 1^ 2 
 
 B.g| 
 
 ^ 
 
 *^ 
 
 *S 
 
 0) ^ 
 
 5 ,a 
 
 4_) 
 
 -4-" 
 
 
 IS 
 
 a| 
 
 O (1) 
 
 a^ 
 
 X! 
 .fa ^ 
 
 ^ *-< 
 u tn 
 
 ** 
 
 S 
 
 
 o 
 
 3 t/2 
 
 C 4-1 
 
 ^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 to 
 
 4-> XI 
 
 a 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 o a 
 
 ctf ^3 -Ji 
 
 u 
 
 ,i 
 
 O y 
 
 p 
 
 fll "tn 
 
 
 4) O 
 
 H 
 
 
 r c 
 
 4> 
 
 *3 '^ x 
 
 2 &H 
 
 01 
 
 1 
 
 ^ -d 
 
 'So 
 
 |l> 
 
 a J 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 rt * 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 
 
 j: 
 
 S 
 
 *d 
 
 
 
 0) 0) 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 "E, o 
 
 ti S 
 
 rt 
 
 p 
 
 o, 
 
 in 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 ? a 
 tn V3 
 
 IH 
 O 

 
 209
 
 <U 
 
 bo 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 * 
 v 
 
 G 
 
 V 
 
 J3 
 
 4-1 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 u, 
 
 
 4- 
 
 G 
 <L) 
 U 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 nl 
 
 X 
 
 '7. 
 
 t- 
 y, 
 '7. 
 
 B 
 9 
 
 & 
 
 ^a 
 
 _e 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 f 
 
 -ward several times in succession for short gains 
 osing LG has found the way to dive into it low 
 t the signal for the play, RG allows his opponent 
 j ball is snapped, without resistance, and then 
 cks his man and forces him hard to the left. 
 
 1 to LE (instead of FB), who immediately darts 
 
 H 
 
 id 
 G 
 
 a 
 
 M *J 
 
 (i. iG 
 
 >^ 
 ^1 (U 
 
 0) * J 
 
 c_r n> 
 
 i) 
 1 
 
 
 
 ,2 
 
 10 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 to 
 
 -j; 
 
 1 
 
 4) 
 
 ^ 
 
 C 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ? 
 
 H 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 Q 
 
 PH C5 S 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 "+J 
 
 " 
 
 2 
 
 *^- ^ ^ 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 
 2 
 c 
 
 ci 
 -C 
 
 c 
 
 to 
 
 V 
 
 bfl 
 
 "bo 
 
 "3 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 i "S IS *J 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 2 
 
 _^> 
 
 o 
 
 ^C 
 
 U 
 
 C .5?'Sj 
 
 p 
 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 "E, 
 
 .* 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 -f 
 
 . - 'C 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 1 
 
 ^T 
 
 fl 
 
 CJ 
 
 '5 
 
 3 
 
 ,{3 "E S fl> 
 
 Oi 
 
 fli 
 
 M 
 
 r^ 
 
 rt 
 
 0) 
 
 _J-j t-, 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 5 ^ S 
 ** s ^ -B 
 
 - 
 
 -9 
 
 -a 
 
 6,1 
 
 O
 
 "*J_ 
 
 -.O 
 
 -o-o 
 
 So 
 
 o
 
 213 
 
 'S fl > U3 
 ft en !> 13
 
 215 
 
 s-s s 
 
 H 
 
 * * t-4 
 
 C 
 
 rS 03 ' 
 
 | SP 
 
 5 "3 
 
 u c 
 
 o 
 c 
 
 -a 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 nJ 
 
 (U 
 
 *a 
 
 c 
 
 rt 
 4) 
 
 bo 
 
 d 
 
 9 
 
 - e a! p ^5 y 
 rt =J 1 - ^ O S 
 
 | 8 
 
 l^ 
 .2 & 
 
 g-S 
 | 
 
 s< 
 
 w 
 
 c8 . 
 
 l! 
 
 g a 
 
 5 a 
 
 tn tn 
 
 .S o 
 
 '7. 
 
 <L> tn 
 
 M 
 
 b ^t 
 
 ^ s 
 
 d, n- 
 
 5 -o 
 
 ^H C tn 
 bo 'S -rH 
 
 jirf 
 
 -d ^2 cs 
 
 fl T3 - 
 
 ' rt 3 
 
 III 
 
 1/3 -2 
 
 to 4! 2 
 
 oJ bo 3 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 d c 
 
 O rt ^ 
 
 s s 
 
 s s - 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 8 H 
 
 .2 '^ -2 
 
 <u '35 
 
 bo o 
 
 cffj o- 
 
 ^ tn 
 
 a -2 
 
 o d / 
 
 i-| 4) 
 
 "*3 ^-T > 
 
 | Jl 
 
 ^ J ^ 
 
 0) -S M 
 
 -3 bo 
 .5 t3 
 
 o 
 
 -S 5 
 
 n3 
 
 | a 
 
 *cu 
 
 D 
 
 illl 
 
 . 3 ft 
 
 a5 2 ^S 
 
 u? S S <P 
 
 ill! 
 
 n ^ W> 
 
 * 3 8| 
 cSlo^^ 
 
 " .9 
 
 /M bo 'C 
 ^ tn C .2 
 c bO'in f 
 6 q g >, 
 
 tn 
 
 X CD 
 
 " 
 
 Q a 
 
 j-. 
 
 s 
 
 0> 
 
 a> <2 
 4-1 ti 
 p< C 3 
 
 elS 
 
 O P H 
 
 * ' rt 5 
 s 2 e 
 
 BH D 
 
 111 
 
 ^ 5 g 
 
 tn < 
 
 ^ -S -3 
 0$% 
 
 .S p cj 
 
 0) 
 
 ^5 
 
 'd *4_, 
 
 d; ^ 
 
 bO -a
 
 216 
 
 CO 
 
 
 tid center on his own side. 
 
 nd tackle on his own side, 
 nd end on his own side. 
 
 -d' 
 
 
 jy 
 
 o 
 
 c" 
 o 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 Lf 
 
 5 
 'c 
 o 
 o 
 
 'd 
 
 nd tackle on the opposite side, 
 nd end on the opposite side. 
 
 iite end. 
 
 
 )etwen center and guard. 
 d and tackle. 
 
 d 
 
 G 
 
 1 
 ^ 
 
 *^\* 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 <u 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 UJ 
 
 Q 
 
 
 _* 
 
 3 
 
 flu 
 
 u- 
 
 
 X 
 
 UJ 
 
 Q 
 Z 
 
 FIRST SERIES. 
 
 If-back between guard 
 
 If-back between guard 
 If-back between tackle 
 
 If-back around his own 
 
 SECOND SERIES 
 
 If-back between guard 
 
 If-back between guard 
 If-back between tackle 
 
 cx 
 
 & 
 
 0) 
 
 J3 
 
 d 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 d 
 
 4^ 
 O 
 
 d 
 ^p 
 
 THIRD SERIES. 
 
 1-back through the line 
 1-back between the gu 
 
 Ll-back between the tac 
 ll-back around the end. 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 ffi K 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 
 d 
 
 H 
 
 cj rt 
 
 K ffi 
 
 d 
 
 K 
 
 
 pT^ fj. 
 
 fafa 
 
 
 
 ci 
 
 4o 
 
 06 
 
 
 eJ 
 
 4^d 
 
 co' 
 
 
 4 
 
 O CO 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 J 3 ' 
 
 d d 
 
 
 
 ,J 
 
 r c3 r o 
 
 d 
 
 
 id 
 
 d d 
 
 13 
 
 
 d -d 
 
 "^ *X? 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 C S3 
 
 c 
 
 
 Q 
 
 G C 
 
 C 
 
 
 c c 
 
 C G 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 d d 
 
 d d 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 co vn 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 M 
 
 CO W> 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 M CO 
 
 m r- 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 d d 
 
 d d 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 g ^ 
 
 
 
 
 H ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ J5 
 
 ^1 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 217 
 
 
 
 
 'd d ^4 
 b * J w 
 
 g T3 5 
 
 
 p 
 be 
 
 and tackle, 
 and end. 
 
 
 
 "*-* "^ " 
 
 8 M ctf G 
 -M tl) 
 
 C C G 
 d d d 
 
 
 G 
 4) 
 
 d 
 
 G 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 G 
 S 
 
 S c 
 
 J2 ^ 
 
 11 
 
 d J3 
 
 ClT ^ 
 
 
 bC S rrt 
 
 
 J3 
 
 *d vl) 
 
 
 
 m rr-* t\\ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 G r- 
 
 FOURTH SERIES. 
 
 between center and opposite 
 between the opposite guard 
 between the opposite end am 
 around the opposite end. 
 
 FIFTH SERIES. 
 
 le between center and opposi 
 
 le between the opposite guar 
 le between the opposite tackl 
 
 le around the opposite end. 
 
 SIXTH SERIES. 
 
 d between the opposite guarc 
 d between the opposite guarc 
 d between the opposite tackl< 
 d around the opposite end. 
 
 SEVENTH SERIES. 
 
 -cross half-back play around 
 
 criss-cross with half-back in 
 
 le criss-cross with half-back i 
 d criss-cross with half-back ii 
 
 
 13 '^ *^ *^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 
 jj 
 
 
 d d d d 
 
 
 J 
 
 r. 
 
 si 
 
 ^ 
 
 *o d 
 
 
 C C C C 
 
 
 X 
 
 d d 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 "T~ 
 
 
 d fl 
 
 
 H W W K 
 
 
 
 e> e 
 
 *" 
 
 
 O O O O 
 
 
 '5 
 
 W 
 
 h O 
 
 
 W rf vd OO 
 
 
 N 
 
 40 
 
 06 
 
 
 vN ^- O CO 
 
 
 <N 
 
 4 
 
 O oo 
 
 
 d d d d 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 dodo 
 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 C 
 
 
 5 ^ ^ J5 
 
 
 X 
 
 J5 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ 5 <5 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 *d T3 T3 T3 
 
 
 d 
 
 *d T3 
 
 r^J 
 
 
 Tj 'd ti T3 
 
 
 r^; 
 
 , ' 
 
 ^^ *"O 
 
 
 G C C C 
 
 
 a 
 
 c c 
 
 P 
 
 
 C G G G 
 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 G C 
 
 
 d d d d 
 
 
 3 
 
 d d 
 
 ot 
 
 
 d d d d 
 
 
 a 
 
 rt 
 
 d d 
 
 
 c<i m j^ 
 
 
 H 
 
 w m 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 M en in r- 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 in t^ 
 
 
 d d d d 
 
 
 d 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 o o o c 
 
 
 O. 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 
 55 
 
 S* 
 
 
 
 ^fcfcfc 
 
 
 
 fe 
 
 ^ fc 
 
 
 CO ^ U^ v^ 
 
 
 E 
 
 CO O 
 
 (-( M 
 
 fi 
 
 
 M IN C^ Tf 
 IN IN IN IN 
 
 
 M 
 
 c< 
 
 r- co 
 
 IN C)
 
 218 
 
 
 
 0* 0* 
 
 D <u 
 
 S Hi 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 ^ t i 
 
 Pt 13, 5 
 
 | .a | 
 
 C Q T3 
 " <D C 
 ^ 0) S 
 
 :nd in play around the opposite 
 
 *. 
 
 
 
 0> 
 
 rS 
 
 T3 
 
 o 
 ft 
 
 05 
 
 ClJ 
 
 "E, 
 
 c 
 
 ; tackle in play around the op- 
 
 -back in play around the end. 
 ull-back in play around the end. 
 alf-back in play around the end. 
 
 0) 
 Q 
 
 o fs 
 
 ?2 ^ 
 
 _e 
 
 & 
 
 w 
 
 a) 
 
 
 5 
 
 rfi 
 
 3 **-< 
 
 S 5 
 
 o 
 
 cc 
 
 
 O 
 
 EIGHTH SERIE 
 
 Half-back criss-cross wit 
 
 site end. 
 Full-back criss-cross wit 
 
 site end. 
 Ends criss-cross and plaj 
 
 Tackle criss-cross with t 
 end. 
 
 Guard criss-cross with 
 
 
 o> 
 
 _o 
 
 '/; 
 
 1 
 
 .2 
 
 O D 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 EH 
 
 NINTH SERIE! 
 
 Double pass from end to 
 Double pass from tackle 
 
 Double pass from guard 
 
 TENTH SERIE 
 
 a 
 
 ? 
 
 ^ 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 M 
 
 Feint run around the en< 
 Revolving wedge from a 
 
 c c 
 
 o5 oS 
 
 d o o 
 
 ^^ ^ 
 
 rrt r ri r C3 
 
 c c; c 
 
 oj oj cj 
 
 O O O 
 
 fc 55 5?
 
 219 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 fi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 7' 
 
 
 -% 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0> 
 
 
 C 
 & 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 IB 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 l , 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 ^ *d n> 
 
 
 |4 
 
 -r d 
 
 
 'd 
 
 
 3 
 
 c 
 
 
 0> 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 G o 
 
 
 fl 
 
 S 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 0> 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 'g 0) <D 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 . D 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 - 0) 
 
 J3 
 
 
 *- 
 
 ELEVENTH SERIES. 
 
 Lifting wedge through the center 
 Wedge from the center around th 
 
 Quarter-back around the end fron 
 
 Feint play from the wedge. 
 Wedge at the end of the line. 
 
 S-l 
 
 0) 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 .c 
 -d 
 
 G 
 
 a 
 g 
 
 cS 
 
 ^ 
 
 TWELFTH SERIES. 
 
 mass wedge through the center. 
 Running mass wedge between gu 
 Running mass wedge directly at 
 Running mass wedge directly at 1 
 
 THIRTEENTH SERIES. 
 
 Free opening play from the cente 
 Double pass opening play from tl 
 
 -M 
 
 u 
 
 *J 
 
 "G 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 1 
 bo 
 
 0) 
 
 O 
 
 FOURTEENTH SERIES. 
 
 opening wedge from the center of 
 ification of Princeton wedge. 
 
 
 
 
 . d 
 
 M 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 
 
 
 8*8 
 
 
 ci 4 
 
 o 
 
 CO M 
 
 o 
 
 
 C< co m r^ 
 
 
 ci 4 
 
 vd 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 ^0 
 
 o 
 
 h H 
 
 z 
 
 
 C o O d 
 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 <H 
 
 nd 
 
 
 <5 55 55 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 'd -d 
 
 d 
 
 'd *d 
 
 G 
 
 
 pr *x3 'd *d 
 
 
 T3 T3 
 
 'd 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 C G 
 
 2 
 
 c c 
 
 e4 
 
 
 c c c 
 
 
 G C 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 c3 cS 
 
 
 oj j 
 
 
 
 OB GQ OQ 
 
 
 03 ol 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 
 
 M CO 
 
 in 
 
 r- 
 
 " 
 
 
 ~ n rf & 
 
 
 11 CO 
 
 in 
 
 
 w ci 
 
 
 O O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 6 6 6 
 
 
 d- d 
 
 d 
 
 
 ^p 
 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 55 55 
 
 55 
 
 
 55 55 55 55 
 
 
 55 55 
 
 55 
 

 
 220 
 
 Princeton split wedge. 
 
 o c 
 J 5 ^ 
 
 1 ' 
 
 a5 *P< ' 
 
 $ 
 
 s> rs 
 
 CO 
 +j 
 
 "S. >d 
 
 ^ ,3 
 
 J.YliC>^E/Lil>.tt.rN C/WUO. 
 
 Hard running wedge with loose formation. 
 
 6 
 
 | 
 
 o 
 
 fcc 
 a 
 
 ', 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 <j 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 rt 
 ,0 
 
 1 
 
 '^ 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 Guard through his opening on the same side. 
 Full-back feints a kick and runs around the end. 
 
 1 
 
 Q 
 
 S 
 
 w 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 1 \ 
 
 I.I [ 
 
 ^ t 
 
 ^-> *& * 
 T3 'a $ 
 
 13 ! 
 
 si 
 
 a 43 fc 
 ^5 >> c 
 
 <S ^ 
 M 
 
 O O 
 
 - ' 
 2 o 
 
 fc O 
 
 Q 
 
 q 
 
 -( 
 
 4 
 tj 
 
 <u 
 
 c ^ 
 
 H <1) 
 
 ?;. ^ 
 d m 
 
 L3 
 
 r *o 
 ^ i-. 
 
 -" ci 
 
 L( > 
 
 CS 
 ffi 
 
 C 
 
 ed 
 
 <H 
 
 a 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 n 
 M 
 
 a 
 
 p 
 
 "3 
 o 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 M 
 
 a 
 u 
 
 fa 
 
 4- 
 
 d 
 
 
 ci 
 
 and No. 6. Feint wedge and full-back between opposite guard and 
 tr 
 
 and No. 8. Feint wedge and tackle around the end. 
 
 tn 
 
 T* in 
 
 M , 
 
 c3 
 
 to 
 
 ^ in 
 
 r- 
 
 1-1 
 
 CO 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 O ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 c 
 55 
 
 o 
 
 C O 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 ^o 
 
 55 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 55 
 
 ir, 
 
 r-~ co 
 m in 
 
 o 
 
 in 
 
 ,x 
 
 3 
 
 N CO 
 
 Tf in 
 
 o 
 
 i - 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 &
 
 TEAM PLAY. 
 
 American football is pre-eminently a game for the 
 practice and display of what is known as ' ' team play. " No 
 other game can compare with it in this particular. Not 
 that the individual element in skill, in physical capacities, 
 in strategy, and headwork are overlooked, but these are 
 made subservient to the intent of the particular play in 
 hand, and so adjusted to that play as shall best contribute 
 to its success. To get eleven men to use their individual 
 strength, agility, and speed, their wit, judgment, and 
 courage, first in individual capacity, then working with 
 one or two companion players, then as eleven men work- 
 ing as one, is a magnificent feat in organization and 
 generalship. 
 
 The individual element, perhaps, is most prominently 
 set forth in defensive play, although there is abundant 
 opportunity in offensive play also for it to show itself; but 
 individual and team play are so closely joined, as a rule, 
 that the beauty of the latter is heightened as the individual 
 efforts of each player are perceived. In defensive work 
 the players have more reason to feel their individuality, 
 because they are often compelled to combat alone one or 
 more opponents before they can get an opportunity to 
 tackle the runner. The defensive system, however, gives 
 a splendid chance for clever team play in the placing of 
 the players, in the general and particular understanding 
 that certain men shall nearly always go through to tackle 
 behind the line; that certain others shall wait to see where 
 
 (221)
 
 222 
 
 the attack will be made and there hurl themselves against 
 it ; that others shall go through the line, or not, just as 
 it seems wisest at the time; and that still others shall 
 never involve themselves in the scrimmage, but act only 
 \\hen the play has been carried into their territory. 
 Furthermore, there is constant opportunity for the 
 exercise of team play in the working together of certain 
 players of the rush line in defense, and also in the work- 
 ing together of any two or three players at special times; 
 for example, when one or two men sacrifice themselves to 
 clearing away the interferers so that a companion can 
 tackle the runner; when one follows hard after the runner 
 to overtake him, if possible, even after having missed a 
 tackle; or helps check him from further advance when 
 tackled, or endeavors to secure the ball. 
 
 In the rush line the center and guards work together 
 in defense, having an understanding with each other and 
 with the player hovering in their rear, whenever it seems 
 best to try to let him through on the opposing quarter- 
 back or full-back, or whenever a special defense for certain 
 plays seems best. Likewise the ends and tackles are 
 closely joined in team play, in that they are the players 
 relied on to stop the end plays and those between tackle 
 and end. The most perfect adjustment and team work is 
 needed in doing this, for they play into each other's hands 
 while, at the same time, they seek to tackle the runner. 
 Similarly, but less closely, do the guards and tackles work 
 together in defense against certain plays. 
 
 It is an essential point in the working out of this 
 team play between the different parts of the rush line, 
 that the players study most carefully the positions they 
 should occupy to meet the different kinds of play how 
 far from each other they should stand for this play, how
 
 223 
 
 far for that. In doing this, they must have regard for 
 their own freedom to attack, not allowing themselves to 
 take a position where they can easily be tangled up, nor 
 one in which they can give their opponents an advantage 
 in blocking them. Except on wedge and mass plays, the 
 players in defense should draw their opponents apart 
 sufficiently to give themselves space to break through on 
 either side 
 
 The backs supplement the work of the rushers in 
 defensive play, arranging themselves behind the rush 
 line at such distances from each other and from the 
 forwards, as shall give the strongest defense. In that 
 degree in which they make their work strong in team 
 play, will they give the rushers encouragement and sup- 
 port in going through the line. The forwards will thus 
 be enabled to play as a unit, because* they know that 
 there is a reserve force directly behind them to lend 
 them assistance and make their play safe. 
 
 The backs work together in special defense on a kick, 
 arranging themselves, either one or both, in front of the 
 catcher to protect and encourage him, and to secure the 
 ball, if muffed; or one stands behind to make the play 
 safe, or to receive the ball on a pass from the catcher for 
 a run or kick. The ends sometimes come back with their 
 opponents at such times, to bother them all they can and 
 to be in a position to interfere for the catcher, if he runs. 
 The backs, also sometimes have a chance to help one 
 another out by blocking off opponents, while one of their 
 number makes sure of a rolling ball which, perhaps, has 
 been kicked over the goal line or into touch. 
 
 When one side has the ball, it is often possible for the 
 opponents to guess in which direction it will be carried, by 
 the way the half-backs or quarter-back stand; by their 
 '5
 
 224 
 
 unconscious glances in the direction they will take; by 
 certain anticipative movements of the muscles; by false 
 starts before the ball is put into play. Further informa- 
 tion is often given by the rushers themselves often by 
 the rusher who is to carry the ball. Frequently the 
 players who are to make the opening indicate by the way 
 they stand, by shifting their positions after the signal is 
 given, or by certain actions peculiar to them at such times, 
 the general direction of the play, and, perhaps, the exact 
 place at which it is aimed. All this is most valuable 
 information and ought to-be imparted to the rest of the 
 team whenever sufficiently positive to be of service. 
 Indeed, the team play of the future will not be considered 
 satisfactory without a set cf signals being used to spread 
 just such information. 
 
 At the same time that it is possible to gather much 
 information of this character from the side with the ball, 
 it must be remembered that shrewd players, knowing how 
 they are watched for these tell-tale signs, have cultivated 
 certain false motions, and are using them as points in 
 strategy to deceive their opponents into expecting a differ- 
 ent play from the one which is actually made. 
 
 From the foregoing, one draws the lesson to hide the 
 intended play. At least, the play must not be indicated 
 by any of these signs which the green player, and too 
 often the experienced player, shows. Thoughtful self- 
 control in every particular is what each player must 
 cultivate, if he would do the greatest service for his team. 
 
 Now and then, also, in offensive play the maneuver 
 resolves itself into a test of individual skill, speed, endur- 
 ance, and head work; but this is nearly always the out- 
 come of team play in the first part of the movement. 
 Occasionally a mishap furnishes a player a chance to make 
 a run wholly through his own unaided efforts.
 
 22$ 
 
 The history of the evolution of the hundred and more 
 plays in American football is the history of the develop- 
 ment of a "team" game. The perfecting of this has 
 largely increased the number of combinations now 
 possible and has given a wideness in variety of play, and 
 at the same time a definiteness of action for each play, 
 which makes it possible for every member of the eleven 
 to assist powerfully in its execution. In fact, the execu- 
 tion of the play depends on every player doing his 
 particular work for that play. Hence, the interdepend- 
 ence of the players is very close from the moment the 
 ball is down until the run is made, or until a fair catch or 
 a down by the opponents declares that the ball has been 
 released. It is therefore exceedingly important that the 
 adjustment of every factor in the play be made with per- 
 fect skill and in exact sequence, from the beginning till 
 the end. It is most important, however, that the starting 
 of the play be well made, for no amount of cleverness 
 afterward can atone for a bungling start. 
 
 Team play from a scrimmage should begin the instant 
 the center receives the ball from the hands of the runner 
 (which should be immediately after he is stopped). Every 
 rusher and back should be in position for the next play, 
 and the signal be given before the runner has had hardly 
 time to rise from the ground. The delay of one man in 
 taking his place might be sufficient to spoil the play, 
 whether that man be a rusher or a player behind the line. 
 
 As soon as the ball is in play the rushers must give 
 their united support to the quarter-back and the runner, 
 blocking their opponents, if necessary, long enough for 
 the quarter to pass the ball and the runner to get well 
 started. The center and guards especially must work 
 together to protect the quarter while receiving the ball
 
 226 
 
 and passing it, and then all or part of them may move 
 elsewhere to help out in the play, or may stay in their 
 positions to make an opening for the runner. There 
 must be the most united work in these preliminaries to 
 the run. Irregular snapping of the ball, either in direction 
 or in speed, which causes the quarter to fumble or to be 
 delayed in getting it to the runner, a poor pass from the 
 quarter, a muff or fumble by the runner, the letting of an 
 opponent through too soon, are usually sufficient to spoil 
 the play. 
 
 The rushers will do well in the preliminaries if the 
 runner succeeds in getting up to the line without en- 
 countering an opponent, or in the end plays if he is able 
 to get under good headway. They perhaps need only to 
 make a strong blockade in those parts of the line where 
 the particular play is in greatest danger of being checked, 
 but in order to do this well they must regard each other's 
 position as well as their own, touching elbows when 
 necessary, or separating according to the line tactics 
 deemed most effective at the time. 
 
 The work of a part of the rushers consists jn preceding 
 the runner whenever possible, working together by 
 strategy and combination to make an opening for him 
 and his interferers to go through. The others follow 
 closely from behind to render what assistance they are 
 able. This work comprises the hardest part of the whole 
 play, for it must be executed in the face of the strongest 
 part of the resistance. The rushers can block their men 
 for a second or two, but to -block them from three to six 
 seconds is impossible against good players. It is here 
 that the interferers come into especial prominence and 
 value, for they are to clear the way of these free oppo- 
 nents. It is in anticipating the probable positions of the
 
 27-1 
 
 opponents in the vital stage of every maneuver, and in 
 providing the cleverest team play to meet each con- 
 tingency, that a team excels in advancing the ball by 
 running. 
 
 Several things are especially necessary to produce skill, 
 ful team play. First there should be a wise selection of 
 players, and they should be placed in their final positions 
 as early in the season as possible. There also should be 
 such judgment in the arrangement of these players for 
 each position as will produce the least friction in working 
 out the plays, and that arrangement will usually be most 
 effective in which there is the least delay and ill adjust- 
 ment in making the plays quickly. There should be hard, 
 systematic daily practice, backed by a close study of every 
 play by each player in his particular position. The same 
 players should be used together as much as possible, so 
 that they can become thoroughly acquainted with each 
 other's style of play and know each other's weak and 
 strong points. In this way only can the fine adjustments 
 and combinations which go to make up team play be 
 brought about. 
 
 Team play in interference can only be the result of a 
 carefully-planned system in which every player studies 
 the general directions laid down for each play with a view 
 to perfecting his particular work, varying his position on 
 the field whenever necessary, starting like a flash in this 
 play and delaying somewhat in that, blocking his man in 
 one game perhaps in a certain way and in the next in one 
 entirely different, because his opponent plays differently, 
 sometimes taking another opponent instead of his own, 
 when he sees that he can be of more assistance by so 
 doing, and, in fact, doing whatever will most conduce to 
 the furtherance of the particular play in hand.
 
 228 
 
 In most plays the part which each player shall take in 
 the interference can be laid out very definitely, but in 
 the end play, and plays between end and tackle, only part 
 of the interferers are to take particular men; the rest 
 block off whatever opponents come in their path. It is in 
 this free running that there are frequent chances for the 
 display of fine team play in interference in striking the 
 opponent at the nick of time, in pocketing him, in forcing 
 him in or out as it seems best on the instant (the runner 
 being on the watch for either), and in the runner some- 
 times slowing up to let an interferer who is close behind 
 go ahead to take the man. Very often the reason that 
 a play is not successful is because the interferer is too far 
 in advance of the runner to be of any service to him. 
 Interference must be timely to be effective. It must be 
 the projecting of a helper at the moment a point of diffi- 
 culty arises the swinging into line of a series of helpers 
 in timely sequence as the runner advances. Nor must 
 the runner be delayed by the interferers except, perhaps, 
 when the guard comes around on an end play where it is 
 necessary to slow up a little at a certain point to let the 
 guard in ahead. 
 
 The execution of nearly all the play? depends for its 
 success on each player doing his duty at the right moment. 
 Here and there in certain parts of the play one or more 
 players must delay a particular work as much as possible, 
 otherwise their action would be immature and so value- 
 less ; but for the most part, the movement of each player 
 should be quick and definite, and those plays are most 
 effectively made in which every player does his duty 
 quickly. 
 
 Naturally, the end plays and the plays between end and 
 tackle require more delicate adjustment of the players in
 
 229 
 
 the interference than do the center plays. In the latter, 
 the interference nearly always must be done after the 
 line has been reached and penetrated. Here the extra 
 men, who rush to the opening as soon as they see where 
 it is, will be encountered, while in the end runs an 
 opponent is likely to show himself here and there and 
 everywhere before the runner reaches the line. 
 
 In all mass and wedge plays where the pressure is 
 brought to bear on one point in the line, the team play 
 is not nearly so delicate and skillful. The virtue in the 
 wedge play, be it quick or slow, lies in the power to pro- 
 ject great weight and strength on a given point, while at 
 the same time closely protecting the runner. 
 
 Every play should be made as safe as possible by 
 having at least one player always in a position to get a 
 fumbled ball, or in case an opponent secured the ball, to 
 prevent him from making a run. Where there are so 
 many parts to every play in snapping, handling, passing, 
 and catching the ball, there is constant danger of a slip. 
 The value of having one or more players behind the 
 runner is frequently demonstrated also, when, by the aid 
 of a timely push, the runner is able to break loose from 
 the grasp of some tackier who has not secured a strong 
 hold on him, and so adds several yards to his run. 
 
 In running down the field on a kick the rushers should 
 run in parallel lines two or three yards apart, for most of 
 the distance, converging as they approach the man with 
 the ball, in order to pocket him. The ends approach 
 the catcher in such a way that he will be forced to run in 
 towards the approaching rushers, if he runs at all. All 
 must be on the watch to thwart a pass to another man. 
 
 There is a nice point in judgment to be considered by 
 the rushers in going down on a kick. The end men 
 being so far away from where the full-back will stand
 
 230 
 
 when about to kick, can start instantly down the field, 
 leaving the half-backs to block off their men if they 
 come through too fast ; for the ends' first duty is to be 
 under the ball when it falls. Occasionally, when kicking 
 from near the side line, it may be necessary for the end 
 next the side line to block his man or to push him back 
 as he breaks through to go down the field. What the 
 ends will do in this case, the tacklers should do nearly 
 every time that a kick is made. Both tacklers should 
 feel it their bounden duty to support the ends by going 
 hard after them the instant they judge their opponents 
 cannot reach the full-back in time to interfere with his 
 kick. Hence, any tactics which they can put into 
 practice which will enable them to block their opponents 
 and, at the same time, not delay them in going down the 
 field are the ones to be used. The tackles must bear in 
 mind that the distance from their positions to the full- 
 back is not very great, especially on the side on which 
 the full-back kicks ; but while this makes the duty of 
 blocking on that side greater, the other tackle can afford 
 to take an extra fraction of a second from blocking his 
 opponent and use it in a quicker start. 
 
 On the guards and center rests the greatest burden in 
 blocking their opponents on a kick; for while there is not 
 that openness in the line, as at the tackle and end, which 
 will let an opponent through quickly, the distance to the 
 full-back is here the shortest and it is usually here that 
 tricks are worked by which one or two men are let through, 
 one usually being the quarter-back. They must, there- 
 fore, be very careful not to be over hurried in going down 
 the field, remembering that it is their first duty to block, 
 following the tackles and ends as soon as possible. If the 
 guards and center are very skillful there need be no great 
 delay in doing this, for it is necessary to check their oppo-
 
 nents only long enough to enable the full-back to punt 
 over their heads. Whenever it is possible for the guards 
 and center to carry their men before them for a few feet, 
 it is generally safe to leave them and go down the field at 
 full speed It is comparatively easy for the center to do 
 this at the instant that he snaps the ball. Generally 
 there is too much blocking done and too little "follow- 
 ing the ball." 
 
 In this connection, as a help to the rushers, several points 
 must be borne in mind by the full-back in kicking. It is 
 not enough for him to kick the ball as hard as he can each 
 time it is sent back for that purpose. That would be a 
 poor performance of his duties. He must kick for his 
 team's advantage always, and therefore must regulate the 
 distance, and direct his kick with the utmost skill. Even 
 long and puzzling kicks are dangerous unless closely fol- 
 lowed up by the rushers; for, let a good dodging half-back 
 get free, with one or two interferers in a broken field of 1 
 opponents, and he will be almost sure of a long run. 
 
 The full-back must take into account the ability of the 
 rushers to get down the field in time to prevent a run or a 
 return kick and punt accordingly. He may find it nec- 
 essary to elevate the angle of his kick so that it will give 
 his men time to get under it, or he may find it best to di- 
 rect the ball straight ahead, in order to give his rushers 
 the shortest distance to run, and at the same time be able 
 to advance in the best formation for checking a run. At 
 least, he must punt the ball where it shall be difficult for 
 the backs to reach it quickly, and so give the rushers the 
 advantage of a longer time to get under it. Especially 
 must he be very careful not to kick the ball diagonally across 
 the field without weighing well the risk involved, in com- 
 parison with the chances for increased advantage; for the 
 risks are unusually large in such a kick. It would be well
 
 232 
 
 for the full-back to give the rushers a signal as to the direc- 
 tion he meant to kick. This should always be done when 
 he intends to kick off to one side of the field, or when he 
 purposes making a high kick or one outside of bound in 
 order to put his men on side by running forward. The 
 rushers would be able to work some splendid team-play on 
 such occasions. 
 
 The question of when to make a fair catch and when to 
 run is well worth the consideration of the backs, who are 
 the ones almost always called upon to exercise their judg- 
 ment on this point. It was formerly judged best, in hand- 
 ling a kicked ball, to make a fair catch on all occasions. 
 To-day there is a division of opinion, some adhering to 
 the old way, while others prefer to run whenever they get 
 a chance. 
 
 There are two points to be considered in deciding this 
 question: First, whether it is possible to kick a goal from 
 the place where the ball will fall, or whether a punt from 
 that point would be desirable; second, w r hether it will add 
 much to the risk of not catching the ball, if the attempt is 
 made to run. It is clear, that when near enough to the 
 opponent's goal to try a place kick, every effort should be 
 made to secure a fair catch. 
 
 When a goal from the field would be impossible, it is 
 almost invariably best to run with the ball, unless this 
 would add greatly to the danger of muffing it. Catching 
 the ball necessitates a positive loss of ground before again 
 putting it in play, and it is doubtful whether this loss is 
 compensated by the advantage of putting it in play unmo- 
 lested by opponents and behind the whole team under 
 slight headway. 
 
 In attempting to run the player will at the worst be 
 forced to make a down, which would furnish only slightly 
 less advantage than a fair catch, while on the other hand 
 it presents opportunities for gain.
 
 FIELD TACTICS. 
 
 Clever tactics on the football field depend first of 
 all on the captain's possessing an accurate knowledge 
 of the strength and weakness of his team, both in in- 
 dividual play and in team play. This can all be acquired 
 during practice by carefully noting every play which is 
 made, and giving thought to the strength of the in- 
 dividual men and the value of the play in its relation to 
 the others, both in regard to the perfection of execution 
 and in intrinsic merit from a strategic point of view. 
 It also depends upon the captain's observing as soon as 
 he enters the field and throughout the game, the inci- 
 dents of the day ; the direction and force of the wind ; 
 the position of the sun ; and the condition of every part 
 of the field. All these points are of great importance 
 in good generalship. Lastly, it depends upon the study 
 which he makes of the way the opponents arrange 
 themselves on the defense, as well as the style of their 
 play when in possession of the ball. He must also seek 
 to find out by trial which of his plays can be used most 
 effectively. 
 
 Having the knowledge of the first and second requisites 
 for good generalship, the captain must immediately pro- 
 ceed to find out the weakness and strength of the 
 opponent's defense, not by trying each play in turn and 
 just noting its success, but by using the best tactics the 
 occasion demands, and closely -observing the result on 
 each play. Every play known to be strong because of 
 
 (233)
 
 234 
 
 the ability to concentrate or mass the players at some 
 part of the line, or for any other reason, should be tried 
 at least two or three times early in the game in order 
 to give it a fair test, that the captain may know which 
 will be his most effective plays. It is a mistake to keep 
 pounding away on two or three plays which give an 
 advance of a few yards, just on that account, until 
 after other reliable plays have been given a fair trial. 
 In making this trial, the time should be well chosen, 
 both as to position on the field and as to the number 
 of the down, and the previous loss or gain, if it is the 
 second or third down. It often happens that a powerful 
 play is discarded because in one or two trials it did not 
 work well. The difficulty may have been in its im- 
 perfect execution, or in a neglect of duty on the part 
 of one man even, or it might result from the inability of 
 one player to do his work because of circumstances 
 or tactics on the part of his opponents which he could 
 not overcome, but which, later on, he would discover a 
 way to meet. 
 
 By confining the tactics to a few plays which have 
 proved successful for more or less gain, the captain 
 limits his play very decidedly and clearly indicates his 
 policy, thereby giving his opponents a knowledge which 
 is invaluable in thwarting him. The result will be that 
 all the available players upon the opposing team will be 
 called from the appointed positions where they had been 
 placed in order to meet the most varied style of plays, 
 and stationed where they can render these particular 
 plays most ineffective. The knowledge that the play 
 will probably be one of a few, also gives every player on 
 the defense a certainty of action which will make his 
 opposition very much stronger. The uncertainty which
 
 235 
 
 comes from combating a variety of tactics weakens each 
 man's defense considerably, and puts him at his wit's 
 end to discovei what the play will be and how to meet 
 it. It also makes him more liable to be blocked off 
 and pocketed. 
 
 Sometimes, to be sure, it is fine strategy to keep pound- 
 ing away at some particular point or points in the line, 
 in order to draw the attention wholly to this place and 
 to draw the men away from other parts of the line in 
 order to weaken it for a sudden attack ; but this is 
 quite different from the limited style of play so often 
 used, and really, if well done, is a mark of clever 
 generalship. 
 
 The captain sometimes uses all his plays in succes- 
 sion simply because he has been accustomed to run 
 through them in practice. This is poor tactics. If it 
 has once been clearly proven that a certain play cannot 
 for any reason be made, every clear-headed captain will 
 realize that it is very, poor policy to waste downs in 
 the effort. 
 
 A similar mistake sometimes grows out of giving the 
 signals in practice. If the captain or quarter-back in 
 giving the signal is not careful, he will get into the way 
 of unconsciously arranging the plays according to the 
 law of association of ideas, one play following another 
 in unvarying sequence. The principle of sequence in 
 plays would not be fatal, and, indeed, would sometimes 
 be very effective, if the plays are well selected. But 
 account should be taken of the physical capacity of the 
 players ; the duties which they have just been called on 
 to perform ; and the right time and place on the field, 
 in reference to the side lines and nearness to the goal. 
 The great advantage to be gained lies in having the
 
 236 
 
 sequence come in the form of a series which is perfectly 
 learned, so that play after play shall be made in rapid 
 succession. The series, however, should not consist of 
 more than from four to six plays, as contingencies often 
 arise which seriously injure their effectiveness. In any 
 case the series ought to be stopped if for any reason it 
 is unwise to make the next play, or if the conditions allow 
 a much better move. A simple signal will indicate that 
 the series is to be stopped. The great virtue in series 
 plays lies in the fact that a certain signal starts the series 
 and each play can be made in the quickest manner, 
 because the players all know what is coming next and 
 are ready the instant the ball is in the center-rusher's 
 hands. Series plays are especially effective against a 
 team which is slow in lining up. They are very valuable 
 also in their moral effect, because of the rapidity and en- 
 thusiasm with which the plays are made. 
 
 Under a varied style of play where many movements 
 are well executed, the opposing team must exercise the 
 greatest headwork and caution in its defense. If the 
 other team has not already indicated its policy by clearly 
 defining its plays, every one on the opposing eleven will 
 be conscious of so much uncertainty as to what the play 
 will be, that his attack through the line is likely to be 
 cautious and therefore not strong ; or else it is likely to 
 be sufficiently daring to give the opponents a decided ad- 
 vantage in making their plays. When undue caution is 
 exercised on the defense, its effect often is to make the 
 players hesitating. This, when extending throughout 
 the rush line is fatal to a strong defensive game. A dar- 
 ing, reckless defense is far more effective than the 
 cautious defense which makes a rush line hesitate, 
 because of the moral effect on the other team, if for no 
 other reason.
 
 2 37 
 
 And this leads us to consider the moral effect of certain 
 tactics. The three most effective styles of plays when 
 successfully used are : a kicking game when there are 
 weak catchers behind the opposing line (or when the lat- 
 ter are poorly positioned) ; end plays ; and dashes 
 through the center in mass or quick wedge plays. These 
 three plays, in the order named, have the most disheart- 
 ening effect on the opposing team, when the side having 
 the ball has a long, accurate, and scientific kicker who is 
 able to place his punts well, and also to regulate the 
 height and twist which the ball shall take. 
 
 Every football player knows the chances for a fatal 
 misplay which hang on a kicked ball : first, because of 
 the difficulty of judging it accurately if it be twisting in 
 certain ways ; second, because of its exceeding suscepti- 
 bility to currents of air which make its gyrations and 
 deviations excessively perplexing ; third, because of the 
 nicety of final judgment required, even when the player 
 is well under the ball, since its shape and elasticity make 
 it necessary to allow for its full length and its smallest 
 dimension at the same time, also for a quick rebound 
 from the arm or hands. The catcher must attend to all 
 this in the face of a fierce line of rushers coming down on 
 him at full speed, eager to tackle him or to seize the ball 
 if he muffs or fumbles it. 
 
 The moral effect of having uncertain catchers behind 
 the line is very telling on the team. If all the hard, 
 wearying work of the rushers and half-backs to advance 
 the ball forty or fifty yards is to be spoiled over and over 
 by muffed punts, even though the ball is not lost to the 
 other side (as it is likely sometimes to be in such cases), 
 there is sure to be a diminution in effort in a short time 
 on the part of the whole team. This comes imperceptibly
 
 2 3 8 
 
 at first, but comes just as surely, and ere long evinces it- 
 self in the more determined and successful efforts of the 
 other team. 
 
 Almost equally disheartening, if not fully so, is it to 
 have runs made repeatedly around the ends; because the 
 runs in that locality, if successful, are usually for long 
 gains often resulting in touch-downs, and they arouse 
 the greatest fears in the minds of all the players from a 
 feeling of inability to stop them. The result is that every 
 effort is centered on anticipating these end plays, and 
 the rushers, instead of going through the line, wait to see 
 if it is an end play, in which case they run out to the side 
 to stop it. That very moment in which there is a hesitancy 
 on the part of the guards and tackles in going through 
 the line, is a moment of triumph for the team with the 
 ball; for it immediately gives them a decided advantage, 
 in that, while perhaps unable before to make progress 
 through the center part of the line, they will now have 
 two strong points of attack. The chances now are that 
 the defense will grow weaker and weaker as the game 
 advances, for unless the end runs are well stopped the 
 players will decrease their efforts somewhat and the 
 tackling will become less and less daring and effective. 
 
 It is hard to say which of these two styles of play really 
 has the more discouraging effect on the opposite team. 
 If the eleven which has the poor catchers back of their 
 forwards are successful in making advance by rushing the 
 ball, they have a vast deal to encourage them, even 
 though now and then they lose it all through the muffing 
 of their backs. The period in which they have the ball 
 is one in which their minds are not conscious of the weak- 
 ness of their own defense but are completely taken up 
 with the good work they are doing, and they are unani-
 
 239 
 
 mous and bouyant in it.. That period of success does 
 much to keep up their spirits during the time when the 
 other side has the ball and their fears are so all-powerful. 
 
 When a team is able to make frequent runs around the 
 opponent's end, there is perhaps less to actually dis- 
 hearten them than in the preceding case, for there is less 
 fear of losing the ball. It can be gotten only through a 
 failure to advance the five yards in its three trials; through 
 a fumble ; through a penalty imposed by the umpire; or 
 through a kick. The latter will be tried probably only 
 under extreme conditions where there has been a loss of 
 yards, while in the kicking game mentioned above, the 
 side not in possession of the ball always has the hope of 
 securing it. 
 
 That captain is not a good general who follows out the 
 same tactics in each game; who, having perhaps worked 
 out a system of plays which his men could best execute, 
 attempts to apply this system in every game, regardless 
 of the composition of the opposing eleven and their sys- 
 tems of defense and offense. The captain, in truth, has 
 learned a good deal when he has learned what plays his 
 team can best execute, and he has most valuable, though 
 far from complete, information for conducting a wise cam- 
 paign against the opposing eleven. He still has much 
 need to exercise his generalship as to whether this point 
 of attack should be assailed three or fifteen times; this 
 place a few times; and this place not at all, or perhaps 
 only once or twice for the sake of trial or strategy. 
 
 Oftentimes, the rusher can give invaluable information 
 to the captain as to his own ability to handle his opponent, 
 where for example the opponent so places himself con- 
 stantly as to render it an easy matter to get him out of 
 the way for certain plays, although it is impossible to 
 16
 
 240 
 
 move him on other plays. This is especially true in 
 handling a large man who stands constantly in the same 
 way; as for instance, well over to the side of his opponent. 
 It would be comparatively easy to block such a man for 
 opening up a hole in one direction, but almost impossible 
 to shove him in the opposite way. Such information 
 would furnish the captain valuable data on which to base 
 certain tactics, and would inform him that he could doubt- 
 less make plays to one side of this man and seldom if ever 
 on the other side. 
 
 It would be foolish, even if it were possible, to lay down 
 a complete system of tactics which should be followed in 
 a game. Indeed, the wonderful part of football is, that 
 it is a game which cannot be worked out by rule and 
 learned by note. One play does not follow another in 
 sequence, but only as the captain or commander of the 
 day directs. 
 
 What makes the game preeminently one requiring 
 science and brains, is that to be well played the captain 
 must use the utmost wisdom and strategy in directing the 
 plays, and the players to a man must do their duty in ex- 
 ecuting them. Very many points of advantage and dis- 
 advantage must constantly be borne in mind, or else the 
 best generalship and results cannot follow. It is far from 
 true to say that the captain must simply take into account 
 the strong and weak points of his opponent's play, 
 together with the incidents of the day and field, such as 
 the direction of the sun and the condition of the grounds 
 in each particular part of the field; he must also have re- 
 gard for his men, selecting his plays with such wisdom as 
 to secure the greatest economy of physical energy with 
 the greatest result, so that no man nor men shall be over- 
 worked at any time of the game and thus be incapacitated.
 
 241 
 
 No captain is a good general who does not know the 
 limitations in strength of his ground-gainers, and who 
 does not take this into account in directing the play. 
 Men differ greatly in their power to repeat a performance 
 quickly; essentially, then, in their powers of endurance. 
 Some men can do effective work only when in first-class 
 condition; that is, when they have had a certain length 
 of time to recover after each effort, they can be relied on 
 for a good gain, if not a brilliant run. Then, there is a 
 vast difference in the kind of play as to the drain on a 
 man's strength. End runs, and runs in which a consider- 
 able distance is covered, or runs in which there is a good 
 deal of dodging and struggling to get loose from tacklers, 
 are the most taxing on the wind and strength. Most men 
 can stand two or more dashes through the line in quick 
 succession, or two or more mass and wedge plays where 
 the runner does not run fast for a long distance before 
 being tackled. But when a run has been made which has 
 called for a vast deal of energy the captain should not 
 fail to notice it, and in calling the next two or three plays, 
 choose such as do not ask for too much strength from this 
 player. The star runner as a rule is the one who suffers 
 most from overwork through injudicious leadership. 
 
 This does not preclude the fact that there are occasions 
 in the game when some player or players must be forced 
 to draw heavily on a reserve fund of energy in order to 
 secure a permanent advantage or to prevent disaster. It 
 sometimes seems necessary when nearing the opponent's 
 goal, that some player be put to his supreme test of 
 strength in order to secure points, and likewise, when it 
 is necessary to carry the ball away from one's own goal, 
 and there is only one man who is sure to meet the crisis ; 
 but these are in truth critical periods and are exceptions 
 not to be mentioned in this connection.
 
 242 
 
 We Know tnat it is sometimes considered clever tactics, 
 when there are strong substitute players for certain posi- 
 tions, to work men in these positions to their utmost limit 
 of service, and then "have them get hurt "in order to 
 substitute a fresh man or men. If this be shrewd, it is 
 at least not honest tactics. 
 
 If a team is not capable of playing an uphill game, or 
 is one which is strongly affected by success and repulse; 
 or, if the opposing eleven is one which is similarly in- 
 fluenced, the tactics should be those most likely to pro- 
 duce the exultation of success on the one hand, and 
 the feeling of discouragement on the other. The plays 
 should be those which can be executed quickly, and 
 which have a certainty of gain with little risk of loss ; 
 which combine the efforts of every man in the eleven 
 sufficiently to make him feel that he has an important 
 part in them; which bring the energies of the opposing 
 eleven, particularly the rushers, to the severest test, tax- 
 ing especially the wind and courage. 
 
 It must always be remembered, as a point in tactics, 
 that the side in possession of the ball has a great ad- 
 vantage, especially if the other side is weak in defensive 
 play, and that it requires a greater outlay in strength 
 and wind to check plays than it does to make them. It 
 is likewise true that the courage of a team may be meas- 
 ured by its promptness and determination in defense. 
 If a team repeatedly and continuously comes up to the 
 scrimmage, after being outwitted and outplayed, it has 
 the true courage, the courage which would probably ena- 
 ble them to win if possessed of an equal degree of skill 
 in team-play. 
 
 What style of game shall a team play ? That depends 
 on many contingencies. Setting aside for the time the
 
 243 
 
 incidents of the day, such as wind, rain, and sunlight; 
 the soft, slippery, and rough places in the grounds; the 
 up and down grades ; not even taking into account the 
 strength and weakness of the opponents, and the contin- 
 gencies which arise, let us consider solely the composition 
 of the team, and see if we can deduce any style of play 
 which applies to teams made up of certain types of men. 
 
 Without defining the make-up of the team, except on 
 general terms, we see that when the rush line is strong and 
 heavy, the chances are that they will be able to handle 
 their opponents and make good openings for the dashes 
 through the line. Plunges through the central part of 
 the line will probably be the most effective, if the center 
 guards and tackles are large and strong men. If the 
 backs are slow and heavy also, a center game will prob- 
 ably be the only kind they can play with success. And 
 the result is that this will be the style of game adopted; 
 not perhaps because the captain has analyzed the reasons 
 for the ability of the backs to make advance in that place, 
 and their inability to circle the ends, for example; but 
 just because that is the part of the line in which they can 
 make their gains every time. Perhaps it will occur to 
 him that those same backs can be so quickened in start- 
 ing and running, and then so well guarded, that they will 
 be able now and then to try an end play, or a tackle 
 and end play successfully, and by so doing, strengthen 
 that very center play. The chance for making a success- 
 ful end play is increased where a center game is being 
 played, because the ends will be likely to draw in some- 
 what to help the center. 
 
 When the center men of the line are rather light, if the 
 backs are heavy and slow, the advantage will still be in 
 attacking the openings between the center and guards
 
 244 
 
 and between the guards and tackles; for, if the backs 
 and ends mass on these places, as they can do quickly 
 and powerfully, they can still force a few yards at a time, 
 and now and then break through for considerable gain. 
 When well massed, this can be played even against the 
 strongest centers. All that the rush line will need to do is 
 to hold their men momentarily until the backs get under 
 headway, and the combination of so much weight and 
 power will be sure to make advance when well directed. 
 If it be remembered that the advantage is always with 
 the side which has the ball, and if the players, though 
 checked now and then, go into each play with undaunted 
 courage, advance will surely be made. 
 
 As a general rule, when a team has light, swift run- 
 ners behind the line, they should lay the emphasis on 
 plays around the end and between the ends and tackles. 
 Not that they should confine themselves to those points 
 of attack, but it would be foolish for a team composed 
 of such material not to perfect the plays in these parts 
 of the line, because of the ability of the backs to move 
 quickly to these remoter places. Such men, too, are not 
 so well built for the hard, plunging work in the center, 
 and will probably stand less of it, and be less effective, 
 than heavier backs. This of course depends in part on 
 the build of the men, but in general it is true. 
 
 But even if the backs are equally good in plunging into 
 the line, it would be better policy to keep the line spread 
 out, for no runner can make much gain through a close 
 line. Swift drives through the line can be made fre- 
 quently, and are usually very telling when the line, being 
 spread out, is opened up for these little backs to come 
 darting through. But if the backs and the central part 
 of the rush line are both light, while those of the oppo-
 
 245 
 
 nents are heavy, the end style of play must of necessity 
 be depended on, or the opposing rushers will be able 
 to resist the plunges. Furthermore, it will be exceed- 
 ingly hard to make holes through the line, and, in fact, 
 even to hold their opponents long enough for the backs 
 to get up to the line. 
 
 The question of what shall be the proportion of end 
 plays and plays between the ends and tackle, to the 
 plays through the other four openings in the line depends, 
 of course, very largely on the backs. The composition 
 of the rush line as to strength and skill, especially the 
 center, guards, and tackles, also affects the proportion. 
 
 On the ordinary college and preparatory school team, 
 the relative effectiveness of an end game to a center 
 game would be much smaller than where the teams are 
 better trained, simply because the risks are larger; for, 
 while the defense against well executed interference 
 would be much weaker, the attack also is much weaker. 
 f Every enfl play and play between the tackles and end 
 I is attempted with a much greater risk from actual loss of 
 / ground, or with a loss of a down with no gain, than are 
 / the plays in the center. The reason is that the rushers 
 \ are given time to break through the line while the runner 
 is moving out to the point of attack, and unless well pro- 
 I tected he will not reach the opening. 
 V Further, this movement for a considerable distance is 
 almost entirely sidewise before an advance can be made, 
 while in the plays in the central part of the line the 
 rushes are made nearly straight forward, except when the 
 rushers take the ball, and the runners scarcely ever fail 
 to reach the line. The times when there is no gain what- 
 ever and when there is an actual loss are compara- 
 tively few, for the runner, catching the ball at full 
 speed, is up to the line in an instant, and then it be-
 
 246 
 
 comes a question how far he can advance beyond that 
 point. Taking these elements of risk into account, it 
 would seem that the proportion of plays at the end to 
 plays through the line should not be larger than one to 
 three, and oftentimes less, even where a team is able to 
 use both styles effectively. The only occasion for a larger 
 use of end plays than this would be when the runner sel- 
 dom fails to reach the line, and is usually good for a 
 gain. In that event the large element of risk has been 
 taken away, and the proportion of use should then de- 
 pend on the relative amount of gain which the trials 
 have shown can be secured from each with the least ex- 
 penditure of energy. 
 
 Right here it might be well to add that it requires more 
 skillful generalship to know when to use an end play 
 than when to make a play through the center. It is 
 only occasionally that the ball is down so close to the side 
 lines that all four openings in the center are not available 
 on account of running outside the line, while it is fre- 
 quently the case that the ball is down near enough to the 
 side line to limit the end play to one side, that is, to two 
 openings. Nor is this enlarged space on one side of the 
 field sufficient compensation for the loss of the two points 
 of attack, but it adds to the science of the game, as it re- 
 quires more varied tactics and maneuvers. 
 
 It is poor tactics to keep trying end plays when it has 
 been clearly proven that it is not possible to make them 
 and that there is a likelihood of a loss in the trial. If it 
 seems best to try the end for the sake of keeping the op- 
 posing line spread out so that the center plays can be 
 made more successfully, the most propitious times should 
 be selected. It should never be on the second or third 
 down, because the risk of losing the ball by failure to 
 gain the requisite five yards would be entirely too great.
 
 247 
 
 There are times when an end play should not be used 
 at all, or very rarely, on account of the risk involved; 
 as, for example, when the ball is being carried out from 
 under the goal where it has been forced by the opponents. 
 Anywhere within the fifteen or twenty yard line it is 
 much better to trust to bringing it slowly out a few yards 
 or feet at a time, sufficient, perhaps, to secure only the 
 requisite five yards in three trials. Beyond the twenty- 
 yard line and up to the thirty-five-yard an end play should 
 be tried only on the first down, or, in rare instances, on 
 the second down, unless the risk of losing ground, and 
 subsequently the ball, is worth taking. In such cases the 
 possession of a powerful punter behind the line, who could 
 place the ball well out of dangerous territory if necessary, 
 might be a sufficient reason for attempting a long kick 
 down the field. It does not seem, however, that it is nec- 
 essary to run any risk of losing the ball if there is good 
 reason for not playing a kicking game, for there will be 
 ample chance to try an end play on the first down. Mis- 
 takes in generalship are frequently made right along this 
 line in nearly every game which is played, an end, run 
 being sometimes tried on the third down when there is 
 less than a yard to gain. Better gain the yard or two by 
 the surest ground-gaining play and then try an end run 
 on the very next. 
 
 When inside the opponents' twenty-five-yard line the 
 greatest skill must also be used, and the aim should be to 
 get the requisite five yards by the most reliable tactics. 
 Plays which risk the loss of ground and the ball should be 
 sparingly used, and every caution and strategy be exer- 
 cised to place the ball across the line. Nor should there 
 be less prudence because a team has a good drop kicker. 
 The proportion of goals secured from drop kicks is not
 
 248 
 
 more than one in every four or five attempts, with the best 
 kickers in America, and the most certain way to score 
 will be to strain every nerve to place the ball across the 
 line by steadfastly holding the ball and using the drop 
 kick only as a last resource. 
 
 Every now. and then a point is lost unnecessarily when 
 the ball is in the possession of a team under its own goal. 
 It is judged not wise to kick. Perhaps the wind is strong 
 in the opposite direction and there is no reliable punter, 
 or perhaps it would simply give the opponents a fair 
 catch from which to make a try for goal if kicked. The 
 captain also realizes that if the opponents secure the ball 
 they will force it over. Two downs may already have 
 been used up and ground lost in vain attempts to advance 
 the ball by running. There seems to be no other alterna- 
 tive, and so another trial is made, but without avail, 
 whereupon the ball goes to the other side. Under these 
 circumstances it would be well for the captain to remem- 
 ber that by making a safety touchdown and allowing the 
 opponents to score two, he could have brought the ball 
 out to the twenty-five-yard line and prevented a proba- 
 ble six points. 
 
 The mistake is often made of frequently using end plays 
 when the ground is slippery and soft from rain. Nothing 
 can be more foolish, unless the aim is to get the ball on 
 firmer ground, for with insecure footing it is impossible 
 to start quickly, run fast, or turn and dodge quickly. 
 This makes it easy, also, for the opposing eleven to stop 
 the runner and nearly always with a loss of ground. The 
 same is true, in a measure, when the ground is soft or 
 very sandy. It is comparatively hard to make end plays 
 even when there are no unfavorable conditions, when the 
 ground is firm and level.
 
 249 
 
 He is a wise general, therefore, who notes the field 
 carefully, knowing where all the soft and slippery and 
 rough places are, as well as where the good ground is, 
 and then keeps them in mind throughout the game, and 
 makes his moves wisely in reference to them. Few cap- 
 tains take the field sufficiently into account in directing 
 the plays, so that the greatest advantage can be secured 
 by avoiding the hindrances as much as possible. Again 
 and again unsuccessful trials to advance have been made 
 in muddy places, when, with one well-planned move, the 
 ball could have been placed on solid ground with little or 
 no sacrifice, and a vast advantage secured. It is usually 
 worth the loss of two or three yards, and oftentimes more, 
 to make an end play in order to give a better footing ta 
 the backs and the rushers for putting the ball into play, 
 for handling it, for making holes, and for starting, run- 
 ning, and dodging. 
 
 When the ground is very slippery, all plays which cause 
 the runner to move a considerable distance sidewise and 
 across the field before turning to advance, and all plays 
 requiring a sudden change in direction, whether when 
 under strong headway or not, are hard to gain ground 
 on, and, therefore, must be used with great judgment. 
 Equally hard to make are the plays in which the tackle 
 and guard and end carry the ball around for a run 
 through one of the openings on the opposite side of the line. 
 There is not, however, the chance for so much loss of 
 ground in these plays, as usually played, that there is in 
 a run out to the end by the half-backs, because the former 
 run closer to the line and the play is not so quickly per- 
 ceived. 
 
 It naturally follows, then, from what has been said, 
 that those plays which send the runner directly forward;
 
 250 
 
 those in which the impetus from the start is more forward 
 than side wise; those in which the runner does not have 
 far to run before he strikes the opening; and those in 
 which he can get the greatest protection and assistance 
 quickly, are the plays to be relied on when the ground is 
 soft, sandy, or slippery. 
 
 In bringing the ball in from the side lines, the privilege 
 is given of having it down anywhere from five to fifteen 
 yards from that line. This option of ten yards should be 
 valuable in determining the tactics to be used next. Too 
 often is it the habit for the captain to shout out, ' ' Bring 
 it in fifteen," whether the "fifteen" would carry them 
 into a mud hole, or whether there w r as a positive advan- 
 tage in operating from a nearer point to the side line by 
 avoiding the usual custom of an end run, and sending the 
 runner through on the other side. Generally the fifteen 
 yard point is the best place to have the ball down, but 
 not always. The ten-yard point has decided advantages 
 in making certain side-line plays, because the opponents 
 will reason that the chances are in favor of an end play 
 being attempted, and will draw one or two men away to 
 strengthen their defense in that quarter. These they will 
 feel that they can well spare from that side without very 
 apparently weakening the defense, because they are pro- 
 tected from long runs by the side line. 
 
 The side line does not enter into the consideration in 
 field tactics as much as it should. As a rule, it is consid- 
 ered a misfortune when the ball is down within less than 
 ten yards of this boundary line, because it gives the op- 
 ponents a good chance to anticipate the play, which is 
 likely to be a run around the other end. The free men 
 who are behind the rushers nearest the side line rarely 
 fail to move over as far as the center-rusher. This leaves
 
 the defense of that part wholly to the rushers, supported 
 by the side line, and is the best situation possible for mak- 
 ing certain plays. Long runs, however, cannot be ex- 
 pected, and the captain must be contented to work stead- 
 ily up the field by short gains. After several dashes into 
 the line, of this kind, an end run suddenly carried into ex- 
 ecution may have considerable chance for success. 
 
 This suggests the thought that it is possible to use the 
 side line helpfully when the ball is down very near it and 
 when it is impossible to make any strong plays because 
 of the limitations which must be met in such a situation. 
 At such a time, instead of attempting to make a run out 
 toward the end, or tackle, which will be expected, the play 
 should often be straight forward or on the side toward 
 the boundary line, until the runner is finally pushed over 
 the line and has the privilege of bringing the ball in to a 
 more favorable position from which to operate. 
 
 Furthermore, the position near the side line can be 
 made more useful in working tricks than a point nearer 
 the center of the field, for reasons which are evident. 
 
 There is no question that kicking the ball has not 
 entered into the tactics of football as largely as its possi- 
 bilities would warrant. There are many reasons for this. 
 First, there is only here and there a team which has a 
 reliable kicker. Punting and drop kicking are practiced 
 by a few only, and, for the most part, not intelligently and 
 successfully. It is a science with several points of skill to 
 be acquired. Second, many teams have an uncertain 
 punter who does not himself know exactly where the ball 
 will go, whether far down the field or just over the rush line, 
 along the ground or to one side, and so place such little 
 confidence in the value of kicking under so great a risk 
 that they will usually trust to a run, even on the third
 
 252 
 
 down, if the distance which they have to gain is not too 
 great. Third, in all but a few leading colleges when the 
 teams are evenly matched, the question of points is large- 
 ly a question of which side has the ball. (_The offensive 
 game is much better developed than the defensive game, 
 and it is not infrequent for one team to carry the ball 
 from one end of the field to the other without losing it/} 
 Under these circumstances the necessity for kicking is 
 seldom felt, and they would rather take the risk of not 
 gaining the requisite number of yards, than release their 
 right to the ball by an uncertain kick. Fourth, it is a 
 fact that most punters can not kick accurately if forced to 
 punt quickly. They are, therefore, compelled to stand so 
 far back of the rush line that the value of their punt is 
 decreased by several yards, or else they run the risk both 
 of a poor punt and of having it stopped by the opposing 
 rushers who break through the line. 
 
 No better proof of the value of a good punter behind 
 the line is needed, than to see a game in which one side is 
 visibly weaker than the other in its power to advance the 
 ball by running, but which, possessing a strong punter, 
 is able to keep its opponents in check. Frequent punts 
 are doubly effective when the opposite side is without a 
 good kicker, or is not accustomed to a kicking game. 
 
 The worth of an accurate kicker is magnified very 
 much when there is a wind in his favor. Comparatively 
 few games are played without a wind to help or interfere, 
 according as it is favorable to one side or the other. 
 When the wind is in the favor of one side, they should 
 be able to use it to the greatest advantage. The captain 
 should be alive to its value, and make it a powerful factor 
 in his tactics. It would then be a question whether it 
 would not be wise to kick the ball just as soon as it was
 
 253 
 
 secured, provided, of course, it was not so near the op- 
 ponent's goal that it would be wiser to hold the ball and 
 attempt to rush it over. Certain it is that a side should 
 never fail to kick on the third down except on account of 
 the liability of kicking the ball over the goal line when 
 inside of the twenty-five yard line, or because so close to 
 the goal line that it is worth taking the risk of losing the 
 ball in making a supreme effort to get it over. 
 
 When there is danger of the ball being kicked across 
 the goal line a clever punter will usually aim to kick 
 the ball across the side line into the touch as near the 
 goal line as possible. This is intentional and is quite dif- 
 ferent from the juvenile efforts which do not take the 
 wind or position into account when punting from near the 
 side line and send the ball outside, only a few yards away. 
 
 It is sometimes good tactics on the third down, when 
 there is considerable doubt whether the required advance 
 can be made, to have the full-back kick the ball across 
 the side line with no intent perhaps of a gain in ground. 
 While giving the opposing team technically an equal 
 chance, it is wholly with the purpose of having the end- 
 rusher secure the ball, which will be upon the first down. 
 The kick must be well placed, of course, and must not be 
 so much forward that there will be great risk of the op- 
 ponents securing the ball, and also not so far ahead that 
 the full-back cannot put his men on side easily. The 
 end man on that side must also know of the full-back's 
 intention, and place himself well over toward the side 
 line. Such a kick cannot be attempted safely when the 
 full-back is not able to place his punts with great ac- 
 curacy. The occasions when the use of such tactics 
 would be wise, might be when the side in possession of 
 the ball was able to make good advances by running but
 
 254 
 
 had lost ground, perhaps through a misplay ; or when 
 they had the ball inside their opponents' twenty-five yard 
 line and were not in a good position to try a drop kick ; 
 or when the risk of making the required gain by running 
 would be too great. 
 
 Right here would come in the question of a drop kick 
 on the third down when inside the twenty-five yard line, 
 and in fair position to make the trial. It is safe to say 
 that, in general on the third down, this should be the 
 play called for. It is for the captain to decide whether 
 the trial is worth the making; whether the nearness and 
 angle to the goal, and the quickness and skill of the 
 kicker warrant a drop kick in preference to the chances 
 of making a further advance by running. 
 
 If a run is attempted without gain the ball will be 
 down where it is for the other side. When the kick 
 is made on the other hand, there will be a possibility of 
 having the ball stopped by the opposing rushers, and 
 a run made up the field; or, if the goal is missed, the 
 opposing team will be allowed to bring the ball out to 
 the twenty-five yard line. 
 
 The captain must weigh all these possibilities before 
 making his decision. 
 
 The great advantage in the wind does not consist alone 
 in the increased distance the ball can be propelled, but 
 also in the increased likelihood that some one upon the 
 side which kicked will again secure the ball on a muff 
 or fumble. The wind has added to the problem of the 
 player who attempts to catch the ball these points of 
 difficulty: greater distance covered by the ball, an in- 
 creased speed, and a greater probability that the ball 
 will suddenly veer to one side or the other from the line 
 of direction .
 
 255 
 
 The increased advantage of a favoring wind is in 
 direct proportion to the strength of the wind. If the 
 wind is very strong, the side which does not have its 
 assistance is severely handicapped, and for the time is 
 not able to do any effective kicking. Even with the 
 best punters, it is impossible to drive the ball far in the 
 face of a strong wind, and then the kick must be low 
 or the wind is likely to blow it back near the spot from 
 which it was kicked. On the other hand, when kicking 
 for distance with the wind, it is usually better to kick 
 the ball high, in order that the wind may affect it more 
 powerfully during the longer interval of time in rising 
 and falling. 
 
 There is also an economic reason for kicking the ball 
 whenever it can be wisely done. It is a good way to 
 rest the backs in order to save them for the supreme 
 effort of carrying the ball across the line; for, if the ball 
 has been carried for a considerable distance, they will 
 be likely to be somewhat fatigued as they approach the 
 goal line, and they will be weakest where and when the 
 opposing side always puts in their most determined and 
 desperate resistance. 
 
 It is a severe test of a team's courage to bear up 
 against a kicking game in the face of a strong wind; 
 for, even if they are able to make good gains in return 
 by running, the players are constantly fearing a slip or 
 fumble, which will give the ball back to the other side 
 only to have it returned with all the chances of a mis- 
 play, if not a gain in ground. The effect of the wind 
 also is to make the side against it think that they are 
 working very much harder than their opponents just to 
 hold their own. 
 
 There is no question as to the value of having every 
 member of the team able to run with the ball when it is 
 17
 
 256 
 
 possible and wise. The more varied the style of play, 
 provided it is strong, or is likely to be successful because 
 unlocked for, the more powerful would be the plan of at- 
 tack and the less effective the defense. This is true for 
 two reasons: first, it keeps the opposing team constantly 
 guessing as to what the play will be and enables the side 
 with the ball to secure advantages through the variety of 
 its play; second, it distributes the labor and secures the 
 advantage of fresh strength, while it rests the main 
 ground-gainers. For these reasons, then, it is well 
 worth the while to run the guards, tackles, and ends, 
 although these are not in as advantageous positions for 
 gaining ground as are the half-backs and full-back. 
 
 The most valuable of the three rush-line positions for 
 ground gaining is the tackle, because from that position 
 the runner can get under sufficient speed to carry him for- 
 ward against opposition, and he can also secure the most 
 protection and help. The run also can be made in the 
 quickest time and without being immediately noticed. 
 
 The end position, when the end plays behind the line 
 and near the tackle, comes next in value of the line posi- 
 tions for running with the ball, because of the large num- 
 ber of interferers ahead. If rightly played by a fast 
 runner, the end will be able to make good advances be- 
 tween the tackle and end, and even around the end on the 
 other side. 
 
 The guard is in the hardest rush-line position for ad- 
 vancing the ball, because it is impossible for him to get 
 under speed when making a quick turn around the quar- 
 ter-back, and on the other hand he cannot afford to run 
 out to the end, because he would be sure to be tackled 
 whether he ran close to the line with little interference, 
 or ran farther back with better interference but with 
 greater risk of loss of ground.
 
 SIGNALS. 
 
 In the modern game of football it is absolutely neces- 
 sary that before each play a signal should be given, which 
 will inform every man on the team of the movement 
 about to be executed. Every player has a special duty 
 to perform each time the ball is snapped, and unless he is 
 informed beforehand of the evolution intended, it will be 
 impossible to render the requisite assistance. It is of 
 equal importance that the opposing team should be kept 
 in absolute ignorance in regard to the intention of the 
 play, so that they may not anticipate and thwart it. 
 
 That code of signals will be best, then, which will in- 
 dicate in the simplest manner the play intended, while at 
 the same time being unintelligible to opponents. Too 
 frequently such a complicated system of signals is adopted 
 that the players themselves become confused, or at least 
 are unable to comprehend the order upon the instant, and 
 the momentary delay thus caused proves a great disad- 
 vantage. There is far less likelihood that the opposing 
 team will be informed by the signal what play is in- 
 tended, than that they shall discover its probable direc- 
 tion by the position assumed or nervousness betrayed by 
 some one of the backs or rushers. 
 
 There are three systems of signals which have a prac- 
 tical value : Sign signals, word signals, and number sig- 
 nals. Sign signals possess one advantage which neither 
 of the other two can claim. They can be understood 
 with readiness amid the most deafening cheering from the 
 
 (257)
 
 side lines. It often happens that the cheering is so con- 
 tinuous at critical moments during the great' matches, 
 where many thousand people are assembled, that for sev- 
 eral moments the play is almost paralyzed on account of 
 the inability of the captain to make his orders heard. It 
 is readily perceived what an advantage it would be to 
 have a code of signals which would direct the play 
 rapidly and unerringly at such a time. 
 
 On the other hand, there is, perhaps, more danger that 
 the opposing team may notice and soon learn to under, 
 stand signs than when spoken signals are used, for it is 
 necessary that each man on the side shall look at the 
 quarter-back or captain at the time when he gives the sig- 
 nal (usually this will be when the men are lining up), 
 and this will of necessity attract more or less attention to 
 what it is expressly desired to cover up. Every team 
 would do well, however, to have a complete system of 
 sign signals, which they can use at critical times in case 
 of emergency. 
 
 The following extract from a code once in operation 
 will furnish suggestions which will enable any ingenious 
 captain to devise a practical set : Pull up trousers on 
 right side RH between c and RG. Pull up trousers on 
 left side LH between c and LG. Right hand on right 
 thigh RH between RG and RT. Right hand on left 
 thigh RH between LG and LT. Right hand on right 
 knee RH between RT and RE. Right hand on left knee 
 
 RH between LT and LE. Right hand on collar on right 
 side RH around RE. Right hand on collar on leftside 
 
 RH around LE. Right hand on chin RT around be- 
 tween LG and LT. Right hand on right hip RE around 
 the LE. Pull on jacket lacings kick down the field. 
 
 Similar motions with the left hand will direct cor-
 
 2 59 
 
 responding plays in the opposite direction. The mo- 
 tions should be made so naturally that they will not at- 
 tract attention, but in deciding upon movements care 
 should be taken not to select those which will be used in- 
 voluntarily, lest signals be given sometimes without in- 
 tention. 
 
 In the system of word signals peculiar expressions, 
 such as " Brace up now," " Now brace," " Hold your men 
 hard," "Tear up this line," "We must do better now," 
 and the like, introduced by the captain with a few off- 
 hand sentences before each play, direct the next move- 
 ment. Again, speaking to the left tackle may indicate 
 that the left half-back is to run around the right end, 
 each man being made to indicate a different evolution; 
 and a word of encouragement or-blame thus be made the 
 signal for the next play. 
 
 Perhaps the system of signaling by numbers is most 
 simple and satisfactory, for it admits of a great variety 
 of combinations, and the key will not be readily de- 
 tected. Sometimes a long sequence of numbers are called 
 out, the signal being conveyed by the first two or three, 
 and the others being added merely to mystify the oppos- 
 ing side, but a combination of three numbers is rather 
 preferable. 
 
 A very simple code may be arranged, in which each 
 opening is given a number, and each player a number. 
 The combination of two numbers, then, will indicate the 
 man who is to receive the ball, and the opening through 
 which he is to pass, while a third will be called for the 
 sake of deception. For example : We will suppose that 
 the openings in the line, as they radiate from the center, 
 have been numbered 4, 6, 8, and 10, respectively, upon 
 the right, and 5, 7, 9, and n upon the left; the center-
 
 260 
 
 rusher will be No. i, RG will be 2, RT will be 4, RE will be 
 6, and RH will be 8 ; while on the left LG will be 3, LT 
 will be 5, LE will be 7, and LH will be 9, with FB n. 
 We will further suppose that but three numbers are to 
 be given each time ; that the first number called will 
 mean nothing ; the second number called will indicate 
 the player who is to receive the ball ; and the third 
 number the opening through which he is to pass. 
 
 To illustrate: The captain calls "9, 5, 8!" The 9 
 means nothing. The second number indicates the player 
 who is to receive the ball, which in the present instance 
 is No. 5, the left tackle. The third number shows the 
 opening through which he is to pass in this case No. 8, 
 and hence between RT and LE. The interpretation of 
 the signal, then, is that LT is to receive the ball, pass 
 around the center, and dash into the line between RT 
 and RE.* Thus any combination desired may be ef- 
 fected. 
 
 If, after a time, the opposing team discovers the sig- 
 nal for one or more of the plays, the entire system may 
 be changed by simply informing the team by a peculiar 
 signal, previously arranged, that the first number will 
 thereafter indicate the opening, while the third will indi- 
 cate the player who is to take the ball. The three num- 
 bers admit of six different arrangements, and the team 
 should be drilled upon at least three of them until they 
 can execute the plays with equal readiness under each 
 arrangement. 
 
 In more difficult systems each play is given a separate 
 number, which number may be called out either first, 
 second, or third, as determined. Again, letting each 
 play be indicated by a particular number, as before, the 
 
 * See diagram nineteen.
 
 26l 
 
 sum of the last two numbers is taken to make the num- 
 ber desired. This latter system, though, perhaps, a little 
 more difficult, will prove the most satisfactory. 
 
 If two numbers are to be added together, the captain 
 will do well to make one of them quite small, and call 
 the larger number of the two first, for the addition will be 
 performed by all much quicker and with less effort. 
 During the first of the season it will be well to use one 
 particular number to represent a play, and when these 
 have been thoroughly learned it will be but a compar- 
 atively easy matter to change to the sum of any two. 
 
 When the number for the play has reached twenty, it 
 may make the signals easier to have all the numbers be- 
 tween twenty and thirty indicate a certain other play; 
 all the numbers between thirty and forty, another; and 
 so on. 
 
 As the kick is a frequent play, and as it is nearly al- 
 ways apparent, it may be well to have two numbers, 
 either one of which will be the signal for a kick down 
 the field. 
 
 Enough has now been said to suggest how a practical 
 system of signals may be devised.
 
 AXIOMS. 
 
 Line up quickly the moment the ball is down and play 
 a dashing game from start to finish. 
 
 Never under any circumstances talk about your hurts 
 and bruises. If you are unable to play, or have a severe 
 strain, tell the captain at once. He will always release 
 you. 
 
 When thrown hard always get up as if not hurt in the 
 slightest. You will be thrown twice as hard next time if 
 you appear to be easily hurt by a fall. 
 
 When coached upon the field never under any circum- 
 stances answer back or make any excuses. Do as nearly 
 as possible exactly what you are told. 
 
 Always throw your man hard, and toward his own goal, 
 when you tackle him. 
 
 Never converse with an opponent during the game, but 
 wait until the game is over for the exchange of civilities. 
 
 If you miss a tackle turn right around and follow the 
 man at utmost speed ; some one else may block him just 
 long enough for you to catch him from behind. 
 
 Never play a " slugging game " ; it interferes with good 
 football playing. 
 
 Try to make a touch-down during the first two minutes 
 of the game, before the opponents have become fairly 
 waked up. 
 
 Play a. fast game ; let one play come after the next in 
 rapid succession without any waits or delays. The more 
 rapidly you play, the more effective it will be. Therefore 
 
 (262)
 
 263 
 
 line up quickly and get back in your regular place in- 
 stantly after making a run. 
 
 When thrown, allow yourself to fall limp, with legs 
 straight, and then you will not get hurt. Do not try to 
 save yourself by putting out a hand or arm ; it may be 
 sprained or broken. If you are flat on the ground you 
 cannot be hurt, no matter how many pile on top of you. 
 
 Always tackle low. The region between the knees and 
 waist is the place to be aimed at. When preparing to 
 tackle, keep your eyes on the runner's hips, for they are 
 the least changeable part of the body. 
 
 Lift the runner off his feet and throw him toward his 
 own goal. When not near enough to do this, spring 
 through the air at him and hit him as hard as possible 
 with the shoulder ; at the same time grip him with the 
 arms and drag him down. Always put the head down in 
 doing this and throw the weight forward quickly and 
 hard. Crawl up on the runner when he falls and take the 
 ball away if possible ; at least prevent its being passed. 
 
 When the runner is in a mass, or wedge, drive in and 
 lift his legs out from under him, or fall down in front of 
 him. 
 
 If the runner's feet are held, push back on his chest 
 and make him fall toward his own goal. 
 
 Don't wait for the runner to meet you ; meet the runner. 
 
 Always have a hand in the tackle. Don't " think " the 
 runner is stopped ; make sure of it. 
 
 Follow your own runners hard; you may have a chance 
 to assist him, or block off for him. Always be in readi- 
 ness to receive the ball from the runner when he is tackled. 
 
 Fall on the ball always in a scrimmage, or when sur- 
 rounded by opponents. When the ball is kicked behind 
 your own goal, or across the side line, do not fall on it
 
 264 
 
 until it stops unless there is danger of the opponents being 
 put on side. 
 
 Put your head down when going through the line and 
 dive in with your whole weight. 
 
 Call "down" loudly, but not until it is impossible to 
 make further advances. 
 
 Squeeze the ball tightly when tackled, or when going 
 through the line. 
 
 Never under any circumstances give up because the 
 other side seems to be superior. They may weaken at 
 any moment, or a valuable player be ruled off or tem- 
 porarily disabled. Let each man encourage the others 
 on the team by monosyllables and keep up a " team 
 enthusiasm." 
 
 Be the first man down the field on a kick. 
 
 Block your men hard when the opponents have the 
 ball. 
 
 Tear up the line, break through and stop every kick 
 that is made. 
 
 Never take your eyes off the ball after the signal has 
 been given, if you are a man behind the line. 
 
 Do not be contented with a superficial reading on foot- 
 ball, but study it carefully, if you would master it.
 
 RULES ADOPTED 
 
 BY THE 
 
 AMERICA* INTERCOLLEGIATE FOOTBALL ASSOCIATION 
 
 FOR 1893. 
 
 (Copyrighted and printed by permission of A. G. Spaulding 
 & Bros.) 
 
 RULE i. (a) A drop-kick is madfe by letting the ball 
 fall from the hands and kicking it at the very instant it 
 rises. 
 
 (b) A place-kick is made by kicking the ball after it 
 has been placed on the ground. 
 
 (c) A punt is made by letting the ball fall from the 
 hands and kicking it before it touches the ground. 
 
 (d) Kick-off is a place-kick from the center of the field 
 of play, and cannot score a goal. 
 
 (e) Kick-out is a drop-kick, or place-kick, by a player 
 of the side which has touched the ball down in their own 
 goal, or into whose touch-in-goal the ball has gone, and 
 cannot score a goal. (See Rules 32 and 34.) 
 
 (f) A free-kick is one where the opponents are re- 
 strained by rule. 
 
 RULE 2. (a) In touch means out of bounds. 
 (b) A fair is putting the ball in play from touch. 
 
 NOTE. The ball adopted and used by the American Intercol- 
 legiate Association is the " Spaulding J." ball. 
 
 (265)
 
 266 
 
 RULE 3. A foul is any violation of a rule. 
 
 RULE 4. (a) A touch-down is made when the ball is 
 carried, kicked, or passed across the goal line and there 
 held, either in goal or touch-in-goal. The point where the 
 touch-down scores, however, is not necessarily where the 
 ball is carried across the line, but where the ball is fairly 
 held or called " down." 
 
 () A safety is made when a player guarding his goal 
 receives the ball from a player of his own side, either by 
 a pass, kick, or a snap-back, and then touches it down 
 behind his goal line, or when he himself carries the ball 
 across his own goal line and touches it down, or when he 
 puts the ball into his own touch-in-goal, or when the ball, 
 being kicked by one of his own side, bounds back from 
 an opponent across the goal line and he then touches it 
 down. 
 
 (c) A touch-back is made when a player touches the 
 ball to the ground behind his own goal, the impetus which 
 sent the ball across the line having been received from an 
 opponent. 
 
 RULE 5. A punt-out is a punt made by a player of the 
 side which has made a touch-down in their opponents' 
 goal to another of his own side for a fair catch. 
 
 RULE 6. A goal may be obtained by kicking the ball 
 in any way except a punt from the field of play (without 
 touching the ground, or dress, or person of any player 
 after the kick) over the cross-bar or post of opponents' 
 goal. 
 
 RULE 7. A scrimmage takes place when the holder of 
 the ball puts it down on the ground, and puts it in play 
 by kicking it or snapping it back. 
 
 RULE 8. A fair catch is a catch made direct from a 
 kick by one of the opponents, or from a punt-out by one
 
 267 
 
 of the same side, provided the catcher made a mark with 
 his heel at the spot where he has made the catch, and no 
 other of his side touch the ball. If the catcher, after 
 making his mark, be deliberately thrown to the ground 
 by an opponent, he shall be given five yards, unless this 
 carries the ball across the goal line. 
 
 RULE 9. Charging is rushing forward to seize the ball 
 or tackle a player. 
 
 RULE 10. Interference is using the hands or arms in 
 any way to obstruct or hold a player who has not the ball. 
 This does not apply to the man running with the ball. 
 
 RULE ii. The ball is dead: 
 
 I. When the holder has cried down, or when the referee 
 has cried down, or when the umpire has called foul. 
 
 II. When a goal has been obtained. 
 
 III. When it has gone into touch, or touch-in-goal, ex- 
 cept for punt-out. 
 
 IV. When a touch-down or safety has been made. 
 
 V. When a fair catch has been heeled. No play can 
 be made while the ball is dead, except to put in play by 
 rule. 
 
 RULE 12. The grounds must be 330 feet in length and 
 1 60 feet in width, with a goal place in the middle of each 
 goal line, composed of two upright posts, exceeding 20 
 feet in height, and placed 18 feet 6 inches apart, with 
 cross-bar 10 feet from the ground. 
 
 RULE 13. The game shall be played by teams of eleven 
 men each, and in case of a disqualified or injured player 
 a substitute shall take his place. Nor shall the disqualified 
 or injured player return to further participation in the 
 game. 
 
 Amendment adopted at a special meeting of the Inter- 
 collegiate Association, 1893: " No member of a graduate
 
 2 68 
 
 department, nor a special student shall be allowed to 
 play, nor any undergraduate who has registered or 
 attended lectures or recitations at any other university or 
 college nor by any undergraduate who is not pursuing a 
 course requiring for a degree an attendance of at least 
 three years." 
 
 RULE 14. There shall be an umpire and a referee. No 
 man shall act as an umpire who is an alumnus of either 
 of the competing colleges. The umpires shall be nomi- 
 nated and elected by the Advisory Committee. The 
 referee shall be chosen by the two captains of the oppos- 
 ing teams in each game, except in case of disagreement, 
 when the choice shall be referred to the Advisory Com- 
 mittee, whose decision shall be final. All the referees 
 and umpires shall be permanently elected and assigned 
 on or before the third Saturday in October in each year. 
 
 RULE 15. (a) The umpire is the judge for the players, 
 and his decision is final regarding fouls and unfair tactics. 
 
 (b) The referee is judge for the ball, and his decision is 
 final in all points not covered by the umpire. 
 
 (c) Both umpire and referee shall use whistles to indi- 
 cate cessation of play on fouls and downs. The referee 
 shall use a stop-watch in timing the game. 
 
 (d) The umpire shall permit no coaching, either by 
 substitutes, coaches, or any one inside the ropes. If such 
 
 coaching occur he shall warn the offender, and upon the 
 second offense must have him sent behind the ropes for 
 the remainder of the game. 
 
 RULE 16. (a) The time of a game is an hour and a 
 half, each side playing forty-five minutes from each goal. 
 There shall be ten minutes' intermission between the two 
 halves. The game shall be decided by the score of even 
 halves. Either side refusing to play after ordered to by
 
 269 
 
 the referee, shall forfeit the game. This shall also apply 
 to refusing to commence the game when ordered to by 
 the referee. The referee shall notify the captains of the 
 time remaining, not more than ten, nor less than five, 
 minutes from the end of each half. 
 
 (b) Time shall not be called for the end of a three- 
 quarter until the ball is dead ; and in the case of a try-at- 
 goal from a touch-down the try shall be allowed. Time 
 shall be taken out while the ball is being brought out, 
 either for a try, kick-out, or kick-off. 
 
 RULE 17. No one wearing projecting nails or iron 
 plates on his shoes, or any metal substance upon his per- 
 son, shall be allowed to play in a match. No sticky or 
 greasy substance shall be used on the person of players. 
 
 RULE 18. The ball goes into touch when it crosses the 
 side line, or when the holder puts part of either foot 
 across or on that line. The touch line is in touch, and 
 the goal line in goal. 
 
 RULE 19. The captains shall toss up before the com- 
 mencement of the match, and the winner of the toss shall 
 have his choice of goal or of kick-off. The same side 
 shall not kick off in two successive halves. 
 
 RULE 20. The ball shall be kicked off at the begin- 
 ning of each half; and whenever a goal has been ob- 
 tained, the side which has lost it shall kick off. (See 
 Rules 32 and 34.) 
 
 RULE 21. A player who has made and claimed a fair 
 catch shall tak"e a drop-kick, or a punt, or place the ball 
 for a place-kick. The opponents may come up to the 
 catcher's mark, and the ball must be kicked from some 
 spot behind that mark on a parallel to touch line. 
 
 RULE 22. The side which has a free-kick must be be- 
 hind the ball when it is kicked. At kick-off the opposite
 
 270 
 
 side must stand at least ten yards in front of the ball 
 until it is kicked. 
 
 RULE 23. Charging is lawful for opponents if a pun- 
 ter advances beyond his line, or in case of a place-kick, 
 immediately the ball is put in play by touching the 
 ground. In case of a punt-out, not till ball is kicked. 
 
 RULE 24. (a) A player is put off side, if, during a 
 scrimmage he gets in front of the ball, or if the ball has 
 been last touched by his own side behind him. It is im- 
 possible for a player to be off side in his own goal. No 
 player when off side shall touch the ball, or interrupt, 
 or obstruct opponent with his hands or arms until again 
 on side. 
 
 (b) A player being off side is put on side when the ball 
 has touched an opponent, or when one of his own side 
 has run in front of him, either with the ball, or having 
 touched it when behind him. 
 
 (c) If a player when off side touches the ball inside the 
 opponents' five-yard line, the ball shall go as a touch- 
 back to the opponents. 
 
 RULE 25. No player shall lay his hands upon, or in- 
 terfere by use of hands or arms, with an opponent, unless 
 he has the ball. The side which has the ball can only in- 
 terfere with the body. The side which has not the ball 
 can use the hands and arms, as heretofore. 
 
 RULE 26. (a) A foul shall be,, gran ted for intentional 
 delay of game, off side play, or holding an opponent, 
 unless he has the ball. No delay arising from any cause 
 whatsoever shall continue more than five minutes. 
 
 (b) The penalty for fouls and violation of rules, except 
 otherwise provided, shall be a down for the other side; 
 or, if the side making the foul has not the ball, five yards 
 to the opponents.
 
 RULE 27. (a) A player shall be disqualified for unnec- 
 essary roughness, hacking or striking with closed fist. 
 
 (b) For the offenses of throttling, tripping up or inten- 
 tional tackling below the knees, the opponents shall re- 
 ceive twenty-five yards, or a free-kick, at their option. In 
 case, however, the twenty-five yards would carry the 
 ball across the goal line they can have half the distance 
 from the spot of the offense to the goal line, and shall not 
 be allowed a free-kick. 
 
 RULE 28. A player may throw or pass the ball in any 
 direction except towards opponents' goal. If the ball be 
 batted in any direction or thrown forward it shall go 
 down on the spot to opponents. 
 
 RULE 29. If a player when off side interferes with 
 an opponent trying for a fair catch, by touching him or 
 the ball, or waving his hat or hands, the opponent may 
 have a free-kick, or down, where the interference oc- 
 curred. 
 
 RULE 30. (a) If a player having the ball be tackled 
 and the ball fairly held, the man so tackling shall cry 
 " held," the one so tackled must cry " down," and some 
 player of his side put it down for a scrimmage. The 
 snapper back and the man opposite him cannot pick out 
 the ball with the hand until it touch a third man; nor can 
 the opponents interfere with the snapper-back by touch- 
 ing the ball until it is actually put in play. Infringement 
 of this nature shall give the side having the ball five 
 yards at every such offense. The snapper-back is en- 
 titled to full and undisturbed possession of the ball. If 
 the snapper-back be off side in the act of snapping back, 
 the ball must be snapped again; and if this occurs three 
 times on same down, the ball goes to opponents. The 
 man who first receives the ball, when snapped back from
 
 272 
 
 a down, or thrown back from a fair, shall not carry the 
 ball forward under any circumstances whatever. If, in 
 three consecutive fairs and downs, unless the ball cross 
 the goal line, a team shall not have advanced the ball 
 five or taken it back twenty yards, it shall go to the op- 
 ponents on spot of fourth. " Consecutive " means with- 
 out leaving the hands of the side holding it, and by a 
 kick giving opponents fair and equal chance of gaining 
 possession of it. When the referee, or umpire, has given 
 a side five yards, the following down shall be counted 
 the first down. 
 
 (b) The man who puts the ball in play in a scrimmage 
 cannot pick it up until it has touched some third man. 
 " Third man " means any other player than the one put- 
 ting the ball in play and the man opposite him. 
 
 RULE 31. If the ball goes into touch, whether it bounds 
 back or not, a player on the side which touches it down 
 must bring it to the spot where the line was crossed, and 
 there either 
 
 I. Bound the ball in the field of play or touch it in with 
 both hands at right angles to the touch line, and then run 
 with it, kick it, or throw it back; or 
 
 II. Throw it out at right angles to the touch line; or 
 
 III. Walk out with it at right angles to touch line any 
 distance not less than five nor more than fifteen yards, and 
 there put it down, first declaring how far he intends walk- 
 ing. The man who puts the ball in must face field or op- 
 ponents' goal, and he alone can have his foot outside 
 touch line. Any one except him who puts his hands or 
 feet beween the ball and his opponents' goal is off side. If 
 it be not thrown out at right angles either side may claim 
 it thrown over again, and if it fail to be put in play fairly 
 in three trials it shall go to the opponents.
 
 273 
 
 RULE 32. A side which has made a touchdown in their 
 opponents' goal must try at goal, either by a place-kick or 
 a punt-out. If the goal be missed the ball shall go as a 
 kick-off at the center of the field to the defenders of the 
 goal. 
 
 RULE 33. (a) If the try be by a place-kick, a player of 
 the side which has touched the ball down shall bring it up 
 to the goal line, and, making a mark opposite the spot 
 where it was touched down, bring it out at right angles to 
 the goal line such distance as he thinks proper, and there 
 place it for another of his side to kick. The opponents 
 must remain behind their goal line until the ball has been 
 placed on the ground. 
 
 (b) The placer in a try-at-goal may be off side or in 
 touch without vitiating the kick. 
 
 RULE 34. If the try be by a punt-out the punter shall 
 bring the ball up to the goal line, and, making a mark op- 
 posite the spot where it was touched down, punt out from 
 any spot behind line of goal and not nearer the goal post 
 than such mark, to another of his side, all of whom must 
 stand outside of goal line not less than fifteen feet. If the 
 touchdown was made in touch-in-goal the punt-out shall 
 be made from the intersection of the goal and touch lines. 
 The opponents may line up anywhere on the goal line ex- 
 cept space of five feet on each side of punter's mark, but 
 cannot interfere with punter, nor can he touch the ball 
 after kicking it until it touch some other player. If a fair 
 catch be made from a punt-out the mark shall serve to de- 
 termine positions as the mark of any fair catch. If a 
 fair catch be not made on the first attempt the ball shall 
 be punted over again, and if a fair catch be not made on 
 the second attempt the ball shall go as a kick-off at the 
 center of the field to the defenders of the goal.
 
 274 
 
 RULE 35. A side which has made a touch back or a 
 safety must kick out, except as otherwise provided (see 
 rule 32), from not more than twenty-five yards outside the 
 kicker's goal. If the ball go into touch before striking a 
 player it must be kicked out again, and if this occurs 
 three times in succession it shall be given to opponents as 
 in touch on twenty-five-yard line on side where it went 
 out. At kick-out opponents must be on twenty-five-yard 
 line or nearer their own goal. 
 
 RULE 36. The following shall be the value of each point 
 in the scoring: 
 
 Goal obtained by touchdown, 6 
 
 Goal from field kick, - - 5 
 
 Touchdown failing goal, - 4 
 
 Safety by opponents. - - 2
 
 IS matari-il + iU- MI 
 
 ^PL**^^